This is a modern-English version of Bookbinding, and the Care of Books: A Handbook for Amateurs, Bookbinders & Librarians, originally written by Cockerell, Douglas. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


THE ARTISTIC CRAFTS SERIES
OF TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS
EDITED BY W. R. LETHABY

THE ARTISTIC CRAFTS SERIES
OF TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS
EDITED BY W. R. LETHABY

BOOKBINDING

Bookbinding

BOOKBINDING, AND
THE CARE OF BOOKS

A HANDBOOK FOR AMATEURS BOOKBINDERS & LIBRARIANS BY DOUGLAS COCKERELL
WITH
DRAWINGS BY NOEL ROOKE AND OTHER ILLUSTRATIONS

A HANDBOOK FOR AMATEURS BOOKBINDERS & LIBRARIANS BY DOUGLAS COCKERELL
WITH
DRAWINGS BY NOEL ROOKE AND OTHER ILLUSTRATIONS

publisher_logo

NEW YORK
D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
1910

NEW YORK D. APPLETON AND COMPANY 1910

White Pigskin.Basle, 1512.

White Football.Basle, 1512.

EDITOR’S PREFACE[7]

In issuing this volume of a series of Handbooks on the Artistic Crafts, it will be well to state what are our general aims.

In releasing this volume of a series of Handbooks on the Artistic Crafts, it is important to outline our general goals.

In the first place, we wish to provide trustworthy text-books of workshop practice, from the points of view of experts who have critically examined the methods current in the shops, and putting aside vain survivals, are prepared to say what is good workmanship, and to set up a standard of quality in the crafts which are more especially associated with design. Secondly, in doing this, we hope to treat design itself as an essential part of good workmanship. During the last century most of the arts, save painting[8] and sculpture of an academic kind, were little considered, and there was a tendency to look on “design” as a mere matter of appearance. Such “ornamentation” as there was was usually obtained by following in a mechanical way a drawing provided by an artist who often knew little of the technical processes involved in production. With the critical attention given to the crafts by Ruskin and Morris, it came to be seen that it was impossible to detach design from craft in this way, and that, in the widest sense, true design is an inseparable element of good quality, involving as it does the selection of good and suitable material, contrivance for special purpose, expert workmanship, proper finish and so on, far more than mere ornament, and indeed, that ornamentation itself was rather an exuberance of fine workmanship than a matter of merely abstract lines. Workmanship when separated by too wide a gulf from fresh thought—that is, from design—inevitably decays, and, on the other hand,[9] ornamentation, divorced from workmanship, is necessarily unreal, and quickly falls into affectation. Proper ornamentation may be defined as a language addressed to the eye; it is pleasant thought expressed in the speech of the tool.

First, we want to provide reliable textbooks on workshop practices, based on insights from experts who have thoroughly examined the methods used in shops. They set aside outdated practices to define what constitutes good workmanship and establish a quality standard in crafts that are closely tied to design. Secondly, in doing this, we aim to treat design as a crucial part of good workmanship. Over the last century, most arts, except for painting[8] and academic sculpture, were largely overlooked, with a tendency to view "design" as just a matter of appearance. The "ornamentation" that did exist was typically created by mechanically following a drawing from an artist who often didn't fully understand the technical processes involved in making the product. Thanks to the critical attention brought to crafts by Ruskin and Morris, it became clear that design cannot be separated from craft like this. In the broadest sense, true design is an essential part of quality, as it involves choosing good, suitable materials, crafting for specific purposes, skilled workmanship, proper finishing, and more—much beyond just embellishment. In fact, ornamentation itself is more a manifestation of excellent workmanship than merely abstract lines. When workmanship is too far removed from fresh ideas—that is, from design—it inevitably deteriorates. Conversely, ornamentation that is disconnected from workmanship is inherently artificial and quickly becomes pretentious. True ornamentation can be described as a visual language; it conveys enjoyable ideas expressed through the skills of the craftsman.

In the third place, we would have this series put artistic craftsmanship before people as furnishing reasonable occupation for those who would gain a livelihood. Although within the bounds of academic art, the competition, of its kind, is so acute that only a very few per cent. can fairly hope to succeed as painters and sculptors; yet, as artistic craftsmen, there is every probability that nearly every one who would pass through a sufficient period of apprenticeship to workmanship and design would reach a measure of success.

In addition, we want this series to prioritize artistic craftsmanship over people, providing a reasonable way for individuals to earn a living. While the competition in academic art is so intense that only a small percentage can realistically expect to succeed as painters and sculptors, as artistic craftsmen, it's highly likely that almost everyone who goes through an adequate apprenticeship in workmanship and design would achieve a level of success.

In the blending of handwork and thought in such arts as we propose to deal with, happy careers may be found as far removed from the dreary routine of hack labour, as from the terrible uncertainty[10] of academic art. It is desirable in every way that men of good education should be brought back into the productive crafts: there are more than enough of us “in the city,” and it is probable that more consideration will be given in this century than in the last to Design and Workmanship.

In combining hands-on skills and creative thinking in the arts we're discussing, fulfilling careers can be found that are a world away from the dull grind of mindless labor and the unpredictable nature of academia in art. It's essential that well-educated people return to practical crafts: there are already plenty of us “in the city,” and it’s likely that this century will pay more attention to Design and Workmanship than the last did.[10]

W. R. LETHABY.

W. R. Lethaby.

AUTHOR’S NOTE[11]

It is hoped that this book will help bookbinders and librarians to select sound methods of binding books.

It is hoped that this book will assist bookbinders and librarians in choosing effective methods for binding books.

It is intended to supplement and not to supplant workshop training for bookbinders. No one can become a skilled workman by reading text-books, but to a man who has acquired skill and practical experience, a text-book, giving perhaps different methods from those to which he has been accustomed, may be helpful.

It is meant to enhance and not replace workshop training for bookbinders. No one can become a skilled worker just by reading textbooks, but for someone who has gained skill and practical experience, a textbook that presents different methods from what they're used to may be useful.

My thanks are due to many friends, including the workmen in my workshop, for useful suggestions and other help, and to the Society of Arts for permission to quote from the report of their Special Committee on leather for bookbinding.[12]

I want to thank many friends, including the workers in my workshop, for their helpful suggestions and support, and I appreciate the Society of Arts for allowing me to quote from the report of their Special Committee on leather for bookbinding.[12]

I should also like to express my indebtedness to my master, Mr. T. J. Cobden-Sanderson, for it was in his workshop that I learned my craft, and anything that may be of value in this book is due to his influence.

I would also like to express my gratitude to my mentor, Mr. T. J. Cobden-Sanderson, because it was in his workshop that I learned my craft, and anything of value in this book is thanks to his influence.

D. C.

D.C.

November 1901.

November 1901.

CONTENTS[13]

PART I
BINDING
 PAGE
Editor’s Preface7
Author’s Note11
CHAPTER I
Introduction17
CHAPTER II
Entering—Books in Sheets—Folding—Collating—Pulling to Pieces—Refolding—Knocking out Joints33
CHAPTER III
Guarding—Throwing Out—Paring Paper—Soaking off India Proofs—Mounting very Thin Paper—Splitting Paper—Inlaying—Flattening Vellum53
CHAPTER IV
[14]Sizing—Washing—Mending67
CHAPTER V
End Papers—Leather Joints—Pressing80
CHAPTER VI
Trimming Edges before Sewing—Edge Gilding92
CHAPTER VII
Marking up—Sewing—Materials for Sewing98
CHAPTER VIII
Fraying out Slips—Glueing up—Rounding and Backing114
CHAPTER IX
Cutting and Attaching Boards—Cleaning off Back—Pressing124
CHAPTER X
Cutting in Boards—Gilding and Colouring Edges139
CHAPTER XI
Headbanding147
CHAPTER XII
Preparing for Covering—Paring Leather—Covering—Mitring [15]Corners—Filling-in Boards152
CHAPTER XIII
Library Binding—Binding very Thin Books—Scrap-Books—Binding in Vellum—Books covered with Embroidery173
CHAPTER XIV
Decoration—Tools—Finishing—Tooling on Vellum—Inlaying on Leather188
CHAPTER XV
Lettering—Blind Tooling—Heraldic Ornament215
CHAPTER XVI
Designing for Gold-Tooled Decoration230
CHAPTER XVII
Pasting down End Papers—Opening Books254
CHAPTER XVIII
Clasps and Ties—Metal on Bindings259
CHAPTER XIX
Leather263
CHAPTER XX
[16]Paper—Pastes—Glue280
PART II
Book Care When Bound
CHAPTER XXI
Injurious Influences to which Books are Subjected291
CHAPTER XXII
To Preserve Old Bindings—Re-backing302
Specs307
Glossary313
Bindings Reproductions (Eight Collotypes)319
Index337

PART I
BINDING

CHAPTER I[17]

INTRODUCTION

The reasons for binding the leaves of a book are to keep them together in their proper order, and to protect them. That bindings can be made, that will adequately protect books, can be seen from the large number of fifteenth and sixteenth century bindings now existing on books still in excellent condition. That bindings are made, that fail to protect books, may be seen by visiting any large library, when it will be found that many bindings have their boards loose and the leather crumbling to dust. Nearly all librarians complain, that they have to be continually[18] rebinding books, and this not after four hundred, but after only five or ten years.

The reasons for binding the leaves of a book are to keep them together in the correct order and to protect them. You can see that bindings can be made that adequately protect books from the large number of fifteenth and sixteenth-century bindings that are still in excellent condition today. On the other hand, bindings that fail to protect books can be observed in any large library, where many bindings have loose boards and the leather is crumbling to dust. Almost all librarians complain that they have to constantly [18] rebind books, and this happens not after four hundred years, but after only five or ten years.

It is no exaggeration to say that ninety per cent. of the books bound in leather during the last thirty years will need rebinding during the next thirty. The immense expense involved must be a very serious drag on the usefulness of libraries; and as rebinding is always to some extent damaging to the leaves of a book, it is not only on account of the expense that the necessity for it is to be regretted.

It’s not an exaggeration to say that ninety percent of the books bound in leather over the last thirty years will need rebinding in the next thirty. The huge cost associated with this has to significantly impact the usefulness of libraries. Additionally, since rebinding can damage a book’s pages, it’s regrettable not just because of the expense, but for this reason as well.

The reasons that have led to the production in modern times of bindings that fail to last for a reasonable time, are twofold. The materials are badly selected or prepared, and the method of binding is faulty. Another factor in the decay of bindings, both old and new, is the bad conditions under which they are often kept.

The reasons for the production of bindings today that don’t last very long are twofold. The materials are poorly chosen or prepared, and the binding method is flawed. Another factor contributing to the deterioration of bindings, both old and new, is the poor conditions in which they are often stored.

The object of this text-book is to describe the best methods of bookbinding, and of keeping books when bound, taking into account the present-day conditions. No attempt has been made to describe all possible methods, but only such as appear to have answered best on old books. The methods described are for binding that[19] can be done by hand with the aid of simple appliances. Large editions of books are now bound, or rather cased, at an almost incredible speed by the aid of machinery, but all work that needs personal care and thought on each book, is still done, and probably always will be done, by hand. Elaborate machinery can only be economically employed when very large numbers of books have to be turned out exactly alike.

The purpose of this textbook is to explain the best methods of bookbinding and how to maintain books once they are bound, considering today's conditions. It doesn’t try to cover every possible technique, but focuses on those that have worked best for older books. The methods described are for binding that[19] can be done by hand with simple tools. Large print runs of books are now bound, or rather cased, at an astonishing speed using machinery, but any work that requires personal attention and care for each book is still done by hand, and likely always will be. Complex machinery can only be used economically when producing very large quantities of identical books.

The ordinary cloth “binding” of the trade, is better described as casing. The methods being different, it is convenient to distinguish between casing and binding. In binding, the slips are firmly attached to the boards before covering; in casing, the boards are covered separately, and afterwards glued on to the book. Very great efforts have been made in the decoration of cloth covers, and it is a pity that the methods of construction have not been equally considered. If cloth cases are to be looked upon as a temporary binding, then it seems a pity to waste so much trouble on their decoration; and if they are to be looked upon as permanent binding, it is a pity the construction is not better.[20]

The standard cloth “binding” used in the industry is better referred to as casing. Since the methods are different, it’s helpful to differentiate between casing and binding. In binding, the slips are securely attached to the boards before the covering is applied; in casing, the boards are covered separately and then glued onto the book. Significant effort has gone into decorating cloth covers, which makes it unfortunate that the construction methods have not received equal attention. If cloth cases are seen as a temporary binding, it seems unnecessary to put so much work into their decoration; and if they are intended to be permanent binding, it’s disappointing that the construction isn’t better.[20]

For books of only temporary interest, the usual cloth cases answer well enough; but for books expected to have permanent value, some change is desirable.

For books that are only of temporary interest, regular cloth covers work just fine; however, for books meant to hold lasting value, a different approach is needed.

Valuable books should either be issued in bindings that are obviously temporary, or else in bindings that are strong enough to be considered permanent. The usual cloth case fails as a temporary binding, because the methods employed result in serious damage to the sections of the book, often unfitting them for rebinding, and it fails as a permanent binding on account of the absence of sound construction.

Valuable books should either be released in obviously temporary bindings or in bindings that are durable enough to be seen as permanent. The typical cloth cover doesn't work as a temporary binding because the methods used cause significant damage to the book's sections, often making them unfit for rebinding. It also fails as a permanent binding because it lacks solid construction.

In a temporary publisher’s binding, nothing should be done to the sections of a book that would injure them. Plates should be guarded, the sewing should be on tapes, without splitting the head and tail, or “sawing in” the backs, of the sections; the backs should be glued up square without backing. The case may be attached, as is now usual. For a permanent publisher’s binding, something like that recommended for libraries (page 173) is suggested, with either leather or cloth on the back.

In a temporary publisher's binding, nothing should be done to the sections of a book that could damage them. Plates should be protected, the sewing should be on tapes, and care should be taken not to split the head and tail or "saw in" the backs of the sections; the backs should be glued up square without backing. The case can be attached, as is commonly done now. For a permanent publisher's binding, something similar to what is recommended for libraries (page 173) is suggested, with either leather or cloth on the back.

At the end of the book four specifications are given (page 307). The first is[21] suggested for binding books of special interest or value, where no restriction as to price is made. A binding under this specification may be decorated to any extent that the nature of the book justifies. The second is for good binding, for books of reference and other heavy books that may have a great deal of wear. All the features of the first that make for the strength of the binding are retained, while those less essential, that only add to the appearance, are omitted. Although the binding under this specification would be much cheaper than that carried out under the first, it would still be too expensive for the majority of books in most libraries; and as it would seem to be impossible to further modify this form of binding, without materially reducing its strength, for cheaper work, a somewhat different system is recommended. The third specification is recommended for the binding of the general run of small books in most libraries. The fourth is a modification of this for pamphlets and other books of little value, that need to be kept together tidily for occasional reference.

At the end of the book, four specifications are provided (page 307). The first is suggested for binding books of special interest or value, with no price restrictions. A binding following this specification can be decorated as much as the book justifies. The second is for quality binding for reference books and other heavy books that will experience a lot of wear. All the features from the first specification that enhance the binding's strength are kept, while those that are less critical and only improve appearance are removed. Even though this type of binding would be much cheaper than the first, it would still be too expensive for most books in regular libraries. Given that it seems impossible to modify this binding further without significantly compromising its strength, a different approach is recommended for cheaper options. The third specification is recommended for binding the average small books found in most libraries. The fourth is a variation of this for pamphlets and other low-value books that need to be organized neatly for occasional reference.

Thanks, in a great measure, to the work[22] of Mr. Cobden-Sanderson, there is in England the germ of a sound tradition for the best binding. The Report of the Committee appointed by the Society of Arts to investigate the cause of the decay of modern leather bindings, should tend to establish a sound tradition for cheaper work. The third specification at the end of this book is practically the same as that given in their Report, and was arrived at by selection, after many libraries had been examined, and many forms of binding compared.

Thanks largely to the efforts of Mr. Cobden-Sanderson, there’s a foundation for high-quality bookbinding in England. The report from the committee set up by the Society of Arts to look into the decline of modern leather bindings should help create a solid standard for more affordable options. The third specification at the end of this book is essentially the same as what’s outlined in their report, and it was determined through careful selection after examining various libraries and comparing different binding styles.

Up to the end of the eighteenth century the traditional methods of binding books had altered very little during three hundred years. Books were generally sewn round five cords, the ends of all of these laced into the boards, and the leather attached directly to the back. At the end of the eighteenth century it became customary to pare down leather until it was as thin as paper, and soon afterwards the use of hollow backs and false bands became general, and these two things together mark the beginning of the modern degradation of binding, so far as its utility as a protection is concerned.

Up until the end of the eighteenth century, the traditional methods of binding books changed very little over three hundred years. Books were usually sewn around five cords, with the ends of all of these laced into the covers, and the leather attached directly to the spine. By the end of the eighteenth century, it became common practice to shave down leather until it was as thin as paper, and soon after, the use of hollow backs and false bands became widespread. These two changes mark the start of the modern decline in binding, at least in terms of its usefulness as protection.

The Society of Arts Committee report[23] that the bookbinders must share with the leather manufacturers and librarians the blame for the premature decay of modern bindings, because—

The Society of Arts Committee report[23] says that bookbinders have to share the blame for the early deterioration of modern bindings with leather manufacturers and librarians, because—

“1. Books are sewn on too few, and too thin cords, and the slips are pared down unduly (for the sake of neatness), and are not in all cases firmly laced into the boards. This renders the attachment of the boards to the book almost entirely dependent on the strength of the leather.

“1. Books are sewn on too few and too thin cords, and the slips are trimmed down too much (for the sake of neatness), and in many cases, they are not securely laced into the boards. This makes the connection of the boards to the book almost entirely rely on the strength of the leather.”

“2. The use of hollow backs throws all the strain of opening and shutting on the joints, and renders the back liable to come right off if the book is much used.

“2. Using hollow backs puts all the stress of opening and closing on the joints, making the back likely to come off if the book is used often.

“3. The leather of the back is apt to become torn through the use of insufficiently strong headbands, which are unable to stand the strain of the book being taken from the shelf.

“3. The leather on the back can easily get torn if weak headbands are used, which can't handle the stress of the book being pulled off the shelf.

“4. It is a common practice to use far too thin leather; especially to use large thick skins very much pared down for small books.

“4. It’s a common practice to use overly thin leather; especially to use large thick skins that are heavily reduced for small books.

“5. The leather is often made very wet and stretched a great deal in covering, with the result that on drying it is further strained, almost to breaking point, by contraction,[24] leaving a very small margin of strength to meet the accidents of use.”

“5. The leather is often soaked and stretched a lot during the covering process, which causes it to become even more strained when it dries, almost to the breaking point, due to contraction,[24] leaving very little strength to handle wear and tear.”

The history of the general introduction of hollow backs is probably somewhat as follows: Leather was doubtless first chosen for covering the backs of books because of its toughness and flexibility; because, while protecting the back, it would bend when the book was opened and allow the back to “throw up” (see fig. 1, A). When gold tooling became common, and the backs of books were elaborately decorated, it was found that the creasing of the leather injured the brightness or the gold and caused it to crack. To avoid this the binders lined up the back until it was as stiff as a block of wood. The back would then not “throw up” as the book was opened, the leather would not be creased, and the gold would remain uninjured (see fig. 1, B). This was all very well for the gold, but a book so treated does not open fully, and indeed, if the paper is stiff, can hardly be got to open at all. To overcome both difficulties the hollow back was introduced, and as projecting bands would have been in the way, the sewing cord was sunk in saw cuts made across the back of the book.[25]

The history of the general introduction of hollow backs is probably somewhat as follows: Leather was likely first selected for covering the backs of books because of its durability and flexibility; it protected the back while bending when the book was opened, allowing the back to "throw up" (see fig. 1, A). When gold tooling became popular, and the backs of books were intricately decorated, it was discovered that the creasing of the leather damaged the shine of the gold and caused it to crack. To prevent this, binders made the back rigid, ensuring it was as stiff as a block of wood. This way, the back wouldn’t "throw up" when the book was opened, the leather wouldn't crease, and the gold would stay intact (see fig. 1, B). This approach was great for the gold, but a book treated this way doesn't open fully, and if the paper is stiff, it can be almost impossible to open at all. To address both issues, the hollow back was introduced, and since external bands would have been obstructive, the sewing cord was placed in saw cuts made across the back of the book.[25]

Fig. 1.

Fig. 1.

Fig. 1.

The use of hollow backs was a very ingenious way out of the difficulty, as with them the backs could be made to “throw up,” and at the same time the leather was not disturbed (see fig. 1, C). The method of “sawing in” bands was known for a long time before the general[26] use of hollow backs. It has been used to avoid the raised bands on books covered with embroidered material.

The use of hollow backs was a clever solution to the problem, allowing the backs to be made to "throw up" without disturbing the leather (see fig. 1, C). The technique of "sawing in" bands had been known long before hollow backs became widely used. It was employed to avoid raised bands on books covered with embroidered material.

If a book is sewn on tapes, and the back lined with leather, there is no serious objection to a carefully-made hollow back without bands. The vellum binders use hollow backs made in this way for great account books that stand an immense amount of wear. They make the “hollow” very stiff, so that it acts as a spring to throw the back up.

If a book is sewn on tapes and the spine is lined with leather, there’s no major issue with a well-made hollow back that doesn’t have bands. Vellum binders use hollow backs like this for large account books that endure a lot of wear. They make the “hollow” very rigid so that it acts like a spring to lift the spine.

But although, if carefully done, satisfactory bindings may be made with hollow backs, their use has resulted in the production of worthless bindings with little strength, and yet with the appearance of better work.

But even though, if done carefully, decent bindings can be made with hollow backs, their use has led to the creation of low-quality bindings with little strength, while still looking like better work.

The public having been accustomed to raised bands on the backs of books, and the real bands being sunk in the back, the binders put false ones over the “hollow.” To save money or trouble, the bands being out of sight, the book would be sewn on only three or sometimes only two cords, the usual five false ones still showing at the back. Often only two out of the three bands would be laced into the board, and sometimes the slips would not be laced[27] in at all. Again, false headbands worked by the yard by machinery would be stuck on at the head and tail, and a “hollow” made with brown paper. Then leather so thin as to have but little strength, but used because it is easy to work and needs no paring, would be stuck on. The back would often be full gilt and lettered, and the sides sprinkled or marbled, thus further damaging the leather.

The public had gotten used to seeing raised bands on the backs of books, but the actual bands were often sunken in the back. To cut costs or avoid extra work, the binders placed fake ones over the “hollow.” Since the real bands were hidden, the book would be sewn onto only three or sometimes just two cords, while the standard five fake ones remained visible on the back. Often, only two of the three bands would be attached to the board, and sometimes the slips wouldn't be attached at all. Additionally, fake headbands produced by machines would be glued on at the top and bottom, with a “hollow” made from brown paper. Then, a layer of leather that was very thin and lacked strength—used because it’s easy to work with and doesn’t require trimming—would be glued on. The spine would frequently be gilded and lettered, and the covers would be sprinkled or marbled, which further damaged the leather.

In every large library hundreds of books bound somewhat on these lines may be seen. When they are received from the binder they have the appearance of being well bound, they look smart on the shelf, but in a few years, whether they are used or not, the leather will have perished and the boards become detached, and they will have to be rebound.

In every big library, you can see hundreds of books that are somewhat like this. When they come back from the binder, they look well-bound and nice on the shelf, but in just a few years, whether they’re used or not, the leather will wear out and the boards will come loose, and they’ll need to be rebound.

As long as librarians expect the appearance of a guinea binding for two or three shillings, such shams will be produced. The librarian generally gets his money’s worth, for it would be impossible for the binder to do better work at the price usually paid without materially altering the appearance of the binding. The polished calf and imitation crushed morocco must go, and in its place a rougher,[28] thicker leather must be employed. The full-gilt backs must go, the coloured lettering panel must go, the hollow backs must go, but in the place of these we may have the books sewn on tapes with the ends securely fastened into split boards, and the thick leather attached directly to the backs of the sections. (See specification III. page 307.)

As long as librarians expect a fancy binding for just a couple of shillings, these cheap imitations will keep coming. Usually, the librarian gets decent value for their money because it's impossible for the binder to deliver better quality at that price without significantly changing how the binding looks. The shiny calfskin and fake crushed morocco have to go, and instead, a rougher, thicker leather should be used. The full-gilt backs need to be eliminated, the colored lettering panels need to disappear, and the hollow backs have to go too. Instead, we can have books sewn onto tapes with the ends securely attached to split boards, and the thick leather attached straight to the backs of the sections. (See specification III. page 307.)

Such a binding would look well and not be more expensive than the usual library binding. It should allow the book to open flat, and if the materials are well selected, be very durable, and specially strong in the joints, the weak place in most bindings. The lettering on the back may be damaged in time if the book is much used, but if so it can easily be renewed at a fraction of the cost of rebinding, and without injury to the book.

Such a binding would look good and wouldn't be more expensive than the typical library binding. It should allow the book to open flat, and if the materials are chosen well, it will be very durable and particularly strong at the joints, which are the weak spots in most bindings. The lettering on the spine may wear out over time if the book is frequently used, but if that happens, it can be easily replaced at a fraction of the cost of rebinding, and without damaging the book.

While the majority of books in most libraries must be bound at a small cost, at most not exceeding a few shillings a volume, there is a large demand for good plain bindings, and a limited, but growing, demand for more or less decorated bindings for special books.

While most books in libraries need to be bound for a small fee, usually not more than a few shillings per volume, there’s a high demand for simple, good quality bindings, along with a limited but increasing demand for more decorative bindings for special books.

Any decoration but the simplest should be restricted to books bound as well as[29] the binder can do them. The presence of decoration should be evidence that the binder, after doing his best with the “forwarding,” has had time in which to try to make his work a beautiful, as well as a serviceable, production.

Any decoration beyond the simplest should be limited to books that are bound as well as[29] the binder can manage. The use of decoration should show that the binder, after doing his best with the “forwarding,” has had time to try to make his work both beautiful and functional.

Many books, although well bound, are better left plain, or with only a little decoration. But occasionally there are books that the binder can decorate as lavishly as he is able. As an instance of bindings that cannot be over-decorated, those books which are used in important ceremonies, such as Altar Books, may be mentioned. Such books may be decorated with gold and colour until they seem to be covered in a golden material. They will be but spots of gorgeousness in a great church or cathedral, and they cannot be said to be over-decorated as long as the decoration is good.

Many books, even if they’re well-bound, are better off left simple or with just a bit of decoration. But sometimes there are books that can be decorated as extravagantly as possible. For example, books used in important ceremonies, like Altar Books, can be mentioned as ones that can’t be over-decorated. These books can be adorned with gold and color until they look like they’re covered in gold material. They will stand out beautifully in a large church or cathedral, and as long as the decorations are done well, they can't really be considered over-decorated.

So, occasionally some one may have a book to which he is for some reason greatly attached, and wishing to enshrine it, give the binder a free hand to do his best with it. The binder may wish to make a delicate pattern with nicely-balanced spots of ornament, leaving the leather for the most part bare, or he may[30] wish to cover the outside with some close gold-tooled pattern, giving a richness of texture hardly to be got by other means. If he decides on the latter, many people will say that the cover is over-decorated. But as a book cover can never be seen absolutely alone, it should not be judged as an isolated thing covered with ornament without relief, but as a spot of brightness and interest among its surroundings. If a room and everything in it is covered with elaborate pattern, then anything with a plain surface would be welcome as a relief; but in a room which is reasonably free from ornament, a spot of rich decoration should be welcome.

Sometimes, someone might have a book they're really attached to, and wanting to preserve it, they might let the binder take full creative control. The binder might want to create a delicate design with well-balanced decorative elements, leaving most of the leather exposed, or they might prefer to cover the outside with a closely designed gold-tooled pattern that provides a richness of texture hard to achieve in other ways. If they choose the latter, some people might say the cover is too ornate. However, since a book cover can never be viewed in complete isolation, it shouldn’t be judged solely on its own ornamentation, but rather as a splash of brightness and interest within its context. In a room where everything has intricate patterns, a plain surface would be a welcome relief; but in a room that’s reasonably free of decor, a touch of rich decoration should be appreciated.

It is not contended that the only, or necessarily the best, method of decorating book covers is by elaborate all-over gold-tooled pattern; but it is contended that this is a legitimate method of decoration for exceptional books, and that by its use it is possible to get a beautiful effect well worth the trouble and expense involved.

It’s not claimed that the only, or even the best, way to decorate book covers is with intricate all-over gold tooling; however, it is argued that this is a valid decorative method for exceptional books, and that using it can create a beautiful effect that is well worth the effort and cost involved.

Good leather has a beautiful surface, and may sometimes be got of a fine colour. The binder may often wish to show this surface and colour, and to restrict his decoration to small portions of the cover,[31] and this quite rightly, he aiming at, and getting, a totally different effect than that got by all-over patterns. Both methods are right if well done, and both methods can equally be vulgarised if badly done.

Good leather has a beautiful surface and can sometimes come in a great color. The binder might want to showcase this surface and color while keeping the decoration limited to small areas of the cover,[31] which is totally valid since it creates a completely different effect compared to using all-over patterns. Both techniques are valid if executed well, and both can look cheap if poorly done.

A much debated question is, how far the decoration of a binding should be influenced by the contents of the book? A certain appropriateness there should be, but as a general thing, if the binder aims at making the cover beautiful, that is the best he can do. The hints given for designing are not intended to stop the development of the student’s own ideas, but only to encourage their development on right lines.

A frequently debated question is how much the decoration of a book cover should be influenced by its contents. There should be some relevance, but generally speaking, if the binder focuses on making the cover beautiful, that's the best they can do. The suggestions for designing are meant to inspire rather than limit the growth of the student's own ideas; they simply aim to encourage that growth in the right direction.

There should be a certain similarity of treatment between the general get-up of a book and its binding. It is a great pity that printers and binders have drifted so far apart; they are, or should be, working for one end, the production of a book, and some unity of aim should be evident in the work of the two.

There should be a certain similarity in the overall look of a book and its binding. It's a real shame that printers and binders have drifted so far apart; they are, or should be, working towards the same goal: the production of a book. Some sense of unity in purpose should be clear in the work of both.

The binding of manuscripts and early printed books should be strong and simple. It should be as strong and durable as the original old bindings, and, like them, last with reasonable care for four hundred years[32] or more. To this end the old bindings, with their stout sewing cord, wooden boards, and clasps, may be taken as models.

The binding of manuscripts and early printed books should be sturdy and straightforward. It needs to be as strong and durable as the original old bindings, and like them, should last for four hundred years[32] or more with reasonable care. To achieve this, the old bindings, with their thick sewing cord, wooden boards, and clasps, can serve as guidelines.

The question is constantly asked, especially by women, if a living can be made by setting up as bookbinders. Cheap binding can most economically be done in large workshops, but probably the best bindings can be done more satisfactorily by binders working alone, or in very small workshops.

The question that's often asked, especially by women, is whether it's possible to make a living as bookbinders. The most cost-effective binding is usually done in large workshops, but the best-quality bindings are likely achieved by binders working independently or in very small shops.

If any one intends to set up as a bookbinder, doing all the work without help, it is necessary to charge very high prices to get any adequate return after the working expenses have been paid. In order to get high prices, the standard of work must be very high; and in order to attain a high enough standard of work, a very thorough training is necessary. It is desirable that any one hoping to make money at the craft should have at least a year’s training in a workshop where good work is done, and after that, some time will be spent before quite satisfactory work can be turned out rapidly enough to pay, supposing that orders can be obtained or the books bound can be sold.

If someone wants to become a bookbinder and do all the work alone, it's important to charge high prices to make a reasonable profit after covering expenses. To justify high prices, the quality of work has to be excellent; achieving that level of quality requires comprehensive training. It’s recommended that anyone looking to earn money in this craft should complete at least a year of training in a workshop that produces high-quality work. After that, some additional time will be needed before they can produce satisfactory work quickly enough to make it profitable, assuming they can get orders or sell the bound books.

There are some successful binders who[33] have had less than a year’s training, but they are exceptional. Those who have not been accustomed to manual work have usually, in addition to the necessary skill, to acquire the habit of continuous work. Bookbinding seems to offer an opening for well-educated youths who are willing to serve an apprenticeship in a good shop, and who have some small amount of capital at their command.

There are some successful binders who[33] have had less than a year of training, but they are exceptional. Those who are not used to manual work usually have to develop the habit of continuous work, in addition to acquiring the necessary skills. Bookbinding appears to provide an opportunity for well-educated young people who are willing to do an apprenticeship in a good shop and have a bit of capital to invest.

In addition to the production of decorated bindings, there is much to be done by specialising in certain kinds of work requiring special knowledge. Repairing and binding early printed books and manuscripts, or the restoration of Parish Registers and Accounts, may be suggested.

In addition to creating decorated bindings, there's a lot to be accomplished by focusing on specific types of work that need specialized knowledge. Repairing and binding early printed books and manuscripts, or restoring Parish Registers and Accounts, could be beneficial.

CHAPTER II

Entering—Books in Sheets—Folding—Collating—Pulling to Pieces—Refolding—Knocking out Joints

Entering—Books in Sheets—Folding—Collating—Disassembling—Refolding—Removing Joints

ENTERING

On receiving a book for binding, its title should be entered in a book kept for that purpose, with the date of entry, and[34] customer’s name and address, and any instructions he may have given, written out in full underneath, leaving room below to enter the time taken on the various operations and cost of the materials used. It is well to number the entry, and to give a corresponding number to the book. It should be at once collated, and any special features noted, such as pages that need washing or mending. If the book should prove to be imperfect, or to have any serious defect, the owner should be communicated with, before it is pulled to pieces. This is very important, as imperfect books that have been “pulled” are not returnable to the bookseller. Should defects only be discovered after the book has been taken to pieces, the bookbinder is liable to be blamed for the loss of any missing leaves.

When a book is received for binding, its title should be logged in a designated book, along with the date of entry, and[34] the customer's name and address. Any instructions provided by the customer should be written out in full below, leaving space to record the time spent on various tasks and the cost of materials used. It's a good idea to number the entry and assign a matching number to the book. The book should be collated right away, and any special details noted, such as pages needing washing or repairs. If the book turns out to be flawed or has a serious defect, the owner should be contacted before any disassembly begins. This is crucial because damaged books that have been “taken apart” cannot be returned to the bookseller. If defects are discovered after the book has been dismantled, the bookbinder might be held responsible for any missing pages.

BOOKS IN SHEETS

The sheets of a newly printed book are arranged in piles in the printer’s warehouse, each pile being made up of repetitions of the same sheet or “signature.” Plates or maps are in piles by themselves[35] To make a complete book one sheet is gathered from each pile, beginning at the last sheet and working backwards to signature A. When a book is ordered from a publisher in sheets, it is such a “gathered” copy that the binder receives. Some books are printed “double,” that is, the type is set up twice, two copies are printed at once at different ends of a sheet of paper, and the sheets have to be divided down the middle before the copies can be separated. Sometimes the title and introduction, or perhaps only the last sheet, will be printed in this way. Publishers usually decline to supply in sheets fewer than two copies of such double-printed books.

The pages of a newly printed book are stacked in piles in the printer's warehouse, with each pile consisting of several copies of the same page or “signature.” Plates or maps are stacked separately[35]. To create a complete book, one page is taken from each pile, starting from the last page and working backward to signature A. When a book is ordered from a publisher in sheets, it is this “gathered” copy that the binder receives. Some books are printed “double,” meaning the type is set up twice, allowing two copies to be printed at the same time on different ends of a sheet of paper. The sheets need to be cut down the middle before the copies can be separated. Sometimes the title and introduction, or maybe just the last page, will be printed this way. Publishers typically refuse to provide fewer than two copies of such double-printed books.

If a book is received unfolded, it is generally advisable at once to fold up the sheets and put them in their proper order, with half-title, title, introduction, &c., and, if there are plates, to compare them with the printed list.

If a book arrives unfolded, it's usually best to fold the pages right away and organize them in the correct order, including the half-title, title, introduction, etc., and if there are illustrations, to check them against the printed list.

Should there be in a recently published book defects of any kind, such as soiled sheets, the publisher will usually replace them on application, although they sometimes take a long time to do so. Such sheets are called “imperfections,” and the printers usually keep a number of “overs[36]” in order to make good such imperfections as may occur.

Should a recently published book have any defects, like dirty pages, the publisher will typically replace them if you ask, although it can sometimes take a while. These pages are referred to as “imperfections,” and printers usually keep a few “overs[36]” on hand to address any imperfections that may happen.

FOLDING

Books received in sheets must be folded. Folding requires care, or the margins of different leaves will be unequal, and the lines of printing not at right angles to the back.

Books received in sheets need to be folded. Folding requires attention, or the margins of different pages will be uneven, and the printed lines won't be at right angles to the spine.

Books of various sizes are known as “folio,” “quarto,” “octavo,” “duodecimo,” &c. These names signify the number of folds, and consequently the number of leaves the paper has been folded into. Thus, a folio is made up of sheets of paper folded once down the centre, forming two leaves and four pages. The sheets of a quarto have a second fold, making four leaves and eight pages, and in an octavo the sheet has a third fold, forming eight leaves and sixteen pages (see fig. 2), and so on. Each sheet of paper when folded constitutes a section, except in the case of folios, where it is usual to make up the sections by inserting two or more sheets, one within the other.

Books come in various sizes called “folio,” “quarto,” “octavo,” “duodecimo,” etc. These terms indicate how many times the paper has been folded and, therefore, how many leaves it contains. A folio consists of sheets of paper folded once in the middle, resulting in two leaves and four pages. A quarto has a second fold, creating four leaves and eight pages, while an octavo has a third fold, producing eight leaves and sixteen pages (see fig. 2), and so on. Each folded sheet of paper makes up a section, except for folios, where it’s common to create sections by inserting two or more sheets inside one another.

Paper is made in several named sizes, such as “imperial,” “royal,” “demy,[37]” “crown,” “foolscap,” &c. (see p. 283), so that the terms “imperial folio” or “crown octavo” imply that a sheet of a definite size has been folded a definite number of times.

Paper comes in various specific sizes, like "imperial," "royal," "demy,[37]” "crown," "foolscap," etc. (see p. 283), meaning that terms like “imperial folio” or “crown octavo” indicate that a sheet of a specific size has been folded a specific number of times.

Fig. 2.

Fig. 2.

Fig. 2.

Besides the traditional sizes, paper is now made of almost any length and width, resulting in books of odd shape, and the names folio, quarto, &c., are rather losing their true meaning, and are often used loosely to signify pages of certain sizes, irrespective of the number that go to a sheet.[38]

Besides the traditional sizes, paper is now made in almost any length and width, leading to books of unusual shapes. The terms folio, quarto, etc., are losing their original meanings and are often used casually to refer to pages of specific sizes, regardless of how many fit on a sheet.[38]

On receipt, for instance, of an octavo book for folding, the pile of sheets is laid flat on the table, and collated by the letter or signature of each sheet. The first sheet of the book proper will probably be signature B, as signature A usually consists of the half-title, title, introduction, &c., and often has to be folded up rather differently.

Upon receiving an octavo book for folding, the stack of sheets is placed flat on the table and sorted according to the letter or signature on each sheet. The first sheet of the actual book will likely be signature B, since signature A typically includes the half-title, title, introduction, etc., and is often folded in a slightly different way.

The “outer” sides, known by the signature letters B, C, D, &c., should be downwards, and the inner sides facing upwards with the second signatures, if there are any, B2, C2, D2, &c., at the right-hand bottom corner.

The "outer" sides, marked with the letters B, C, D, etc., should be faced down, while the inner sides are positioned upwards with the second markings, if available, B2, C2, D2, etc., located in the bottom right corner.

The pages of an octave book, commencing at page 1, are shown at fig. 3. A folder is taken in the right hand, and held at the bottom of the sheet at about the centre, and the sheet taken by the left hand at the top right-hand corner and bent over until pages 3 and 6 come exactly over pages 2 and 7; and when it is seen that the headlines and figures exactly match, the[39] paper, while being held in that position, is creased down the centre with the folder, and the fold cut up a little more than half-way. Pages 4, 13, 5, 12 will now be uppermost; pages 12 and 5 are now folded over to exactly match pages 13 and 4, and[40] the fold creased and cut up a little more than half-way, as before. Pages 8 and 9 will now be uppermost, and will merely require folding together to make the pages of the section follow in their proper order. If the folding has been done carefully, and the “register” of the printing is good, the headlines should be exactly even throughout.

The pages of an octave book, starting at page 1, are shown at fig. 3. Hold a folder in your right hand at the bottom center of the sheet, while your left hand grabs the top right corner of the sheet and bends it over until pages 3 and 6 line up perfectly with pages 2 and 7. When you see that the headlines and numbers match, the[39] paper should be creased down the center with the folder while still in that position, and the fold cut slightly more than halfway. Now, pages 4, 13, 5, and 12 will be on top; fold pages 12 and 5 over to match pages 13 and 4 exactly, and[40] crease and cut the fold slightly more than halfway, just like before. Now pages 8 and 9 will be on top, and you’ll need to simply fold them together to keep the pages of the section in the correct order. If you’ve folded carefully and the printing “register” is good, the headlines should be perfectly aligned throughout.

Fig. 3.

Fig. 3.

Fig. 3.

Fig. 3.

The object of cutting past the centre at each fold is to avoid the unsightly creasing that results from folding two or more thicknesses of paper when joined at the top edge.

The purpose of cutting past the center at each fold is to prevent the unattractive creasing that occurs when folding two or more layers of paper that are connected at the top edge.

A “duodecimo” sheet has the pages arranged as at fig. 4.

A "duodecimo" sheet has the pages arranged like at fig. 4.

The “inset” pages, 10, 15, 14, 11, must be cut off, and the rest of the section folded as for an octavo sheet. The inset is folded separately and inserted into the centre of the octavo portion.

The “inset” pages, 10, 15, 14, 11, need to be cut off, and the rest of the section should be folded like an octavo sheet. The inset is folded separately and placed in the middle of the octavo part.

Other sizes are folded in much the same[41] way, and the principle of folding one sheet having been mastered, no difficulty will be found in folding any other.

Other sizes are folded in a similar[41] way, and once you’ve got the hang of folding one sheet, you won't have any trouble folding others.

Plates often require trimming, and this must be done with judgment. The plates should be trimmed to correspond as far as possible with the printing on the opposite[42] page, but if this cannot be done, it is desirable that something approaching the proportion of margin shown at fig. 2 (folio) should be aimed at. That is to say, the back margin should be the smallest, the head margin the next, the fore-edge a little wider, and the tail widest of all. When a plate consists of a small portrait or diagram in the centre of the page, it looks better if it is put a little higher and a little nearer the back than the actual centre.

Plates usually need trimming, and this should be done thoughtfully. The plates should be trimmed to align with the printing on the opposite[42] page as closely as possible, but if that's not feasible, aim for a margin ratio similar to what is shown at fig. 2 (folio). In other words, the back margin should be the smallest, the head margin the next, the fore-edge a bit wider, and the tail the widest. When a plate features a small portrait or diagram in the center of the page, it looks better if it's placed slightly higher and a bit closer to the back than the exact center.

Fig. 4.

Fig. 4.

Fig. 4.

Fig. 4.

Plates that have no numbers on them must be put in order by the list of printed plates, or “instructions to the binder.” The half-title, title, dedication, &c., will often be found to be printed on odd sheets that have to be made up into section A. This preliminary matter is usually placed in the following order: Half-title, title, dedication, preface, contents, list of illustrations or other lists. If there is an index, it should be put at the end of the book.

Plates that don’t have numbers on them must be arranged according to the list of printed plates, or “instructions to the binder.” The half-title, title, dedication, etc., are often printed on separate sheets that need to be combined into section A. This introductory material is typically organized in the following order: Half-title, title, dedication, preface, contents, list of illustrations or other lists. If there’s an index, it should be placed at the end of the book.

All plates should be “guarded,” and any “quarter sections,” that is, sections consisting of two leaves, should have their backs strengthened by a “guard,” or they may very easily be torn in the sewing. Odd, single leaves may be guarded round sections in the same way as plates.[43]

All plates should be "protected," and any "quarter sections," meaning sections made up of two leaves, should have their backs reinforced with a "guard," or they could easily get torn during sewing. Odd, single leaves can be protected with guards in the same way as plates.[43]

When a book has been folded, it should be pressed (see p. 87).

When a book has been folded, it should be pressed (see p. 87).

There will sometimes be pages marked by the printer with a star. These have some error in them, and are intended to be cut out. The printer should supply corrected pages to replace them.

There will occasionally be pages marked by the printer with a star. These contain some errors and are meant to be removed. The printer should provide corrected pages to replace them.

COLLATING

In addition to the pagination each sheet or section of a printed book is lettered or numbered. Each letter or number is called the “sheet’s signature.” Printers usually leave out J W and V in lettering sheets. If there are more sections than there are letters in the alphabet, the printer doubles the letters, signing the sections A A, B B, and so on, after the single letters are exhausted. Some printers use an Arabic numeral before the section number to denote the second alphabet, as 2A, 2B, &c., and others change the character of the letters, perhaps using capitals for the first alphabet and italics for the second. If the sheets are numbered, the numbers will of course follow consecutively. In books of more than one volume, the number of the volume is sometimes added in[44] Roman numerals before the signature, as II A, II B.

In addition to the page numbers, each sheet or section of a printed book is labeled with a letter or number. Each letter or number is referred to as the “sheet’s signature.” Printers typically skip J, W, and V when labeling sheets. If there are more sections than letters in the alphabet, the printer doubles the letters, marking the sections as AA, BB, and so on after using the single letters. Some printers use an Arabic numeral before the section letter to indicate the second alphabet, like 2A, 2B, etc., while others may change the style of the letters, using capitals for the first alphabet and italics for the second. If the sheets are numbered, the numbers will obviously follow sequentially. In multi-volume books, the volume number is sometimes added in[44] Roman numerals before the signature, like II A, II B.

The main pagination of the book usually commences with Chapter I., and all before that is independently paged in Roman numerals. It is unusual to have actual numbers on the title or half-title, but if the pages are counted back from where the first numeral occurs, they should come right.

The main pagination of the book usually starts with Chapter I, and everything before that is numbered with Roman numerals. It's uncommon to see actual numbers on the title or half-title, but if you count the pages back from where the first numeral appears, they should add up correctly.

There will sometimes be one or more blank leaves completing sections at the beginning or end. Such blank leaves must be retained, as without them the volume would be “imperfect.”

There may occasionally be one or more blank pages marking the start or end of sections. These blank pages must be kept, as without them the book would be considered "incomplete."

To collate a modern book the paging must be examined to see that the leaves are in order, and that nothing is defective or missing.

To put together a modern book, you need to check the pages to make sure the leaves are in order and that nothing is damaged or missing.

The method of doing this is to insert the first finger of the right hand at the bottom of about the fiftieth page, crook the finger, and turn up the corners of the pages with it. When this is done the thumb is placed on page 1, and the hand twisted, so as to fan out the top of the pages. They can then be readily turned over by the thumb and first finger of the left hand (see fig. 5). This is repeated throughout the book,[45] taking about fifty pages at a time. It will of course only be necessary to check the odd numbers, as if they are right, the even ones on the other side of the leaf must be so. If the pages are numbered at the foot, the leaves must be fanned out from the head.

The way to do this is to insert the index finger of your right hand at the bottom of about the fiftieth page, curl your finger, and flip up the corners of the pages with it. Once that’s done, place your thumb on page 1 and twist your hand to spread out the top of the pages. You can then easily turn the pages using the thumb and index finger of your left hand (see fig. 5). Repeat this process throughout the book,[45] taking about fifty pages at a time. Of course, you only need to check the odd numbers; if those are correct, the even ones on the other side of the page must be too. If the pages are numbered at the bottom, the pages should be spread out from the top.

Fig. 5.

Fig. 5.

Fig. 5.

Plates or maps that are not paged can only be checked from the printed list. When checked it will save time if the[46] number of the page which each faces is marked on the back in small pencil figures.

Plates or maps that aren't numbered can only be verified using the printed list. To save time, it helps to write the page number that each one faces on the back in small pencil figures.

In the case of early printed books or manuscripts, which are often not paged, special knowledge is needed for their collation. It may roughly be said, that if the sections are all complete, that is, if there are the same number of leaves at each side of the sewing in all the sections, the book may be taken to be perfect, unless of course whole sections are missing. All unpaged books should be paged through in pencil before they are taken apart; this is best done with a very fine pencil, at the bottom left-hand corner; it will only be necessary to number the front of each leaf.

In the case of early printed books or manuscripts, which often aren't paginated, specialized knowledge is required for their collation. Generally speaking, if all the sections are intact—meaning there’s the same number of leaves on each side of the binding in all sections—the book can be considered complete, unless entire sections are missing. All unpaged books should be flipped through with a pencil before they are disassembled; this is best done using a very fine pencil in the bottom left corner, and only the front of each leaf needs to be numbered.

PULLING TO PIECES

After the volume has been collated it must be “pulled,” that is to say, the sections must be separated, and all plates or maps detached.

After the volume has been organized, it needs to be “pulled,” meaning the sections must be separated, and all plates or maps taken out.

If in a bound book there are slips laced in the front cover, they must be cut and the back torn off. It will sometimes happen that in tearing off the leather nearly all the glue will come too, leaving[47] the backs of the pages detached except for the sewing. More usually the back will be left covered with a mass of glue and linen, or paper, which it is very difficult to remove without injury to the backs of the sections. By drawing a sharp knife along the bands, the sewing may be cut and the bands removed, leaving the sections only connected by the glue. Then the sections of the book can usually be separated with a fine folder, after the thread from the centre of each has been removed; the point of division being ascertained by finding the first signature of each section. In cases where the glue and leather form too hard a back to yield to this method, it is advisable to soak the glue with paste, and when soft to scrape it off with a folder. As this method is apt to injure the backs of the sections, it should not be resorted to unless necessary; and when it is, care must be taken not to let the damp penetrate into the book, or it will cause very ugly stains. The book must be pulled while damp, or else the glue will dry up harder than before. The separated sections must be piled up carefully to prevent pages being soiled by the damp glue.[48]

If there are slips attached to the front cover of a bound book, they need to be cut and the back torn off. Sometimes, when removing the leather, most of the glue will come off too, leaving[47] the backs of the pages detached except for the stitching. Usually, the back will be left covered in a mix of glue and linen or paper, which is really tricky to remove without damaging the backs of the sections. By using a sharp knife along the bands, the stitching can be cut and the bands taken off, leaving the sections only held together by the glue. Then, the sections of the book can usually be separated with a thin folder, after removing the thread from the center of each one; the division point is identified by finding the first signature of each section. In cases where the glue and leather create a stiff back that won’t yield to this method, it’s best to soak the glue with paste, and when it softens, scrape it off with a folder. Since this method can harm the backs of the sections, it should only be used when absolutely necessary; and when it is, care must be taken to avoid letting the moisture seep into the book, as it will create unsightly stains. The book should be pulled while damp, or the glue will dry even harder. The separated sections must be stacked carefully to prevent pages from getting dirty due to the damp glue.[48]

All plates or single leaves “pasted on” must be removed. These can usually be detached by carefully tearing apart, but if too securely pasted they must be soaked off in water, unless of course the plates have been painted with water-colour. If the plates must be soaked off, the leaf and attached plate should be put into a pan of slightly warm water and left to soak until they float apart, then with a soft brush any remaining glue or paste can be easily removed while in the water. Care must be taken not to soak modern books printed on what is called “Art Paper,” as this paper will hardly stand ordinary handling, and is absolutely ruined if wetted. The growing use of this paper in important books is one of the greatest troubles the bookbinder has to face. The highly loaded and glazed surface of some of the heavy plate papers easily flakes off, so that any guard pasted on these plates is apt to come away, taking with it the surface of the paper. Moreover, should the plates chance to be fingered or in any way soiled, nothing can remove the marks; and should a corner get turned down, the paper breaks and the corner will fall off. It is the opinion of experts that this[49] heavily loaded Art Paper will not last a reasonable time, and, apart from other considerations, this should be ample reason for not using it in books that are expected to have a permanent value. Printers like this paper, because it enables them to obtain brilliant impressions from blocks produced by cheap processes.

All plates or single leaves that are “pasted on” need to be removed. You can usually detach them by carefully tearing them apart, but if they’re stuck too tightly, you’ll need to soak them off in water, unless the plates were painted with watercolors. If soaking is necessary, place the leaf and the attached plate into a pan of slightly warm water and let them soak until they float apart. Then, you can easily brush off any leftover glue or paste while they’re underwater. Be careful not to soak modern books printed on what’s called “Art Paper,” since this paper can’t handle much wear and tear and will be completely ruined if it gets wet. The increasing use of this paper in important books is one of the biggest challenges bookbinders face. The highly glossy surface of some heavy plate papers can easily flake off, so any guard pasted onto these plates is likely to come off, taking the paper's surface with it. Additionally, if the plates get touched or dirty, there’s no way to remove the marks; if a corner gets turned down, the paper will break, and that corner will fall off. Experts believe that this heavily loaded Art Paper won’t last long, and besides other reasons, that should be enough to avoid using it in books that are meant to last. Printers like this paper because it allows them to achieve bright prints from blocks made with inexpensive methods.

In “cased” books, sewn by machinery, the head and tail of the sheets will often be found to be split up as far as the “kettle” stitches. If such a book is to be expensively bound, it will require mending throughout in these places, or the glue may soak into the torn ends, and make the book open stiffly.

In "cased" books, sewn by machines, the top and bottom of the pages are often found to be split up to the "kettle" stitches. If such a book is to be bound professionally, it will need to be repaired in these areas, or the glue might seep into the torn edges, making the book open awkwardly.

Some books are put together with staples of tinned iron wire, which rapidly rust and disfigure the book by circular brown marks. Such marks will usually have to be cut out and the places carefully mended. This process is lengthy, and consequently so costly, that it is generally cheaper, when possible, to obtain an unbound copy of the book from the publishers, than to waste time repairing the damage done by the cloth binder.

Some books are held together with staples made of tin wire, which quickly rust and leave circular brown stains on the pages. These stains usually need to be cut out and the areas carefully fixed. This process takes a lot of time, and because of that, it’s generally cheaper, when possible, to get an unbound copy of the book from the publishers rather than wasting time repairing the damage caused by the cloth binder.

Generally speaking, the sections of a book cased in cloth by modern methods are so injured as to make it unfit for more[50] permanent binding unless an unreasonable amount of time is spent on it. It is a great pity that publishers do not, in the case of books expected to have a permanent literary value, issue a certain number of copies printed on good paper, and unbound, for the use of those who require permanent bindings; and in such copies it would be a great help if sufficient margin were left at the back of the plates for the binder to turn it up to form a guard. If the plates were very numerous, guards made of the substance of the plates themselves would make the book too thick; but in the case of books with not more than a dozen plates, printed on comparatively thin paper, it would be a great advantage.

Generally speaking, the sections of a book covered in cloth using modern methods are often damaged to the point that they can't be permanently bound without spending an unreasonable amount of time on them. It's unfortunate that publishers don't issue a certain number of copies printed on good paper and unbound for books expected to have lasting literary value. This would benefit those who need permanent bindings. It would also be really helpful if enough margin were left at the back of the plates for the binder to create a guard. If there are too many plates, guards made from the plates themselves would make the book too thick; however, for books with no more than a dozen plates printed on relatively thin paper, it would be a significant advantage.

Some books in which there are a large number of plates are cut into single leaves, which are held together at the back by a coating of an indiarubber solution. For a short time such a volume is pleasant enough to handle, and opens freely, but before long the indiarubber perishes, and the leaves and plates fall apart. When a book of this kind comes to have a permanent binding, all the leaves and plates have to be pared at the back and made up into sections with guards—a troublesome and expensive[51] business. The custom with binders is to overcast the backs of the leaves in sections, and to sew through the overcasting thread, but this, though an easy and quick process, makes a hopelessly stiff back, and no book so treated can open freely.

Some books with a lot of plates are made from single leaves, which are held together at the back using an indiarubber solution. For a while, this type of book is nice to handle and opens easily, but eventually, the indiarubber deteriorates, and the leaves and plates separate. When this kind of book needs to be permanently bound, all the leaves and plates must be trimmed at the back and assembled into sections with guards—this is a difficult and costly[51] process. Binders typically overcast the backs of the leaves in sections and sew through the overcasting thread, but while this method is straightforward and quick, it results in a very stiff spine, making it impossible for the book to open easily.

REFOLDING
Fig. 6.—Dividers

Fig. 6.—Dividers

Dividers

When the sheets of books that have to be rebound have been carelessly folded, a certain amount of readjustment is often advisable, especially in cases where the book has not been previously cut. The title-page and the half-title, when found to be out of square, should nearly always be put straight. The folding of the whole book may be corrected by taking each pair of leaves and holding them up to the light and adjusting the fold so that the print on one leaf comes exactly over the print on the[52] other, and creasing the fold to make them stay in that position. With a pair of dividers (fig. 6) set to the height of the shortest top margin, points the same distance above the headline of the other leaves can be made. Then against a carpenter’s square, adjusted to the back of the fold, the head of one pair of leaves at a time can be cut square (see fig. 7). If the book has been previously cut this process is apt to throw the leaves so far out of their original position as to make them unduly uneven.

When the pages of books that need to be rebound are folded carelessly, it’s often a good idea to readjust them, especially if the book hasn’t been cut before. The title page and the half-title should almost always be straightened if they’re misaligned. You can correct the folding of the entire book by taking each pair of pages, holding them up to the light, and adjusting the fold so that the print on one page lines up perfectly with the print on the other, then creasing the fold to keep them aligned. Using a pair of dividers set to the height of the shortest top margin, you can mark points the same distance above the headline on the other pages. Then, using a carpenter’s square against the back of the fold, you can cut the head of one pair of pages at a time to make them square. If the book has already been cut, this process might shift the pages out of their original position too much, resulting in unevenness.

Accurate folding is impossible if the “register” of the printing is bad, that is to say, if the print on the back of a leaf does not lie exactly over that on the front.

Accurate folding is impossible if the “register” of the printing is off, meaning that the print on the back of a page doesn't line up perfectly with what's on the front.

Crooked plates should usually be made straight by judicious trimming of the margins. It is better to leave a plate short at[53] tail or fore-edge than to leave it out of square.

Crooked plates should generally be straightened by carefully trimming the edges. It's better to have a plate slightly short at the[53] tail or fore-edge than to have it out of square.

Fig. 7.

Fig. 7.

Fig. 7.

KNOCKING OUT JOINTS

The old “joints” must be knocked out of the sections of books that have been previously backed. To do this, one or two sections at a time are held firmly in the left hand, and well hammered on the knocking-down iron fixed into the lying press. It is important that the hammer face should fall exactly squarely upon the paper, or it may cut pieces out. The knocking-down iron should be covered with a piece of paper, and the hammer face must be perfectly clean, or the sheets may be soiled.

The old "joints" need to be removed from the sections of books that have already been backed. To do this, hold one or two sections firmly in your left hand and hit them on the knocking-down iron attached to the lying press. It's crucial that the hammer strikes the paper straight on; otherwise, it could tear off pieces. The knocking-down iron should be covered with a piece of paper, and the hammer face must be completely clean to prevent staining the sheets.

CHAPTER III

Guarding—Throwing Out—Paring Paper—Soaking off India Proofs—Mounting very Thin Paper—Splitting Paper—Inlaying—Flattening Vellum

Guarding—Throwing Out—Cutting Paper—Soaking off India Proofs—Mounting very Thin Paper—Splitting Paper—Inlaying—Flattening Vellum

GUARDING

Guards are slips of thin paper or linen used for strengthening the fold of leaves that are damaged, or for attaching plates or single leaves.

Security personnel are strips of thin paper or fabric used to reinforce the fold of damaged leaves or to attach plates or individual leaves.

Fig. 8.

Fig. 8.

Fig. 8.

Guards should be of good thin paper. That known as Whatman’s Banknote paper[54] answers very well. An easy way to cut guards is shown in fig. 8. Two or three pieces of paper of the height of the required guards are folded and pinned to the board by the right-hand corners. A series of points are marked at the head and tail with dividers set to the width desired for the guards, and with a knife guided by a straight-edge, cuts joining the points are made right through the paper, but not extending quite to either end. On a transverse cut being made near the bottom, the guards are left attached by one end only (see fig. 9), and can be torn off as wanted. This method prevents the paper from slipping while it is being cut.

Guards should be made of good, lightweight paper. Whatman’s Banknote paper[54] works very well. A simple way to cut guards is shown in fig. 8. Two or three pieces of paper, measuring the height of the required guards, are folded and pinned to the board at the top right corners. A series of points are marked at the top and bottom using dividers set to the desired width for the guards. Then, with a knife guided by a straight edge, cuts are made connecting the points right through the paper, but not going all the way to either end. After making a horizontal cut near the bottom, the guards are only attached at one end (see fig. 9), allowing them to be torn off when needed. This method keeps the paper from slipping while cutting.

Fig. 9.

Fig. 9.

Fig. 9.

A mount cutter’s knife (fig. 10) will be found to be a convenient form of knife to use for cutting guards.[55]

A mount cutter’s knife (fig. 10) is a handy tool for cutting guards.[55]

In using the knife and straight-edge a good deal of pressure should be put on the straight-edge, and comparatively little on the knife.

When using the knife and straightedge, you should apply a lot of pressure on the straightedge and relatively little on the knife.

Fig. 10.—Mount Cutter’s Knife

Fig. 10.—Mount Cutter’s Knife

Fig. 10.—Cutter's Knife

To mend the torn back of a pair of leaves, a guard should be selected a little longer than the height of the pages and well pasted with white paste (see page 288). If the pair of leaves are not quite separated, the pasted guard held by its extremities may be simply laid along the weak place and rubbed down through blotting-paper. If the leaves are quite apart, it is better to lay the pasted guard on a piece of glass and put the edges of first one and then the other leaf on to it and rub down.

To fix the torn back of a pair of pages, choose a guard that’s slightly longer than the height of the pages and securely paste it with white glue (see page 288). If the leaves are still partially attached, you can lay the pasted guard along the weak spot and press it down using blotting paper. If the leaves are completely separated, it’s better to place the pasted guard on a piece of glass and position the edges of each leaf onto it one at a time, then rub down to secure them.

On an outside pair of leaves the guard should be inside, so that the glue may catch any ragged edges; while on the inside pair the guard should be outside, or it will be found to be troublesome in sewing. In handling the pasted guards care is needed not to stretch them, or they may cause the sheet to crinkle as they dry.[56]

On the outer pair of leaves, the guard should be on the inside so the glue can catch any rough edges. For the inner pair, the guard should be on the outside; otherwise, it could get in the way during sewing. When working with the glued guards, be careful not to stretch them, or they might cause the sheet to wrinkle as they dry.[56]

Fig. 11.

Fig. 11.

Fig. 11.

Plates must be guarded round the sections next them. When there are a great many plates the back margin of each, to which a guard will be attached, must be pared (see fig. 11, A), or the additional thickness caused by the guards will make the back swell unduly. In guarding plates a number can be pasted at once if they are laid one on another, with about an eighth of an inch of the back of each exposed, the top of the pile being protected by a folded piece of waste paper (see fig. 12). To paste, the brush is brought from the top to the bottom of the pile only, and not the other way, or paste will get between the plates and soil them. Guards should usually be attached to the backs of plates, and should be wide enough to turn up round the adjoining section, so that they[57] may be sewn through. Should a plate come in the middle of a section, the guard is best turned back and slightly pasted to the inside of the sheet and then sewn through in the ordinary way.

Plates need to be protected around the sections next to them. When there are a lot of plates, the back edge of each, where a guard will be attached, should be trimmed (see fig. 11, A), or the extra thickness from the guards will cause the back to bulge excessively. When guarding plates, multiple can be pasted at once if they're stacked on top of each other, leaving about an eighth of an inch of the back of each plate exposed, with the top of the stack covered by a folded piece of scrap paper (see fig. 12). To apply the paste, the brush should be moved from the top to the bottom of the stack only, and not the other way around, or paste will get between the plates and dirty them. Guards should typically be attached to the backs of plates, and they should be wide enough to wrap around the adjacent section, so they can be sewn through. If a plate is in the middle of a section, it's best to fold the guard back and slightly paste it to the inside of the sheet, then sew it through in the usual manner.

Fig. 12.

Fig. 12.

Fig. 12.

If plates are very thick, they must be hinged, as shown at fig. 11, B. This is done by cutting a strip of about a quarter of an inch off the back of the plate, and guarding with a wide guard of linen, leaving a small space between the plate and the piece cut off to form a hinge. It will save some swelling if the plate is pared and a piece of thinner paper substituted for the piece cut off (see fig. 11, C). If the plates are of cardboard, they should be guarded on both sides with linen, and may even need a second joint.

If the plates are very thick, they need to be hinged, like shown at fig. 11, B. This involves cutting a strip about a quarter of an inch off the back of the plate and covering it with a wide strip of linen, leaving a small gap between the plate and the cut piece to create a hinge. To minimize swelling, it's better to trim the plate and replace the cut-off piece with a piece of thinner paper (see fig. 11, C). If the plates are made of cardboard, they should be reinforced on both sides with linen and might even require a second joint.

A book that consists entirely of plates[58] or single leaves must be made up into sections with guards, and sewn as usual. In books in which there are a great many plates, it is often found that two plates either come together in the centre of a section, or come at opposite sides of the same pair of leaves. Such plates should be guarded together and treated as folded sheets (see fig. 13).

A book that is made up entirely of plates[58] or single leaves must be organized into sections with guards and sewn as usual. In books with a lot of plates, it’s often the case that two plates end up either in the center of a section or on opposite sides of the same pair of leaves. These plates should be guarded together and handled as folded sheets (see fig. 13).

Fig. 13.

Fig. 13.

Fig. 13.

In order to be sure that the pages of a book to be guarded throughout will come in their proper order, it is well to make a plan of the sections as follows, and to check each pair of leaves by it, as they are guarded:—

To ensure that the pages of a book are protected in the correct order, it's a good idea to create a plan for the sections like this and to check each pair of pages against it as they're being safeguarded:—

Thus, if the book is to be made up into sections of eight leaves, the pairs of leaves to be guarded together can be seen at once if the number of the pages are written out—

Thus, if the book is divided into sections of eight pages, the pairs of pages that need to be kept together can be easily identified by writing out the page numbers—

  • 1, 3, 5, 7,—9, 11, 13, 15.

First the inside pair, 7 and 9, are guarded together with the guard outside, then the next pair, 5 and 11, then 3 and 13, and[59] then the outside pair, 1 and 15, which should have the guard outside. A plan for the whole book would be more conveniently written thus—

First, the inside pair, 7 and 9, are guarded along with the guard outside, then the next pair, 5 and 11, then 3 and 13, and[59] then the outside pair, 1 and 15, which should have the guard outside. A plan for the whole book would be more easily written like this—

  • 1-1517-3133-47
  • 3-1319-2935-45
  • 5-1121-2737-43
  • 7-923-2539-41, etc.

To arrange a book of single leaves for guarding, it is convenient to take as many leaves as you intend to go to a section, and opening them in the centre, take a pair at a time as they come.

To gather a book of loose pages for protection, it's helpful to take as many pages as you plan to use for a section, and by opening them in the middle, take a pair at a time as they appear.

The number of leaves it is advisable to put into a section will depend on the thickness of the paper and the size and thickness of the book. If the paper is thick, and the backs of the leaves have been pared, four leaves to a section will be found to answer. But if the paper is thin, and does not allow of much paring, it is better to have a larger section, in order to have as little thread in the back as possible.

The number of leaves you should include in a section depends on the thickness of the paper and the size and thickness of the book. If the paper is thick and the backs of the leaves have been trimmed, four leaves per section will work well. However, if the paper is thin and can't be trimmed much, it's better to have a larger section to keep the thread in the back to a minimum.

The sheets of any guarded book should be pressed before sewing, in order to reduce the swelling of the back caused by the guards.[60]

The pages of any protected book should be flattened before binding to minimize the bulging of the spine caused by the protective covers.[60]

THROWING OUT
Fig. 14.

Fig. 14.

Fig. 14.

Maps or diagrams that are frequently referred to in the text of a book, should be “thrown out” on a guard as wide as the sheet of the book. Such maps, &c., should be placed at the end, so that they may lie open for reference while the book is being read (see fig. 14). Large folded maps or diagrams should be mounted on linen. To do this take a piece of jaconet and pin it out flat on the board,[61] then evenly paste the back of the map with thin paste in which there are no lumps, and lay it on the linen, rub down through blotting-paper, and leave to dry. Unless the pasting is done evenly the marks of the paste-brush will show through the linen. If a folded map is printed on very thick paper each fold must be cut up, and the separate pieces mounted on the linen, with a slight space between them to form a flexible joint.

Maps or diagrams that are often referenced in a book's text should be laid out on a guard as wide as the book's page. Such maps, etc., should be placed at the end so they can remain open for reference while the book is being read (see fig. 14). Large folded maps or diagrams should be mounted on linen. To do this, take a piece of jaconet and pin it flat on the board,[61] then evenly apply thin paste without lumps to the back of the map and lay it on the linen, rubbing down through blotting paper, and leave it to dry. If the pasting isn’t done evenly, the brush marks will show through the linen. If a folded map is printed on very thick paper, each fold must be cut, and the individual pieces should be mounted on the linen with a slight gap between them to create a flexible joint.

Fig. 15.

Fig. 15.

Fig. 15.

A folded map must have in the back of the book sufficient guards to equal it in thickness at its thickest part when folded, or the book will not shut properly (see fig. 15).

A folded map must have enough guards at the back of the book to match its thickness at the thickest point when it's folded, or the book won't close properly (see fig. 15).

PARING PAPER

For paring the edge of paper for mending or guarding, take a very sharp knife,[62] and holding the blade at right angles to the covering-board, draw the edge once or twice along it from left to right. This should turn up enough of the edge to form a “burr,” which causes the knife to cut while being held almost flat on the paper. The plate or paper should be laid face downwards on the glass with the edge to be pared away from the workman, the knife held in the right hand, with the burr downwards. The angle at which to hold the knife will depend on its shape and on the thickness and character of the paper to be pared, and can only be learned by practice. If the knife is in order, and is held at the proper angle, the shaving removed from a straight edge of paper should come off in a long spiral. If the knife is not in proper order, the paper may be badly jagged or creased.

To trim the edge of paper for repair or protection, take a very sharp knife,[62] and hold the blade at a 90-degree angle to the covering board; then draw the edge once or twice along it from left to right. This should lift enough of the edge to create a “burr,” which allows the knife to cut while being almost flat against the paper. The plate or paper should be placed face down on the glass, with the edge you want to trim away from you, and the knife held in your right hand with the burr facing down. The angle to hold the knife will depend on its shape and the thickness and type of paper being trimmed, and it can only be mastered through practice. If the knife is sharp and held at the right angle, the shavings taken from a straight edge of paper should come off in a long spiral. If the knife isn’t sharp, the paper may end up with a rough or creased edge.

SOAKING OFF INDIA PROOFS

Place a piece of well-sized paper in a pan of warm water, then lay the mounted India proof, face downwards, upon it and leave it to soak until the proof floats off. Then carefully take out the old mount, and the India proof can be readily removed[63] from the water on the under paper, and dried between sheets of blotting-paper.

Place a piece of appropriately sized paper in a pan of warm water, then lay the mounted India proof, face down, on top of it and let it soak until the proof floats off. Then, gently remove the old mount, and you can easily take the India proof out of the water on the underlying paper and dry it between sheets of blotting paper.[63]

MOUNTING VERY THIN PAPER

Very thin paper, such as that of some “India” proofs, may be safely mounted as follows:—The mount, ready for use, is laid on a pad of blotting-paper. The thin paper to be mounted is laid face downwards on a piece of glass and very carefully pasted with thin, white paste. Any paste on the glass beyond the edges of the paper is carefully wiped off with a clean cloth. The glass may then be turned over, and the pasted plate laid on the mount, its exact position being seen through the glass.

Very thin paper, like some “India” proofs, can be safely mounted as follows: The mount, ready to use, is placed on a pad of blotting paper. The thin paper to be mounted is positioned face down on a piece of glass and very carefully glued with thin, white paste. Any paste on the glass beyond the edges of the paper is gently wiped away with a clean cloth. The glass can then be flipped over, and the pasted plate placed on the mount, with its exact position visible through the glass.

SPLITTING PAPER

It is sometimes desirable to split pieces of paper when the matter on one side only is needed, or when the matter printed on each side is to be used in different places. The paper to be split should be well pasted on both sides with a thickish paste, and fine linen or jaconet placed on each side. It is then nipped in the press to[64] make the linen stick all over, and left to dry.

It can be useful to separate sheets of paper when you only need the information on one side or when the content printed on each side is meant for different uses. The paper that needs to be separated should be thoroughly glued on both sides with a thick paste, and fine linen or jaconet should be placed on each side. It's then pressed to[64] make sure the linen adheres completely, and left to dry.

If the two pieces of jaconet are carefully pulled apart when dry, half the paper should be attached to each, unless at any point the paste has failed to stick, when the paper will tear. The jaconet and paper attached must be put into warm water until the split paper floats off.

If you carefully pull apart the two pieces of jaconet when they’re dry, half the paper should stay on each piece, unless the paste didn’t hold at some point, in which case the paper will tear. The jaconet and attached paper should be put into warm water until the separated paper floats off.

INLAYING LEAVES OR PLATES
Fig. 16.

Fig. 16.

Fig. 16.

When a small plate or leaf has to be inserted into a larger book, it is best to “inlay it”; that is to say, the plate or leaf is let into a sheet of paper the size of the page of the book. To do this, a piece of paper as thick as the plate to be inlaid, or a little thicker, is selected, and on this is laid the plate, which should have been previously squared, and the positions of the corners marked with a folder. A point is made about an eighth of an inch inside each corner mark, and the paper within these points is cut out (see fig. 16). This leaves a frame of paper, the[65] inner edges of which will slightly overlap the edges of the plate. The under edge of the plate, and the upper edge of the mount, should then be pared and pasted, and the plate laid in its place (with the corners corresponding to the folder marks). If the edges have been properly pared, the thickness where they overlap should not exceed the thickness of the frame paper. If an irregular fragment is to be inlaid, it is done in the same way, except that the entire outline is traced on the new paper with a folder, and the paper cut away, allowing one eighth of an inch inside the indented line.

When you need to insert a small plate or leaf into a larger book, it's best to "inlay it." This means the plate or leaf is set into a sheet of paper that matches the size of the book page. To do this, choose a piece of paper that's as thick as the plate to be inlaid, or slightly thicker. Place the plate, which should be squared off beforehand, onto this paper, and mark the corners with a folder. Make a small mark about an eighth of an inch inside each corner mark, and cut out the paper within these points (see fig. 16). This will leave a paper frame, the inner edges of which will slightly overlap the edges of the plate. Then, trim and glue the bottom edge of the plate and the top edge of the mount, and place the plate in its spot (making sure the corners align with the folder marks). If the edges have been trimmed correctly, the thickness where they overlap shouldn’t be more than the thickness of the frame paper. For inlaying an irregular fragment, follow the same process, but trace the entire outline on the new paper with the folder and cut away the paper, leaving an eighth of an inch inside the traced line.

FLATTENING VELLUM

The leaves of a vellum book that have become cockled from damp or other causes may be flattened by damping them, pulling them out straight, and allowing them to dry under pressure. To do this take the book to pieces, clean out any dirt there may be in the folds of the leaves, and spread out each pair of leaves as flatly as possible.

The pages of a vellum book that have become wrinkled from moisture or other reasons can be flattened by dampening them, straightening them out, and letting them dry under pressure. To do this, take the book apart, remove any dirt from the folds of the pages, and lay out each pair of pages as flat as possible.

Damp some white blotting-paper by interleaving it with common white paper[66] that has been wetted with a sponge. One sheet of wet paper to two of blotting-paper will be enough. The pile of blotting-paper and wet paper is put in the press and left for an hour or two under pressure, then taken out and the common paper removed.

Dampen some white blotting paper by layering it with regular white paper[66] that has been moistened with a sponge. Use one sheet of wet paper for every two sheets of blotting paper. The stack of blotting paper and wet paper is placed in the press and left under pressure for an hour or two, then removed and the regular paper taken away.

The blotting-paper should now be slightly and evenly damp. To flatten the vellum the open pairs of leaves are interleaved with the slightly damp blotting-paper, and are left for an hour under the weight of a pressing-board. After this time the vellum will have become quite soft, and can with care be flattened out and lightly pressed between the blotting-paper, and left for a night. The next day the vellum leaves should be looked at to see that they lie quite flat, and the blotting-paper changed for some that is dry. The vellum must remain under pressure until it is quite dry, or it will cockle up worse than ever when exposed to the air. The blotting-paper should be changed every day or two. The length of time that vellum leaves take to dry will vary with the state of the atmosphere, and the thickness of the vellum, from one to six weeks.[67]

The blotting paper should now be slightly and evenly damp. To flatten the vellum, interleave the open pairs of leaves with the slightly damp blotting paper and leave them for an hour under the weight of a pressing board. After this time, the vellum will be quite soft and can be carefully flattened out and lightly pressed between the blotting paper, then left overnight. The next day, check the vellum leaves to make sure they lie completely flat, and replace the blotting paper with some dry paper. The vellum must stay under pressure until it's fully dry, or it will crinkle even more when exposed to the air. The blotting paper should be changed every day or two. The drying time for vellum leaves will vary based on the humidity and the thickness of the vellum, ranging from one to six weeks.[67]

Almost any manuscript or printed book on vellum can be successfully flattened in this way; miniatures should have pieces of waxed paper laid over them to prevent the chance of any of the fibres of the blotting-paper sticking. The pressure must not be great; only enough is needed to keep the vellum flat as it dries.

Almost any manuscript or printed book on vellum can be successfully flattened like this; miniatures should have waxed paper placed over them to avoid any of the fibers from the blotting paper sticking. The pressure shouldn’t be too heavy; just enough to keep the vellum flat while it dries.

This process of flattening, although so simple, requires the utmost care. If the blotting-paper is used too damp, a manuscript may be ruined; and if not damp enough, the pressing will have no effect.

This process of flattening, while very straightforward, needs a lot of attention. If the blotting paper is too wet, it can ruin a manuscript; and if it’s not wet enough, the pressing won’t work.

CHAPTER IV

Sizing—Washing—Mending

Fit—Laundry—Repair

SIZING

The paper in old books is sometimes soft and woolly. This is generally because the size has perished, and such paper can often be made perfectly sound by resizing.

The paper in old books can sometimes feel soft and fluffy. This usually happens because the sizing has deteriorated, and this type of paper can often be restored to good condition by resizing.

Fig. 17.

Fig. 17.

Fig. 17.

For size, an ounce of isinglass or good gelatine is dissolved in a quart of water. This should make a clear solution when[68] gently warmed, and should be used at about a temperature of 120° F. Care must be taken not to heat too quickly, or the solution may burn and turn brown. If the size is not quite clear, it should be strained through fine muslin or linen before being used. When it is ready it should be poured into an open pan (fig. 17), so arranged that it can be kept warm by a gas flame or spirit lamp underneath. When this is ready the sheets to be sized can be put in one after another and taken out at once. The hot size will be found to take out a great many stains, and especially those deep brown stains that come from water. If there are only a few sheets, they can be placed between blotting-paper as they are removed from the size; but if there is a whole book, it is best to lay them in a pile one on the other, and[69] when all have been sized to squeeze them in the “lying press” between pressing-boards, a pan being put underneath to catch the liquid squeezed out. When the sheets have been squeezed they can be readily handled, and should be spread out to dry on a table upon clean paper. When they are getting dry and firm they can be hung on strings stretched across the room, slightly overlapping one another. The strings must first be covered with slips of clean paper, and the sized sheets should have more paper over them to keep them clean.

To make the size, dissolve an ounce of isinglass or good gelatin in a quart of water. This should create a clear solution when gently warmed and should be used at around 120° F. Be careful not to heat it too quickly, as the solution could burn and turn brown. If the size isn’t completely clear, strain it through fine muslin or linen before use. Once it’s ready, pour it into an open pan (fig. 17) positioned so it can be kept warm by a gas flame or spirit lamp underneath. Once this is set up, you can dip in the sheets one by one and take them out immediately. The hot size is effective at removing many stains, especially those deep brown ones caused by water. If you only have a few sheets, place them between blotting paper as you remove them from the size; however, if you have an entire book, it’s better to stack them one on top of the other, and when all sheets are sized, squeeze them in the “lying press” between pressing boards, placing a pan underneath to catch the liquid that drains out. Once squeezed, the sheets will be easy to handle and should be spread out to dry on a clean paper-covered table. As they start to dry and firm up, they can be hung on strings stretched across the room, slightly overlapping. First, cover the strings with sheets of clean paper, and then place more paper over the sized sheets to keep them clean.

Before sizing it will be necessary to go through a book and take out any pencil or dust marks that can be removed with indiarubber or bread crumbs, or the size will fix them, and it will be found exceedingly difficult to remove them afterwards.

Before sizing, it's important to go through the book and remove any pencil or dust marks that can be wiped off with an eraser or bread crumbs, or else the sizing will set them in place, making it really tough to get rid of them later.

When the sheets are dry they should be carefully mended in any places that may be torn, and folded up into sections and pressed. A long, comparatively light pressure will be found to flatten them better and with less injury to the surface of the paper than a short, very heavy pressure, such as that of the rolling-machine.

When the sheets are dry, they should be carefully repaired in any areas that might be torn and then folded into sections and pressed. A long, lighter pressure will flatten them better and with less damage to the surface of the paper than a short, very heavy pressure, like that from a rolling machine.

In some cases it will be found that[70] sheets of old books are so far damaged as to be hardly strong enough to handle. Such sheets must be sized in rather a stronger size in the following way:—Take a sheet of heavily-sized paper, such as notepaper, and carefully lay your damaged sheet on that. Then put another sheet of strong paper on the top, and put all three sheets into the size. It will be found that the top sheet can then be easily lifted off, and the size be made to flow over the face of the damaged sheet. Then, if the top sheet be put on again, the three sheets, if handled as one, can be turned over and the operation repeated, and size induced to cover the back of the damaged leaf. The three sheets must then be taken out and laid between blotting-paper to take up the surplus moisture. The top sheet must then be carefully peeled off, and the damaged page laid face downwards on clean blotting-paper. Then the back sheet can be peeled off as well, leaving the damaged sheet to dry.

In some cases, you'll find that[70] sheets from old books are so damaged that they’re barely strong enough to handle. These sheets need to be sized with a stronger solution like this: Take a sheet of heavily-sized paper, like notepaper, and carefully place your damaged sheet on top of it. Then put another sheet of strong paper on top of that, and immerse all three sheets in the sizing solution. You’ll see that the top sheet can be easily lifted off, allowing the sizing solution to flow over the damaged sheet. If you put the top sheet back on, you can handle the three sheets as one, flip them over, and repeat the process to cover the back of the damaged page. After that, take the three sheets out and place them between blotting paper to absorb excess moisture. Carefully peel off the top sheet, and lay the damaged page face down on clean blotting paper. Then, you can peel off the back sheet as well, leaving the damaged sheet to dry.

The following is quoted from “Chambers’ Encyclopædia” on Gelatine:—

The following is quoted from “Chambers’ Encyclopædia” on Gelatin:—

“Gelatine should never be judged by the eye alone.[71]

“Gelatine should never be judged by appearance alone.[71]

“Its purity may be very easily tested thus: Soak it in cold water, then pour upon it a small quantity of boiling water. If pure, it will form a thickish, clear straw-coloured solution, free from smell; but if made of impure materials, it will give off a very offensive odour, and have a yellow, gluey consistency.”

"Its purity can be easily tested like this: Soak it in cold water, then pour a small amount of boiling water on it. If it’s pure, it will create a thick, clear straw-colored solution with no smell; but if it’s made from impure materials, it will release a very unpleasant odor and have a yellow, sticky texture."

WASHING

When there are stains or ink marks on books that cannot be removed by the use of hot size or hot water, stronger measures may sometimes have to be taken. Many stains will be found to yield readily to hot water with a little alum in it, and others can be got out by a judicious application of curd soap with a very soft brush and plenty of warm water. But some, and especially ink stains, require further treatment. There are many ways of washing paper, and most of those in common use are extremely dangerous, and have in many cases resulted in the absolute destruction of fine books. If it is thought to be absolutely necessary that the sheets of a book should be washed, the safest method is as follows:—Take an ounce of permanganate of potash dissolved[72] in a quart of water, and warmed slightly. In this put the sheets to be washed, and leave them until they turn a dark brown. This will usually take about an hour, but may take longer for some papers. Then turn the sheets out and wash them in running water until all trace of purple stain disappears from the water as it comes away. Then transfer them to a bath of sulphurous (not sulphuric) acid and water in the proportion of one ounce of acid to one pint of water. The sheets in this solution will rapidly turn white, and if left for some time nearly all stains will be removed. In case any stains refuse to come out, the sheets should be put in clear water for a short time, and then placed in the permanganate of potash solution again, and left there for a longer time than before; then after washing in clear water, again transferred to the sulphurous acid. When sheets are removed from the sulphurous acid they should be well washed for an hour or two in running water, and then may be blotted or squeezed off and hung up on lines to dry. Any sheets treated in this way will require sizing afterwards. And if, as is often the case, only a few sheets at the beginning or end[73] of the book have to be washed, it will be necessary to tone down the washed sheets to match the rest of the book by putting some stain in the size. For staining there are many things used. A weak solution of permanganate of potash gives a yellowish stain that will be found to match many papers. Other stains are used, such as coffee, chicory, tea, liquorice, &c. Whatever is used should be put in the size. To ascertain that the right depth of colour has been obtained, a piece of unsized paper, such as white blotting-paper, is dipped in the stained size and blotted off and dried before the fire. It is impossible to judge of the depth of colour in a stain unless the test piece is thoroughly dried. If the stain is not right, add more water or more stain as is needed. Experience will tell what stain to use to match the paper of any given book.

When there are stains or ink marks on books that can't be removed with hot size or hot water, stronger methods may sometimes be needed. Many stains can be easily removed with hot water mixed with a little alum, and others can be cleaned with a careful application of curd soap using a very soft brush and lots of warm water. However, some stains, especially ink stains, need more treatment. There are various ways to wash paper, but most common methods are very risky and have resulted in the complete destruction of valuable books. If it’s deemed absolutely necessary to wash the sheets of a book, the safest method is as follows: Take an ounce of permanganate of potash dissolved in a quart of slightly warmed water. In this solution, place the sheets to be washed and leave them until they turn dark brown. This usually takes about an hour, but it might take longer for some papers. Then take the sheets out and wash them in running water until all traces of purple disappear from the water. Next, transfer them to a bath of sulphurous (not sulphuric) acid and water, using one ounce of acid for every pint of water. The sheets in this solution will quickly turn white, and if left for a while, most stains will be removed. If some stains persist, the sheets should be placed in clear water for a short time, then put back in the permanganate of potash solution for a longer duration; after that, wash them in clear water again and return them to the sulphurous acid. Once the sheets are taken out of the sulphurous acid, they should be well washed for one to two hours in running water, then blotted or squeezed to remove excess water and hung up to dry. Any sheets treated this way will need sizing afterward. And if, as often happens, only a few sheets at the beginning or end of the book need washing, it will be necessary to tone down the washed sheets to match the rest of the book by adding some stain to the size. There are many substances that can be used for staining. A weak solution of permanganate of potash produces a yellowish stain that often matches many papers. Other staining materials include coffee, chicory, tea, and liquorice, among others. Whatever is used should be added to the size. To determine if the right color depth has been achieved, dip a piece of unsized paper, like white blotting paper, into the stained size, blot it, and dry it by the fire. It’s impossible to assess the depth of color in a stain unless the test piece is completely dry. If the stain isn't correct, adjust by adding more water or more dye as needed. Experience will help in selecting the right stain to match the paper of any specific book.

To remove grease or oil stains, ether may be used. Pour it freely in a circle round the spot, narrowing the circle gradually until the stain is covered. Then apply a warm iron through a piece of blotting-paper.

To get rid of grease or oil stains, you can use ether. Pour it generously in a circle around the stain, gradually making the circle smaller until the stain is covered. Then, use a warm iron over a piece of blotting paper.

Ether should only be used in a draught in a well-ventilated room on account of[74] its well-known inflammable and anæsthetical properties.

Ether should only be used in a draft in a well-ventilated room because of[74] its well-known flammable and anesthetic properties.

A very dilute (about one per cent.) solution of pure hydrochloric acid in cold water will be found to take out some stains if the paper is left in it for some hours. When the paper is removed from the solution, it must be thoroughly washed in running water. It is important that the hydrochloric acid used should be pure, as the commercial quality (spirits of salts) often contains sulphuric acid.

A very diluted (about one percent) solution of pure hydrochloric acid in cold water can help remove some stains if the paper is left in it for several hours. Once you take the paper out of the solution, it should be thoroughly rinsed in running water. It's crucial to use pure hydrochloric acid, as the commercial version (spirits of salts) often has sulfuric acid mixed in.

The following recipes are quoted from De l’organisation et de l’administration des Bibliothèques, par Jules Cusin:—

The following recipes are taken from De l’organisation et de l’administration des Bibliothèques, par Jules Cusin:—

To remove stains from paper:—“Mud Stains.—To take away these kinds of stains, spread some soap jelly very evenly over the stained places, and leave it there for thirty or forty minutes, according to the depth of the stain. Then dip the sheet in clean water, and then having spread it on a perfectly clean table, remove the soap lightly with a hog’s hair brush or a fine sponge; all the mud will disappear at the same time. Put the sheet into the clear water again, to get rid of the last trace of soap. Let it drain a little, press it lightly between two sheets of blotting-paper,[75] and finish by letting it dry slowly in a dry place in the shade.

To remove stains from paper:—“Mud Stains.—To get rid of these stains, evenly spread some soap jelly over the stained areas and leave it there for thirty to forty minutes, depending on how deep the stain is. Then, dip the sheet in clean water, and after laying it on a perfectly clean table, gently remove the soap using a hog’s hair brush or a fine sponge; all the mud will disappear at once. Place the sheet into the clear water again to remove any remaining soap. Let it drain a bit, press it lightly between two sheets of blotting paper,[75] and finish by allowing it to dry slowly in a dry, shaded area.

Stains of Tallow, Stearine, or Fat.—To take away these stains cover them with blotting-paper and pass over them a warm flat-iron. When the paper has soaked up the grease, change it and repeat the operation until the stains have been sufficiently removed. After that, touch both sides of the sheets where they have been stained with a brush dipped in essence of turpentine heated to boiling-point. Then to restore the whiteness of the paper, touch the places which were stained with a piece of fine linen soaked in purified spirits of wine warmed in the water-bath. This method may also be employed to get rid of sealing-wax stains.

Stains of Tallow, Stearine, or Fat.—To remove these stains, cover them with blotting paper and press a warm flat iron over it. When the paper has absorbed the grease, replace it and repeat the process until the stains are mostly gone. After that, use a brush dipped in boiling turpentine essence to treat both sides of the stained areas. To restore the whiteness of the paper, dab the stained spots with a piece of fine linen soaked in purified spirits of wine that has been warmed in a water bath. This method can also be used to remove sealing-wax stains.

Oil Stains.—Make a mixture of 500 gr. of soap, 300 gr. of clay, 60 gr. of quicklime, and sufficient water to make it of the right consistency, spread a thin layer of this on the stain, and leave it there about a quarter of an hour. Then dip the sheet in a bath of hot water; take it out, and let it dry slowly.

Oil Stains.—Mix 500g of soap, 300g of clay, 60g of quicklime, and enough water to achieve the right consistency. Spread a thin layer of this mixture on the stain and leave it for about 15 minutes. Then dip the sheet in a hot water bath; remove it and let it dry slowly.

“You can also use the following method, generally employed for finger-marks:—

“You can also use the following method, typically used for fingerprints:—

Finger-marks.—These stains are sometimes[76] very obstinate. Still they can generally be mastered by the following method:—Spread over them a layer of white soap jelly (savon blanc en gelée), and leave it there for some hours. Then remove this with a fine sponge dipped in hot water, and more often than not all the dirt disappears at the same time. If this treatment is not sufficient, you might replace the soap jelly by soft soap (savon noir), but you must be careful not to leave it long on the printing, which might decompose and run, and that would do more harm than good.”

Finger marks.—These stains can sometimes be pretty stubborn. However, they can usually be tackled with the following method: Spread a layer of white soap jelly (savon blanc en gelée) over the stains and let it sit for several hours. Then, remove it using a fine sponge dipped in hot water, and often all the dirt will come off at the same time. If this method isn’t enough, you can substitute the soap jelly with soft soap (savon noir), but be careful not to leave it on the print for too long, as it may break down and run, which would cause more damage than good.

Sheets of very old books are best left with the stains of age upon them, excepting, perhaps, such as can be removed with hot water or size. Nearly all stains can be removed, but in the process old paper is apt to lose more in character than it gains in appearance.

Sheets of very old books are better off with the signs of age on them, except maybe for those that can be cleaned with hot water or sizing. Almost all stains can be cleaned, but in the process, old paper often loses more character than it gains in looks.

MENDING

For mending torn sheets of an old book, some paper that matches as nearly as possible must be found. For this purpose it is the custom for bookbinders to collect quantities of old paper. If a piece[77] of the same tone cannot be found, paper of similar texture and substance may be stained to match.

To repair torn pages of an old book, you need to find some paper that closely matches it. Bookbinders usually gather a lot of old paper for this reason. If you can't find a piece that has the same tone, you can dye paper with a similar texture and quality to match it.

Supposing a corner to be missing, and a piece of paper to have been found that matches it, the torn page is laid over the new paper in such a way that the wire marks on both papers correspond. Then the point of a folder should be drawn along the edge of the torn sheet, leaving an indented line on the new paper. The new paper should then be cut off about an eighth of an inch beyond the indented line, and the edge carefully pared up to the line. The edge of the old paper must be similarly pared, so that the two edges when laid together will not exceed the thickness of the rest of the page. It is well to leave a little greater overlap at the edges of the page. Both cut edges must then be well pasted with white paste and rubbed down between blotting-paper. To ensure a perfectly clean joint the pasted edge should not be touched with the hand, and pasting-paper, brushes, and paste must be perfectly clean.

If a corner is missing and you find a piece of paper that matches it, place the torn page over the new paper in such a way that the wire marks on both sheets line up. Then, use the point of a folder to draw along the edge of the torn sheet, creating an indented line on the new paper. Cut the new paper about an eighth of an inch beyond the indented line, and then carefully trim the edge up to that line. The edge of the old paper should be trimmed in the same way, so that when the two edges are placed together, they don’t exceed the thickness of the rest of the page. It’s best to leave a slightly larger overlap at the edges of the page. Both cut edges should be well glued with white paste and pressed down between blotting paper. To make sure the joint is perfectly clean, avoid touching the pasted edge with your hands, and ensure that the pasting paper, brushes, and paste are all completely clean.

In the case of a tear across the page, if there are any overlapping edges, they may merely be pasted together and the[78] end of the tear at the edge of the paper strengthened by a small piece of pared paper. If the tear crosses print, and there are no overlapping edges, either tiny pieces of pared paper may be cut and laid across the tear between the lines of print, or else a piece of the thinnest Japanese paper, which is nearly transparent, may be pasted right along the tear over the print; in either case the mend should be strengthened at the edge of the page by an additional thickness of paper. In cases where the backs of the sections have been much damaged, it will be necessary to put a guard the entire length, or in the case of small holes, to fill them in with pieces of torn paper. The edges of any mend may, with great care, be scraped with a sharp knife having a slight burr on the under side, and then rubbed lightly with a piece of worn fine sand-paper, or a fragment of cuttle-fish bone. Care must be taken not to pare away too much, and especially not to weaken the mend at the edges of the sheet. As a general rule, the new mending paper should go on the back of a sheet.

In the case of a tear across the page, if there are any overlapping edges, they can just be glued together and the end of the tear at the edge of the paper reinforced with a small piece of thin paper. If the tear goes through printed text, and there are no overlapping edges, you can either cut small pieces of thin paper and lay them across the tear between the lines of print, or use a piece of the thinnest Japanese paper, which is almost transparent, to paste directly over the tear on the print; in either case, the repair should be reinforced at the edge of the page with an extra layer of paper. If the backs of the sections are significantly damaged, it will be necessary to add a guard the entire length, or if there are small holes, to fill them in with pieces of torn paper. The edges of any repair can, with great care, be shaved with a sharp knife that has a slight burr on the underside, and then lightly rubbed with a piece of worn fine sandpaper or a fragment of cuttlefish bone. You need to be careful not to remove too much material, especially not to weaken the repair at the edges of the sheet. As a general rule, the new repairing paper should go on the back of a sheet.

Sometimes it is thought necessary to fill up worm-holes in the paper. This[79] may be done by boiling down some paper in size until it is of a pulpy consistency, and a little of this filled into the worm-holes will re-make the paper in those places. It is a very tedious operation, and seldom worth doing.

Sometimes it’s considered necessary to fill in wormholes in the paper. This[79] can be done by boiling down some paper in sizing until it becomes pulpy, and a bit of this can fill the wormholes, restoring the paper in those spots. It’s a very tedious process and usually not worth the effort.

Fig. 18.

Fig. 18.

Fig. 18.

Mending vellum is done in much the same way as mending paper, excepting that a little greater overlap must be left. It is well to put a stitch of silk at each end of a vellum patch, as you cannot depend on paste alone holding vellum securely. The overlapping edges must be well roughed up with a knife to make sure that the paste will stick. A cut in a vellum page is best mended with fine silk with a lacing stitch (see fig. 18).

Mending vellum is pretty similar to mending paper, except you need to leave a bit more overlap. It’s a good idea to add a silk stitch at each end of a vellum patch since you can't rely on paste alone to keep the vellum in place. The overlapping edges should be roughened up with a knife to ensure the paste will stick. A cut in a vellum page is best repaired with fine silk using a lacing stitch (see fig. 18).

Mending is most easily done on a sheet of plate-glass, of which the edges and corners have been rubbed down.

Mending is easiest to do on a sheet of plate glass, with the edges and corners smoothed out.

CHAPTER V[80]

End Papers—Leather Joints—Pressing

Endpapers—Leather Joints—Pressing

END PAPERS

If an old book that has had much wear is examined, it will generally be found that the leaves at the beginning and the end have suffered more than the rest of the book. On this ground, and also to enable people who must write notes in books to do so with the least injury to the book, it is advisable to put a good number of blank papers at each end. As these papers are part of the binding, and have an important protective function to perform, they should be of good quality. At all times difficulty has been found in preventing the first and last section of the book, whether end papers or not, from dragging away when the cover is opened, and various devices have been tried to overcome this defect. In the fifteenth century strips of vellum (usually cut from manuscripts) were pasted on to the back of the book and on the inside[81] of the boards, or in some cases were merely folded round the first and last section and pasted on to the covers. The modern, and far less efficient, practice is to “overcast” the first and last sections. This is objectionable, because it prevents the leaves from opening right to the back, and it fails in the object aimed at, by merely transferring the strain to the back of the overcast section.

If you look at an old book that’s been heavily used, you'll usually find that the pages at the beginning and end are more damaged than the rest of the book. For this reason, and to help people who need to write notes in books do so with minimal harm to the book, it's a good idea to include several blank pages at both ends. Since these pages are part of the binding and play an important protective role, they should be made of high-quality paper. Historically, it has been challenging to stop the first and last sections of the book, whether they are end papers or not, from getting loose when the cover is opened, and various solutions have been attempted to fix this issue. In the fifteenth century, strips of vellum (typically cut from manuscripts) were glued to the spine and the insides[81] of the covers, or sometimes just wrapped around the first and last sections and glued to the covers. The current method, which is much less effective, is to “overcast” the first and last sections. This practice is problematic because it doesn’t allow the pages to open all the way to the back and fails to achieve its intended purpose, as it simply shifts the strain to the back of the overcast section.

In order to make provision for any strain there may be in opening the cover, it is better to adopt some such arrangement as shown in fig. 19. In this end paper the zigzag opens slightly in response to any strain.

In order to prepare for any stress that might occur when opening the cover, it's better to use an arrangement like the one shown in fig. 19. In this endpaper, the zigzag opens slightly in reaction to any strain.

The way to make this end paper is to take a folded sheet of paper a little larger than the book. Then with dividers mark two points an eighth of an inch from the back for the fold, and paste your paste-down paper, B B, up to these points (see fig. 19, II). When the paste is dry, fold back the sheet (A1) over the paste-down paper, and A2 the reverse way, leaving the form seen in fig. 19, III. A folded sheet of paper similar to A is inserted at C (fig. 19, V, H), and the sewing passes through this. When the[82] book is pasted down the leaf A1 is torn off, and B1 pasted down on the board.[83] If marbled paper is desired, the marble should be “made,” that is, pasted on to B1.

The way to create this end paper is to take a folded sheet of paper that's slightly larger than the book. Then, using dividers, mark two points an eighth of an inch from the back for the fold, and paste your paste-down paper, B B, up to these points (see fig. 19, II). Once the paste is dry, fold back the sheet (A1) over the paste-down paper, and A2 the opposite way, leaving the form seen in fig. 19, III. A folded sheet of paper like A is inserted at C (fig. 19, V, H), and the sewing goes through this. When the[82] book is pasted down, the leaf A1 is torn off, and B1 is pasted down on the board.[83] If you want marbled paper, the marble should be “made,” meaning it should be pasted onto B1.

Fig. 19.

Fig. 19.

There are considerable disadvantages in using marbled papers, as if they are of thick enough paper to help the strength of the binding, the “made” sheet is very stiff, and in a small book is troublesome. On no account should any marble paper be used, unless it is tough and durable. The quality of the paper of which most marbled papers are made is so poor, that it is unsuitable for use as end papers. For most books a self-coloured paper of good quality answers well for the paste-down sheets.

There are significant downsides to using marbled papers. If the paper is thick enough to strengthen the binding, the resulting sheet is very stiff, making it difficult in a small book. You should never use any marble paper unless it is tough and durable. The quality of the paper used for most marbled papers is so poor that it's not suitable for end papers. For most books, a solid-colored paper of good quality works well for the paste-down sheets.

It is a mistake to leave end papers to be pasted on after the book has been forwarded, as in that case they have little constructive value. Every leaf of such an end paper as is described above will open right to the back, and the zigzag allows play for the drag of the board.

It’s a mistake to wait until the book is finished to paste on the end papers because at that point, they provide very little structural support. Each leaf of the end paper described above will lie flat against the back, and the zigzag design gives some flexibility for the movement of the cover.

Paper with a conventional pattern painted or printed on it may be used for end papers. If such a design is simple, such as a sprig repeated all over, or an arrangement of stars or dots, it may look very well; but over elaborate end papers,[84] and especially those that aim at pictorial effect, are seldom successful.

Paper with a traditional pattern painted or printed on it can be used for end papers. If the design is simple, like a repeated sprig or a pattern of stars or dots, it can look quite nice; however, overly elaborate end papers,[84] especially those that try for a pictorial effect, rarely succeed.

Ends may be made of thin vellum. If so, unless the board is very heavy, it is best to have leather joints.

Ends can be made from thin vellum. If that's the case, unless the board is really heavy, it’s better to use leather joints.

A single leaf of vellum (in the place of B1 and 2, II, fig. 19) should have an edge turned up into the zigzag with the leather joint, and sewn through. Vellum ends must always be sewn, as it is not safe to rely upon paste to hold them. They look well, and may be enriched by tooling. The disadvantage of vellum is, that it has a tendency to curl up if subjected to heat, and when it contracts it unduly draws the boards of the book. For large manuscripts, or printed books on vellum, which are bound in wooden or other thick boards and are clasped, thicker vellum may be used for the ends; that with a slightly brown surface looks best. The part that will come into the joint should be scraped thin with a knife, and a zigzag made of Japanese paper.

A single leaf of vellum (in place of B1 and 2, II, fig. 19) should have an edge turned up into the zigzag with the leather joint and sewn through. Vellum ends must always be sewn, as you can't rely on paste to hold them. They look nice and can be enhanced by tooling. The downside of vellum is that it tends to curl up when exposed to heat, and when it shrinks, it unduly pulls at the boards of the book. For large manuscripts or printed books on vellum that are bound in wooden or other thick boards and are clasped, thicker vellum can be used for the ends; that with a slightly brown surface looks best. The part that will go into the joint should be scraped thin with a knife, and a zigzag made of Japanese paper.

Silk or other fine woven material may be used for ends. It is best used with a leather joint, and may be stuck on to the first paper of the end papers (B1, No. 2, fig. 19), and cut with the book. The[85] glaire of the edge gilding will help to stop the edges fraying out. In attaching silk to paper, thin glue is the best thing to use; the paper, not the silk, being glued. Some little practice is needed to get sufficient glue on the paper to make the silk stick all over, and yet not to soil it. When the silk has been glued to the paper, it should be left under a light weight to dry. If put in the press, the glue may be squeezed through and the silk soiled.

Silk or other fine woven materials can be used for ends. It's best to use it with a leather joint and can be attached to the first sheet of the end papers (B1, No. 2, fig. 19), and cut along with the book. The[85] glaire of the edge gilding will help prevent the edges from fraying. When attaching silk to paper, thin glue is the best option; glue the paper, not the silk. A bit of practice is needed to apply enough glue on the paper to make the silk stick well without making a mess. Once the silk is glued to the paper, it should be left under a light weight to dry. If placed in the press, the glue might ooze out and soil the silk.

If the silk is very thin, or delicate in colour, or if it seems likely that it will fray out at the edges, it is better to turn the edges in over a piece of paper cut a little smaller than the page of the book and stick them down. This forms a pad, which may be attached to the first leaf of the end papers; a similar pad may be made for filling in the board.

If the silk is really thin or has a light color, or if it looks like it might fray at the edges, it's better to fold the edges over a piece of paper that's cut a bit smaller than the book page and glue them down. This creates a pad that can be attached to the first page of the end papers; a similar pad can be made to fill in the board.

Before using, the silk should be damped and ironed flat on the wrong side.

Before using, the silk should be dampened and ironed flat on the back side.

Silk ends give a book a rich finish, but seldom look altogether satisfactory. If the silk is merely stuck on to the first end paper, the edges will generally fray out if the book is much used. If the edges are turned in, an unpleasantly thick end is made.[86]

Silk ends give a book a luxurious finish, but they rarely look completely right. If the silk is just glued onto the first end paper, the edges will usually fray with regular use. If the edges are folded in, it creates an uncomfortably thick end.[86]

LEATHER JOINTS

Leather joints are pieces of thin leather that are used to cover the joints on the inside (for paring, see page 154). They add very little strength to the book, but give a pleasant finish to the inside of the board.

Leather joints are strips of thin leather that cover the joints on the inside (for paring, see page 154). They don’t add much strength to the book, but they provide a nice finish to the inside of the board.

If there are to be leather joints, the end papers are made up without A 1, and the edge of the leather pasted and inserted at D, with a piece of common paper as a protection (see fig. 19, IV). When the paste is dry, the leather is folded over at E.

If there are going to be leather joints, the end papers are prepared without A 1, and the edge of the leather is glued and inserted at D, using a piece of regular paper as protection (see fig. 19, IV). Once the glue is dry, the leather is folded over at E.

A piece of blotting-paper may be pasted on to the inside of the waste leaf, leaving enough of it loose to go between the leather joint and the first sheet of the end paper. This will avoid any chance of the leather joint staining or marking the ends while the book is being bound. The blotting-paper, of course, is taken out with the waste sheet before the joint is pasted down.

A piece of blotting paper can be glued onto the inside of the waste leaf, leaving enough of it loose to fit between the leather joint and the first sheet of the endpaper. This will prevent any chance of the leather joint staining or marking the ends while the book is being bound. The blotting paper is, of course, removed with the waste sheet before the joint is glued down.

Joints may also be made of linen or cloth inserted in the same way. A cloth joint has greater strength than a leather one, as the latter has to be very thin[87] in order that the board may shut properly.

Joints can also be made with linen or fabric inserted similarly. A fabric joint is stronger than a leather one, since the leather needs to be quite thin[87] for the board to close properly.

With leather or cloth joints, the sewing should go through both E and F.

With leather or cloth joints, the stitching should pass through both E and F.

PRESSING
Fig. 20.

Fig. 20.

Fig. 20.

Fig. 21.—Standing Press

Fig. 21.—Standing Press

Fig. 21.—Standing Press

While the end papers are being made,[88] the sections of the book should be pressed. To do this a pressing-board is taken which is a little larger than the book, and a tin, covered with common paper, placed on that, then a few sections of the book,[89] then another tin covered with paper, and then more sections, and so on, taking care that the sections are exactly over one another (see fig. 20). A second pressing-board having been placed on the last tin,[90] the pile of sections, tins, and pressing-boards can be put into the standing-press and left under pressure till next day. Newly printed plates should be protected by thin tissue paper while being pressed. Any folded plates or maps, &c., or inserted letters, must either not be pressed, or have tins placed on each side of them to prevent them from indenting the adjoining leaves.

While the endpapers are being made,[88] the sections of the book should be pressed. To do this, take a pressing board that is slightly larger than the book, place a tin covered with plain paper on it, add a few sections of the book,[89] then another tin covered with paper, and then more sections, and so on, making sure that the sections are perfectly aligned on top of each other (see fig. 20). After placing a second pressing board on the last tin,[90] the stack of sections, tins, and pressing boards can be put into the standing press and left under pressure until the next day. Newly printed plates should be protected with thin tissue paper during pressing. Any folded plates or maps, etc., or inserted letters must either not be pressed or have tins placed on each side of them to prevent them from indenting the adjacent leaves.

Fig. 22.—French Standing Press

Fig. 22.—French Standing Press

Fig. 22.—French Standing Press

Hand-printed books, such as the publications of the Kelmscott Press, should have very little pressure, or the “impression” of the print and the surface of the paper may be injured. Books newly printed on vellum or heavily coloured illustrations should not be pressed at all, or the print may “set off.”

Hand-printed books, like those from the Kelmscott Press, should have minimal pressure; otherwise, the print impression and the paper's surface could be damaged. Books freshly printed on vellum or with vibrant illustrations shouldn't be pressed at all, or the print might smear.

The protecting tissues on the plates of a book that has been printed for more than a year can generally be left out, unless the titles of the plates are printed on them, as they are a nuisance to readers and often get crumpled up and mark the book.

The protective tissues on the plates of a book that has been printed for over a year can usually be removed, unless the titles of the plates are on them, since they can be annoying for readers and often get wrinkled and stain the book.

In order to make books solid, that is, to make the leaves lie evenly and closely to one another, it was formerly the custom to beat books on a “stone” with a heavy[91] hammer. This process has been superseded by the rolling-press; but with the admirable presses that are now to be had, simple pressing will be found to be sufficient for the “extra” binder.

To make books sturdy, meaning to ensure the pages sit flat and close together, it used to be common to hit books on a "stone" with a heavy[91] hammer. This method has been replaced by the rolling press; however, with the excellent presses available today, simple pressing is enough for the "extra" binder.

At fig. 21 is shown an iron standing-press. This is screwed down first with a short bar, and finally with a long bar. This form of press is effective and simple, but needs a good deal of room for the long bar, and must have very firm supports, or it may be pulled over.

At fig. 21 is shown an iron standing press. It's secured first with a short bar, and then with a long bar. This type of press is effective and straightforward, but requires ample space for the long bar and needs very sturdy supports, or it could tip over.

At fig. 22 is shown a French standing-press, in which the pressure is applied by a weighted wheel, which will, in the first place, by being spun round, turn the screw until it is tight, and give additional pressure by a hammering action. This press I have found to answer for all ordinary purposes, and to give as great pressure as can be got by the iron standing-press, without any undue strain on supports or workmen.

At fig. 22 is shown a French standing press, where the pressure is applied by a weighted wheel. First, the wheel is spun around, which turns the screw until it’s tight, and then it adds extra pressure through a hammering action. I’ve found this press to be suitable for all regular uses, providing as much pressure as you can get from a traditional iron standing press, without putting excessive stress on the supports or the workers.

There are many other forms of press by which great pressure can be applied, some working by various arrangements of cog-wheels, screws, and levers, others by hydraulic pressure.

There are many other types of presses that can apply significant pressure, some using different setups of cogwheels, screws, and levers, while others use hydraulic pressure.

CHAPTER VI[92]

Trimming Edges before Sewing—Edge Gilding

Trimming Edges Before Sewing—Edge Gilding

TRIMMING BEFORE SEWING

When the sheets come from the press the treatment of the edges must be decided upon, that is, whether they are to be entirely uncut, trimmed before sewing, or cut in boards.

When the sheets come from the press, the edges need to be dealt with. This means deciding whether they will be left uncut, trimmed before sewing, or cut into boards.

Early printed books and manuscripts should on no account have their edges cut at all, and any modern books of value are better only slightly trimmed and gilt before sewing. But for books of reference that need good bindings, on account of the wear they have to withstand, cutting in boards is best, as the smooth edge so obtained makes the leaves easier to turn over. Gilt tops and rough edges give a book a look of unequal finish.

Early printed books and manuscripts should never have their edges cut. Any valuable modern books should only be lightly trimmed and gilded before being sewn. However, for reference books that require sturdy bindings due to heavy use, cutting them into boards is preferable, as the smooth edge makes the pages easier to flip. Gilded tops and rough edges make a book look unevenly finished.

If the edges are to remain uncut, or be cut “in boards” with the plough, the book will be ready for “marking up” as soon as it comes from the press; but if it is to be gilt before sewing, it must be first trimmed.[93]

If the edges are supposed to stay uncut or be cut "in boards" with the plow, the book will be ready for "marking up" as soon as it comes from the printer; but if it’s going to be gilded before sewing, it has to be trimmed first.[93]

Fig. 23.

Fig. 23.

Fig. 23.

The sheets for trimming with end papers and all plates inserted must first be cut square at the head against a carpenter’s square (see fig. 7). Then a piece of mill-board may be cut to the size, it is desired to leave the leaves, and the sections trimmed to it. To do this three nails should be put into the covering board through a piece of straw-board, and the back of the section slid along nails 1 and 2 until it touches No. 3 (see fig. 23). The board is slid in the same way, and anything projecting beyond it cut off. When the under straw-board has become inconveniently scored in the first position, by shifting the lower nail (1) a fresh surface will receive the cuts. Fig. 24 is a representation of a simple machine that I use in my workshop for trimming. The slides A A are adjustable to any width required, and are fixed by the screws B B.[94] The brass-bound straight edge C fits on to slots in A A, and as this, by the adjustment of the slides, can be fixed at any distance from B B, all sizes of books can be trimmed. As by this machine several sections can be cut at once, the time taken is not very much greater than if the book were cut in the plough.

The sheets for trimming with end papers and all plates inserted must first be cut square at the top using a carpenter’s square (see fig. 7). Then, a piece of mill-board should be cut to the desired size for the leaves, and the sections should be trimmed to match it. To do this, three nails should be inserted into the covering board through a piece of straw-board, and the back of the section should be slid along nails 1 and 2 until it touches nail 3 (see fig. 23). The board is adjusted in the same way, and anything that sticks out beyond it should be cut off. When the lower straw-board gets too worn from the first position, shifting the lower nail (1) will give you a fresh surface to work on. Fig. 24 shows a simple machine that I use in my workshop for trimming. The slides A A can be adjusted to any required width and are secured by the screws B B.[94] The brass-bound straight edge C fits into slots in A A, and since this can be set at any distance from B B by adjusting the slides, all sizes of books can be trimmed. Because this machine allows you to cut several sections at once, the total time taken isn’t much longer than if the book were cut using a plough.

Fig. 24.

Fig. 24.

Fig. 24.

Considerable judgment is required in trimming. The edges of the larger pages only, on a previously uncut book, should be cut, leaving the smaller pages untouched. Such uncut pages are called “proof,” and the existence of proof in a bound book is evidence that it has not been unduly cut.

Considerable judgment is needed when trimming. Only the edges of the larger pages in a previously uncut book should be cut, leaving the smaller pages untouched. These uncut pages are called "proof," and the presence of proof in a bound book shows that it hasn't been excessively cut.

Before gilding the edges of the trimmed[95] sections, any uncut folds that may remain should be opened with a folder, as if opened after gilding, they will show a ragged white edge.

Before gilding the edges of the trimmed[95] sections, any uncut folds that might still be there should be opened with a folder; if they are opened after gilding, they'll display a rough white edge.

Fig. 25.

Fig. 25.

Fig. 25.

EDGE GILDING

To gild the edges of trimmed sections, the book must be “knocked up” to the fore-edge, getting as many of the short leaves as possible to the front. It is then put into the “lying press,” with gilding boards on each side (see fig. No. 25), and screwed up tightly. Very little scraping will be necessary, and usually if well rubbed with fine sand-paper, to remove any chance finger-marks or loose fragments of paper, the edge will be smooth enough to gild. If the paper is very absorbent, the edges must be washed over with vellum size and left to dry.

To gild the edges of trimmed sections, the book needs to be “knocked up” to the fore-edge, bringing as many of the short leaves to the front as possible. It is then placed into the “lying press,” with gilding boards on each side (see fig. No. 25), and tightened securely. Only minimal scraping will be needed, and typically, if it’s well rubbed with fine sandpaper to remove any potential fingerprints or loose paper fragments, the edge will be smooth enough for gilding. If the paper is very absorbent, the edges should be coated with vellum size and allowed to dry.

The next process is an application of red chalk. For this a piece of gilder’s red chalk is rubbed down on a stone with[96] water, making a thickish paste, and the edges are well brushed with a hard brush dipped in this mixture, care being taken not to have it wet enough to run between the leaves. Some gilders prefer to use blacklead or a mixture of chalk and blacklead. A further brushing with a dry brush will to some extent polish the leaves. It will then be ready for an application of glaire. Before glairing, the gold must be cut on the cushion to the width required (see p. 200), and may be either taken up on very slightly greased paper, a gilder’s tip, or with a piece of net stretched on a little frame (see fig. 26). The gold leaf will adhere sufficiently to the net, and can be readily released by a light breath when it is exactly over the proper place on the edge.

The next step is applying red chalk. For this, a piece of gilder’s red chalk is ground down on a stone with[96] water to create a thick paste. The edges are then brushed with a stiff brush dipped in this mixture, making sure it’s not too wet so that it doesn’t run between the leaves. Some gilders prefer to use graphite or a combination of chalk and graphite. A final brushing with a dry brush will help polish the leaves a bit. It will then be ready for an application of glaire. Before applying glaire, the gold needs to be cut on the cushion to the required width (see p. 200), and it can be picked up on slightly greased paper, a gilder’s tip, or with a piece of net stretched on a small frame (see fig. 26). The gold leaf will stick well enough to the net and can be easily released with a gentle breath when it’s positioned correctly over the edge.

When the gold is ready, the glaire should be floated on to the edge with a soft brush, and the gold spread evenly over it and left until dry; that is, in a workshop of ordinary temperature, for about an hour. The edge is then lightly rubbed with a piece of leather that has been previously rubbed on beeswax, and is ready for burnishing. It is best to commence burnishing through a piece of thin[97] slightly waxed paper to set the gold, and afterwards the burnisher can be used directly on the edge. A piece of bloodstone ground so as to have no sharp edges (see fig. 27) makes a good burnisher.

When the gold is ready, use a soft brush to apply the glaire along the edge, then spread the gold evenly over it and let it dry; this should take about an hour in a regular temperature workshop. After that, gently rub the edge with a piece of leather that has been coated with beeswax, and it will be ready for burnishing. It's best to start burnishing through a piece of thin, slightly waxed paper to secure the gold, and then you can use the burnisher directly on the edge. A piece of bloodstone, smoothed out to avoid sharp edges (see fig. 27), works well as a burnisher.

Fig. 26.

Fig. 26.

Fig. 26.

There are several different preparations used for gilding edges. One part of beaten up white of egg with four parts of water left to stand for a day and strained will be found to answer well.[98]

There are several different mixtures used for gilding edges. One part of beaten egg white mixed with four parts of water, allowed to sit for a day and then strained, works really well.[98]

Fig. 27.

Fig. 27.

Fig. 27.

After the fore-edge is gilt the same operation is repeated at the head and tail. As it is desirable to have the gilding at the head as solid as possible, rather more scraping is advisable here, or the head may be left to be cut with a plough and gilt in boards.

After the fore-edge is gilded, the same process is done at the top and bottom. Since it's important to have the gilding at the top as solid as possible, it's better to do a bit more scraping here, or the top can be left to be cut with a plow and gilded while in boards.

CHAPTER VII

Marking up—Sewing—Materials for Sewing

Marking up—Sewing—Sewing Materials

MARKING UP

This is drawing lines across the back of the sections to show the sewer the position of the sewing cords.

This is marking lines across the back of the sections to indicate the position of the sewing cords.

Marking up for flexible sewing needs care and judgment, as on it depends the position of the bands on the back of the bound book. Nearly all books look best with five bands, but very large, thinnish folios may have six, and a very small, thick book may look better with four. Generally speaking, five is the best number. In marking up trimmed sheets for flexible sewing, the length of the back should be divided from the head into six portions,[99] five equal, and one at the tail slightly longer. From the points so arrived at, strong pencil lines should be made across the back with a carpenter’s square as guide, the book having been previously knocked up between pressing-boards, and placed in the lying press. It is important that the head should be knocked up exactly square, as otherwise the bands will be found to slope when the book is bound. In the case of a book which is to be cut and gilt in boards, before marking up it will be necessary to decide how much is to be cut off, and allowance made, or the head and tail division of the back will, when cut, be too small. It must also be remembered that to the height of the pages the amount of the “squares” will be added.

Marking up for flexible sewing needs requires care and judgment, as it determines where the bands will be placed on the back of the bound book. Most books look best with five bands, but very large, thinner folios might have six, and a very small, thick book might look better with four. Generally, five is the ideal number. When marking up trimmed sheets for flexible sewing, divide the length of the back from the head into six sections, five equal ones and one at the tail that is slightly longer. From these points, strong pencil lines should be drawn across the back using a carpenter’s square as a guide. The book should have been previously stacked between pressing boards and positioned in the lying press. It’s crucial that the head is perfectly square; otherwise, the bands will appear to slope when the book is bound. For a book that will be cut and gilded in boards, it’s necessary to decide in advance how much will be cut off, making sure to allow for it; otherwise, the head and tail divisions of the back will end up too small after cutting. It's also important to remember that the height of the pages will add to the amount of the “squares.”

About a quarter of an inch from either end of the back of a trimmed book, and a little more in the case of one that is to be cut in boards, a mark should be made for the “kettle” or “catch” stitch. This may be slightly sawn in, but before using the saw, the end papers are removed. If these were sawn, the holes would show in the joint when the ends are pasted down.

About a quarter of an inch from either end of the back of a trimmed book, and a little more if the book is going to be cut in boards, you should make a mark for the “kettle” or “catch” stitch. This can be slightly sawed in, but before using the saw, the end papers should be removed. If these were sawed, the holes would be visible in the joint when the ends are pasted down.

If the book is to be sewn on double[100] cords, or on slips of vellum or tape, two lines will be necessary for each band.

If the book is going to be sewn on double[100] cords, or on slips of vellum or tape, two lines will be needed for each band.

It has become the custom to saw in the backs of books, and to sink the bands into the saw cuts, using “hollow backs,” and putting false bands to appear when bound. This is a degenerate form, to which is due much of the want of durability of modern bindings. If the bands are not to show on the back, it is better to sew on tapes or strips of vellum than to use sawn-in string bands.

It's now common practice to cut into the backs of books and set the bands into those cuts, using "hollow backs," and adding fake bands to give the appearance of being bound. This is a decline in quality, which contributes to the lack of durability in modern bindings. If the bands aren't meant to be visible on the back, it's better to sew on tapes or strips of vellum rather than rely on cut-in string bands.

SEWING

The sewing-frame need by bookbinders is practically the same now as is shown in prints of the early sixteenth century, and probably dates from still earlier times. It consists of a bed with two uprights and a crossbar, which can be heightened or lowered by the turning of wooden nuts working on a screw thread cut in the uprights (see fig. 29).

The sewing frame used by bookbinders today is practically the same as those illustrated in prints from the early sixteenth century and likely goes back even further. It features a base with two vertical posts and a crossbar, which can be raised or lowered by turning wooden knobs that operate on a screw thread attached to the posts (see fig. 29).

To set up for sewing, as many loops of cord, called “lay cords,” as there are to be bands, are threaded on to the cross piece, and to these, by a simple knot, shown at fig. 28, cords are fastened to form the bands. The “lay cords[101]” can be used again and again until worn out.

To prepare for sewing, thread on as many loops of cord, known as “lay cords,” as there are bands to be made onto the cross piece. Then, using a simple knot shown at fig. 28, attach cords to these to create the bands. The “lay cords[101]” can be reused multiple times until they wear out.

Fig. 28.

Fig. 28.

Fig. 28.

To fasten the cord below, a key is[102] taken (see fig. 28) and held below the press by the right hand; the cord is then pulled up round it by the left, and held in position on the key by the first finger of the right hand. The key is then turned over, winding up a little of the string, and the prongs slipped over the main cord. It is then put through the slit in the bed of the sewing-press, with the prongs away from the front. The cord is then cut off, and the same operation repeated for each band. When all the bands have been set up, the book is laid against them, and they are moved to correspond with the marks previously made on the back of the book, care being taken that they are quite perpendicular. If they are of the same length and evenly set up, on screwing up the crossbar they should all tighten equally.

To secure the cord below, take a key[102] (see fig. 28) and hold it below the press with your right hand; then pull the cord up around it with your left hand, keeping it in place on the key with the index finger of your right hand. Next, flip the key over to wind up a bit of the string, and slide the prongs over the main cord. Then, feed it through the slit in the bed of the sewing press, making sure the prongs are facing away from the front. Cut the cord, and repeat this process for each band. Once all the bands are in place, lay the book against them and adjust them according to the marks made previously on the book's spine, ensuring they're perfectly vertical. If they’re all the same length and evenly spaced, tightening the crossbar should pull them all in evenly.

It will be found to be convenient to set up the cords as far to the right hand of the press as possible, as then there will be room for the sewer’s left arm on the inner side of the left hand upright.

It will be helpful to set up the cords as far to the right side of the press as possible, as that will create space for the sewer's left arm on the inner side of the left upright.

A roll of paper that will exactly fill the slot in the sewing-frame is pushed in in front of the upright cords to steady[103] them and ensure that they are all in the same plane.

A roll of paper that perfectly fits the slot in the sewing frame is pushed in front of the upright cords to support them and make sure they’re all aligned.[103]

When the sewing-frame is ready, with the cords set up and adjusted, the book must be collated to make sure that neither sheets nor plates have been lost or misplaced during the previous operations. Plates need special care to see that the guards go properly round the sheets next them.

When the sewing frame is ready, with the cords set up and adjusted, the book must be collated to ensure that no sheets or plates have been lost or misplaced during the previous steps. Plates require special attention to make sure that the guards properly wrap around the sheets next to them.

Fig. 29.

Fig. 29.

Fig. 29.

The top back corner, on front and back waste end paper, should be marked. When this has been done, and all is found to be in order, the book is laid on a pressing-board behind the sewing-frame, the fore-edge towards the sewer, and the front end paper uppermost. As it is difficult to insert the needle into a section placed on the bed of the sewing-frame, it will be found convenient to sew upon a largish pressing-board, which will lie on the bed of the frame, and may have small catches to prevent it from shifting. When the board is in place, the first section (end paper) is taken in the left hand and turned over, so that the marks on the back come in the proper places against the strings. The left hand is inserted into the place where the sewing is to be,[104] and with the right hand a needle and thread is passed through the kettle stitch[105] mark (see fig. 29). It is grasped by the fingers of the left hand, is passed out through the back at the first mark on the left-hand side of the first upright cord, and pulled tight, leaving a loose end of thread at the kettle stitch. Then with the right hand it is inserted again in the same place, but from the other side of the cord, and so on round all five bands, and out again at the kettle stitch mark at the tail, using right and left hands alternately. The centre of the next section is then found, and it is sewn in the same way from tail to head, the thread being tied to the loose end hanging from the first kettle stitch. Another section is laid on and sewn, but when the kettle stitch is reached, the under thread is caught up in the way shown in fig. 30. These operations are repeated throughout the whole book. If the back seems likely to swell too much, the sections can[106] be lightly tapped down with a loaded stick made for the purpose, care being taken not to drive the sections inwards, as it is difficult to get such sections out again. When all the sheets and the last end paper have been sewn on, a double catch stitch is made, and the end cut off. This method is known as flexible sewing “all along.”

The top back corner of the front and back end papers should be marked. Once that's done and everything looks good, the book is placed on a pressing board behind the sewing frame, with the fore-edge facing the sewer and the front end paper on top. Since it's tricky to put the needle into a section that's on the sewing frame bed, using a larger pressing board that sits on the frame's bed can be really helpful, and it might have small catches to keep it in place. Once the board is set up, take the first section (the end paper) with your left hand and flip it over so the marks on the back align correctly with the strings. Insert your left hand into the spot where you're going to sew, and with your right hand, pass a needle and thread through the kettle stitch mark (see fig. 29). Grasp it with your left fingers, pull it out through the back at the first mark on the left side of the first upright cord, and tighten it, leaving a loose thread at the kettle stitch. Then, using your right hand, insert the needle again in the same spot but from the opposite side of the cord, and continue this for all five bands, going out again at the kettle stitch mark at the tail, alternating hands. Next, find the center of the next section and sew it in the same manner from tail to head, tying the thread to the loose end hanging from the first kettle stitch. Lay another section on top and sew it, but when you get to the kettle stitch, catch the under thread as shown in fig. 30. Repeat this process for the entire book. If the back seems like it might swell too much, lightly tap down the sections with a weighted stick designed for that purpose, being careful not to push the sections in too far, as it's tough to pull those back out. After all the sheets and the last end paper have been sewn on, do a double catch stitch and cut the end off. This method is known as flexible sewing “all along.”

Fig. 30.

Fig. 30.

Fig. 30.

Fig. 31.

Fig. 31.

Fig. 31.

When one needle full of thread is exhausted, another is tied on, making practically a continuous length of thread going all along each section and round every band. The weaver’s knot is the best for joining the lengths of thread. A simple way of tying it is shown at fig. 31. A simple slip knot is made in the end of the new thread and put over the end of the old, and, on being pulled tight, the old thread should slip through, as shewn at B. The convenience of this knot is, that by its use a firm attachment can be made quite close up to the back of the[107] book. This is a great advantage, as if the knot is made at some distance from the back, it will have to be dragged through the section two or three times, instead of only once. The knot, after having been made, must be pulled inside the section, and remain there. Considerable judgment is required in sewing. If a book is sewn too loosely, it is almost impossible to bind it firmly; and if too tightly, especially if the kettle stitches have been drawn too tight, the thread may break in “backing,” and the book have to be resewn.

When one needle full of thread runs out, another is tied on, creating a nearly continuous length of thread going through each section and around every band. The weaver's knot is the best for joining the lengths of thread. A simple way to tie it is shown at fig. 31. Make a simple slip knot at the end of the new thread and place it over the end of the old thread; when pulled tight, the old thread should slip through, as shown at B. The advantage of this knot is that it allows for a strong connection close to the back of the[107] book. This is important because if the knot is tied too far from the back, it will need to be pulled through the section two or three times instead of just once. After the knot is tied, it must be pulled inside the section and left there. Some skill is necessary in sewing. If a book is sewn too loosely, it will be nearly impossible to bind it tightly; and if sewn too tightly, especially if the kettle stitches are pulled too hard, the thread may break during backing, and the book will need to be resewn.

One way to avoid having too much swelling in the back of a book consisting of a great many very thin sections is to sew “two sheets on.” In this form of sewing two sections at a time are laid on the sewing-frame. The thread is inserted at the “kettle stitch” of the lower section, and brought out as usual at the first cord, but instead of being reinserted into the lower section, it is passed into the upper one, and so on, alternately passing into the upper and lower sections. This will give, if there are five bands, three stitches in each section instead of six, as there would be if the sewing were “all[108] along,” lessening the thread, consequently the swelling by half. It is usual to sew the first and last few sections “all along.”

One way to avoid having too much swelling in the back of a book made up of many very thin sections is to sew “two sheets on.” In this method, two sections at a time are placed on the sewing frame. The thread is inserted at the “kettle stitch” of the lower section and brought out as usual at the first cord, but instead of being reinserted into the lower section, it is passed into the upper one, and so on, alternating between the upper and lower sections. This will result in, if there are five bands, three stitches in each section instead of six, which would happen if the sewing were “all along,” reducing the amount of thread and therefore the swelling by half. It’s common to sew the first and last few sections “all along.”

The common method of sewing is to make saw cuts in the back, in which thin cords can be sunk, and the thread merely passes behind them and not round them, as in flexible sewing. This method, although very quick and cheap, is not to be recommended, on account of the injury done to the backs of the sections by the saw, and because the glue running into the saw cuts is apt to make the back stiff, and to prevent the book from opening right to the back. Indeed, were a sawn-in book to open right to the back, as it is expected a flexibly-sewn book will do, showing the sewing along the centre of each section, the saw marks with the band inserted would show, and be a serious disfigurement.

The usual way of sewing is to make saw cuts in the back, where thin cords can be placed, and the thread just goes behind them instead of wrapping around, like in flexible sewing. This method, while fast and cheap, isn’t recommended because it damages the backs of the sections from the saw, and the glue that seeps into the cuts can make the back stiff, preventing the book from opening all the way. In fact, if a sawn-in book were to open completely like a flexibly-sewn book should, revealing the sewing in the center of each section, the saw marks along with the inserted band would be visible and would be quite unsightly.

Fig. 32.

Fig. 32.

Fig. 32.

Fig. 33.

Fig. 33.

Fig. 33.

Mediæval books were usually sewn on double cords or strips of leather, and the headband was often sewn at the same time, as shown at fig. 32, A. This is an excellent method for very large books with heavy sections, and is specially suitable for large vellum manuscripts, in many of which the sections are very thick. An[109] advantage of this method is, that the twist round the double cord virtually makes a knot at every band, and should a thread at any place break, there is no danger of the rest of the thread coming loose. This is the only mode of sewing by which a thread runs absolutely from end to end of the sections. The headband sewn at the same time, and so tied down in every section, is firmer and stronger than if worked on in the way now usual. In the fifteenth century it was the custom to lace the ends of the headbands into the boards in the same way as the other bands. This method, while giving additional strength at the head and tail, and avoiding the somewhat unfinished look of the cut-off ends of the modern headband, is, on the whole, of doubtful advantage, as it is necessary to cut the “turn in” at the point where strength in the leather is much wanted.

Mediæval books were typically sewn on double cords or strips of leather, and the headband was often sewn on at the same time, as shown at fig. 32, A. This is a great method for very large books with heavy sections and is especially suitable for large vellum manuscripts, many of which have very thick sections. An[109] advantage of this method is that the twist around the double cord essentially creates a knot at every band, so if a thread breaks somewhere, there's no risk of the rest of the thread coming loose. This is the only sewing method that runs a thread completely from end to end of the sections. The headband sewn at the same time and secured in every section is sturdier and stronger than if it were done using the current usual method. In the fifteenth century, it was common to lace the ends of the headbands into the boards just like the other bands. While this method provides extra strength at the head and tail and avoids the somewhat unfinished look of the cut-off ends of modern headbands, it is generally of questionable benefit, as it requires cutting the “turn in” at the point where strength in the leather is most needed.

At fig. 32 is shown in section the three methods of sewing mentioned. A is the old sewing round double bands; with the[110] headbands worked at the same time with the same thread; B is the modern flexible sewing, and C the common sawn-in method.

At fig. 32 in this section, the three sewing methods mentioned are shown. A is the traditional method of sewing around double bands, with the[110] headbands done at the same time using the same thread; B is the modern flexible sewing method, and C is the standard sewn-in method.

Books that are very thin or are to be[111] bound in vellum, are best sewn on tapes or vellum slips. The easiest way to set up the sewing-frame for such sewing is to sling a piece of wood through two of the lay cords, and to pin one end of the vellum or tape band round this, pull the other end tight, and secure it with a drawing-pin underneath the frame. The sewing, in the case of such flat bands, would not go round, but only across them. To avoid undue looseness, every three or four threads may be caught up at the back of the band, as shown in fig. 33.

Books that are very thin or meant to be[111] bound in vellum are best sewn on tapes or vellum slips. The easiest way to set up the sewing frame for this type of sewing is to place a piece of wood through two of the lay cords and pin one end of the vellum or tape band around it. Pull the other end tight and secure it with a drawing pin underneath the frame. The sewing, with these flat bands, won't go around but only across them. To prevent any excessive looseness, every three or four threads can be caught up at the back of the band, as shown in fig. 33.

MATERIALS FOR SEWING

The cord used should be of the best hemp, specially made with only two strands of very long fibres to facilitate fraying out. For very large books where a double cord is to be used, the best water line will be[112] found to answer, care being taken to select that which can be frayed out. If tape is used it should be unbleached, such as the sailmakers use. Thread should also be unbleached, as the unnecessary bleaching of most bookbinder’s sewing-thread seems to cause it to rot in a comparatively short time. Silk of the best quality is better than any thread. The ligature silk, undyed, as used by surgeons, is perhaps the strongest material, and can be had in various thicknesses. It is impossible to pay too great attention to the selection of sewing materials, as the permanency of the binding depends on their durability. The rebinding of valuable books is at best a necessary evil, and anything that makes frequent rebinding necessary, is not only objectionable on account of the cost involved, but because it seriously shortens the life of the book.

The cord used should be the best quality hemp, specially made with only two long strands to make fraying easier. For very large books where a double cord will be used, the best water line will be[112]found to work well, making sure to choose one that can be frayed out. If tape is used, it should be unbleached, like what sailmakers use. Thread should also be unbleached, since the unnecessary bleaching of most bookbinder's sewing thread tends to make it rot in a relatively short time. High-quality silk is better than any thread. The undyed ligature silk, like what surgeons use, is probably the strongest material and comes in different thicknesses. It's crucial to pay close attention to the choice of sewing materials since the durability of the binding relies on them. Rebinding valuable books is at best a necessary hassle, and anything that leads to frequent rebinding is not only a cost concern but can also significantly shorten the book's lifespan.

Experience is required to judge what thickness of thread to use for any given book. If the sections are very thin, a thin thread must be used, or the “swelling” of the back caused by the additional thickness of the thread in that part will be excessive, and make the book unmanageable in “backing.” On the other hand,[113] if the sections are large, and a too thin thread is used, there will not be enough swelling to make a firm “joint.” Broadly speaking, when there are a great many very thin sections, the thinnest thread may be used; and coarser thread may be used when the sections are thicker, or fewer in number. In the case of large manuscripts on vellum it is best to use very thick silk, or even catgut. Vellum is so tough and durable, that any binding of a vellum book should be made as if it were expected to last for hundreds of years.

Experience is needed to determine the right thickness of thread for any book. If the sections are very thin, a thin thread should be used; otherwise, the “swelling” of the spine from the extra thickness of the thread will be too much, making the book difficult to manage during “backing.” On the other hand,[113] if the sections are large and a thread that’s too thin is used, there won’t be enough swelling to create a strong “joint.” Generally, when there are many very thin sections, the thinnest thread can be used; and a thicker thread can be used when the sections are thicker or fewer in number. For large manuscripts on vellum, it’s best to use very thick silk or even catgut. Vellum is so tough and durable that any binding of a vellum book should be done as if it’s meant to last for hundreds of years.

In selecting the thickness of cord for a book, some judgment is required. On an old book the bands are best made rather prominent by the use of thick cord, but the exact thickness to be used is a matter for taste and experience to decide.

In choosing the thickness of cord for a book, some judgment is needed. For an old book, it's best to make the bands stand out using thick cord, but the exact thickness to use depends on personal taste and experience.

A very thick band on a small book is clumsy, while a very thin band on the back of a heavy book suggests weakness, and is therefore unsightly.

A very thick band on a small book looks awkward, while a very thin band on the back of a heavy book implies weakness, making it unappealing.

In bindings of early printed books and manuscripts an appearance of great strength is better than extreme neatness.

In early printed books and manuscripts, looking strong and well-made is more important than being perfectly neat.

When the sewing is completed, the cords are cut off close to the lay cords, and then[114] the keys will be loose enough to be easily removed. The knots remaining on the lay bands are removed, and the keys slung through one of them.

When the sewing is done, the cords are cut close to the lay cords, and then[114] the keys will be loose enough to take out easily. The knots left on the lay bands are taken off, and the keys are threaded through one of them.

CHAPTER VIII

Fraying out Slips—Glueing up—Rounding and Backing

Fraying out slips—Gluing up—Rounding and backing

FRAYING OUT SLIPS AND GLUEING UP

After sewing, the book should be looked through to see that all sheets and plates have been caught by the thread, and special attention should be given to end papers to see that the sewing lies evenly.

After sewing, the book should be checked to ensure that all sheets and plates are securely attached by the thread, and special attention should be paid to the end papers to make sure the sewing is even.

The ends of the cords should next be cut off to within about two inches of the book on each side, and the free portions frayed out. If proper sewing cord is used, this will be found to be very easily done, if a binder’s bodkin is first inserted between the two strands, separating them, and then again in the centre of each separated strand to still further straighten the fibres (see fig. 34).

The ends of the cords should be trimmed to about two inches from the book on each side, and the loose ends should be frayed out. If you use the right kind of sewing cord, this will be quite easy to do. Begin by inserting a binder’s bodkin between the two strands to separate them, and then insert it again in the center of each separated strand to straighten the fibers even more (see fig. 34).

The fraying out of the thick cord recommended[115] for heavy books is a more difficult operation, but with a little trouble the fibres of any good cord can be frayed out. Vellum or tape bands will only require cutting off, leaving about two inches free on each side. The free parts of the bands are called slips.

The fraying of the thick cord suggested[115] for heavy books is a bit trickier, but with some effort, the fibers of any decent cord can be frayed. Vellum or tape bands just need to be cut off, leaving about two inches free on each side. The free ends of the bands are called slips.

Fig. 34.

Fig. 34.

Fig. 34.

The book is now ready for glueing up. A piece of waste mill-board or an old cloth cover is put on each side over the slips, and the book knocked up squarely at the back and head. Then it is lowered into the lying press and screwed up, leaving the back with the protecting boards projecting about three-quarters of an inch. If the back has too much swelling in it or is spongy, it is better to leave the slips on one side free and to pull them as tight as possible while the book is held in the press, or a knocking-down iron may be placed on one side of the projecting back and the other side tapped with the backing hammer to make the sections lie close to one another, and then the slips pulled straight (fig. 35). The back must[116] now be glued. The glue for this operation must be hot, and not too thick. It is very important that it should be worked well between the sections with the brush, and it is well after it has been applied to rub the back with a finger or folder to make quite sure that the glue goes between every section for its entire length. If the book is too tightly screwed up in the press, the glue is apt to remain too much on the surface; and if not tightly enough, it may penetrate too deeply between the sections. If the glue is thick, or stringy, it may be diluted with hot water and the glue-brush rapidly spun[117] round in the glue-pot to break it up and to make it work freely.

The book is now ready to be glued together. A piece of scrap board or an old cloth cover is placed on each side over the slips, and the book is knocked squarely at the back and head. Then it is lowered into the lying press and tightened, leaving the back with the protective boards sticking out about three-quarters of an inch. If the back is too swollen or feels spongy, it's better to leave the slips on one side loose and pull them as tight as possible while the book is held in the press, or a knocking-down iron can be placed on one side of the protruding back and the other side tapped with a backing hammer to ensure the sections sit closely together, and then the slips are pulled straight (fig. 35). The back now needs to be glued. The glue for this step should be hot and not too thick. It’s crucial to work it well between the sections with a brush, and after applying it, rubbing the back with a finger or folder ensures that the glue gets between each section for its entire length. If the book is tight in the press, the glue may stay too much on the surface; if it’s not tight enough, it might soak in too deep between the sections. If the glue is thick or stringy, it can be thinned with hot water, and the glue brush can be quickly spun around in the glue pot to break it up and make it work smoothly.

Fig. 35.

Fig. 35.

Fig. 35.

Very great care is needed to see that the head of a previously trimmed book is knocked up exactly square before the back is glued, for if it is not, it will be very difficult to get it even afterwards.

Very careful attention is needed to ensure that the top of a previously trimmed book is perfectly square before the spine is glued, because if it isn’t, it will be very hard to make it even later on.

ROUNDING AND BACKING

The amount of rounding on the back of a book should be determined by the necessities of the case; that is to say, a back that has, through guarding, or excess of sewing, a tendency to be round, is best not forced to be flat, and a back that would naturally be flat, is best not forced to be unduly round. A very round back is objectionable where it can be avoided, because it takes up so much of the back margins of the sheets, and is apt to make the book stiff in opening. On the other hand, a back that is quite flat has to be lined up stiffly, or it may become concave with use.

The amount of rounding on the spine of a book should depend on the specific situation. In other words, if the spine naturally has a tendency to be rounded due to protection or excessive sewing, it shouldn't be forced to lie flat. Conversely, if the spine would normally be flat, it shouldn't be pushed to be overly rounded. A very rounded spine should be avoided when possible because it takes up a lot of the back margins of the pages and can make the book hard to open. On the flip side, a completely flat spine needs to be set firmly, or it could start to curve inward over time.

Fig. 36.

Fig. 36.

Fig. 36.

The method of rounding is to place the book with the back projecting a little over the edge of the press or table, then to draw the back over towards the workman,[118] and, while in this position, to tap it carefully with a hammer (see fig. 36). This is repeated on the other side of the book, and, if properly done, will give the back an even, convex form that should be in section, a portion of a circle. Rounding and backing are best done after the glue has ceased to be tacky, but before it has set hard.[119]

The process of rounding involves positioning the book so that the spine slightly extends beyond the edge of the press or table. Then, pull the spine towards the worker,[118] and while in this position, gently tap it with a hammer (see fig. 36). This should be done on the other side of the book as well, and if done correctly, it will shape the spine into an even, curved form that resembles a portion of a circle. Rounding and backing are best performed after the glue is no longer sticky but before it has completely hardened.[119]

Fig. 37.

Fig. 37.

Fig. 37.

Backing is perhaps the most difficult and important operation in forwarding. The sewing threads in the back cause that part to be thicker than the rest of the book. Thus in a book with twenty sections there will be in the back, in addition to the thickness of the paper, twenty thicknesses of thread.

Backing is probably the most challenging and crucial step in binding. The sewing threads at the back make that part thicker than the rest of the book. Therefore, in a book with twenty sections, there will be, in addition to the thickness of the paper, twenty layers of thread at the back.

If the boards were laced on to the book without rounding or backing, and the book were pressed, the additional thickness of the back, having to go somewhere, would cause it to go either convex or concave, or else perhaps to crease up[120] (see fig. 37). The object of rounding is to control the distribution of this swelling, and to make the back take an even and permanently convex form.

If the boards were attached to the book without rounding or backing, and the book was pressed, the extra thickness of the spine would have to go somewhere, causing it to either bulge out or dip in, or maybe even crease up[120] (see fig. 37). The purpose of rounding is to manage the distribution of this swelling and to shape the spine into a smooth, consistently rounded form.

Fig. 38.

Fig. 38.

Fig. 38.

If the boards were merely laced on after rounding, there would be a gap between the square ends of the board and the edge of the back (see fig. 38), though the convexity and even curve of the back would be to some extent assured. What is done in backing is to make a groove, into which the edges of the board will fit neatly, and to hammer the backs of the sections over one another from the centre outwards on both sides to form the “groove,” to ensure that the back shall return to the same form after the book has been opened.

If the boards were just laid on after rounding, there would be a gap between the square ends of the board and the edge of the back (see fig. 38), although the curve and smooth shape of the back would be somewhat guaranteed. In backing, what is done is creating a groove where the edges of the board will fit perfectly, and then hammering the backs of the sections over each other from the center outwards on both sides to form the “groove,” ensuring that the back returns to the same shape after the book is opened.

Fig. 39.

Fig. 39.

Fig. 39.

To back the book, backing boards are placed on each side (leaving the slips outside) a short distance below the edge of the back (fig. 39). The amount to leave here must be decided by the thickness of the boards to be used. When the backing[121] boards are in position, the book and boards must be carefully lowered into the lying press and screwed up very tight, great care being taken to see that the boards do not slip, and that the book is put in evenly. Even the most experienced forwarder will sometimes have to take a book out of the press two or three times before he gets it in quite evenly and without allowing the boards to slip. Unless the back has a perfectly even curve when put in the press for backing, no amount of subsequent hammering will put it permanently right.

To support the book, backing boards are placed on either side (with the slips left outside) a short distance below the edge of the back (fig. 39). The space to leave here depends on the thickness of the boards being used. Once the backing[121] boards are in place, the book and boards must be carefully lowered into the lying press and tightened securely, taking great care to ensure that the boards do not shift and that the book is inserted evenly. Even the most skilled binder may need to take the book out of the press two or three times to align it perfectly and prevent the boards from moving. If the back doesn’t have a completely even curve when inserted into the press for backing, no amount of later hammering will fix it permanently.

Fig. 40.

Fig. 40.

Fig. 40.

Fig. 41.

Fig. 41.

Fig. 41.

The backs of the sections should be evenly fanned out one over the other from the centre outwards on both sides.[122] This is done by side strokes of the hammer, in fact by a sort of “riveting” blow, and not by a directly crushing blow (see fig. 41, in which the arrows show the direction of the hammer strokes). If the sections are not evenly fanned out from the centre, but are either zigzagged by being crushed by direct blows of the hammer, as shown in fig. 42, A, or are unevenly fanned over more to one side than the other, as shown in fig. 42, B, the back, although it may be even enough when first done, will probably become uneven[123] with use. A book in which the sections have been crushed down, as at fig. 42, A, will be disfigured inside by creases in the paper.

The backs of the sections should be evenly fanned out from the center to both sides.[122] This is done using side strokes of the hammer, like a “riveting” blow, not a direct crushing blow (see fig. 41, where the arrows indicate the direction of the hammer strokes). If the sections aren't evenly fanned out from the center, but instead are zigzagged from being crushed by direct blows of the hammer, as shown in fig. 42, A, or are unevenly fanned more to one side than the other, as shown in fig. 42, B, the back, although it may look even at first, will likely become uneven[123] with use. A book where the sections have been crushed down, like at fig. 42, A, will end up with creases in the paper on the inside.

Fig. 42.

Fig. 42.

Fig. 42.

Fig. 43.

Fig. 43.

Fig. 43.

Fig. 44.

Fig. 44.

Fig. 44.

It is a mistake to suppose that a very[124] heavy hammer is necessary for backing any but the largest books. For flexible books a hammer with a comparatively small face should be used, as by its use the book can be backed without flattening the bands. It is well to have a hammer head of the shape shown in fig. 43. By using the thin end, the force of a comparatively light blow, because concentrated on a small surface, is effective.

It’s a mistake to think that a really heavy hammer is needed for binding all but the largest books. For flexible books, you should use a hammer with a relatively small face, as this allows you to bind the book without flattening the bands. It’s good to have a hammer head shaped like the one shown in fig. 43. By using the thin end, a light blow becomes effective because the force is concentrated on a small surface.

At fig. 44 is shown an ordinary backing hammer.

At fig. 44 is shown a regular backing hammer.

CHAPTER IX

Cutting and Attaching Boards—Cleaning off Back—Pressing

Cutting and Attaching Boards—Cleaning off the Back—Pressing

CUTTING AND ATTACHING BOARDS

The first quality of the best black board made from old rope is the best to use for “extra” binding. It will be found to be very hard, and not easily broken or bent at the corners. In selecting the thickness suitable for any given book, the size and thickness of the volume should be taken into account. The tendency of most modern binders is to use a rather[125] over thick board, perhaps with a view to bulk out the volume. For manuscripts, or other books on vellum, it is best to use wooden boards, which should be clasped. From their stability they form a kind of permanent press, in which the vellum leaves are kept flat. In a damp climate like that of England, vellum, absorbing moisture from the atmosphere, soon cockles up unless it is held tightly in some way; and when it is once cockled, the book cannot be made to shut properly, except with very special treatment. Then also dust and damp have ready access to the interstices of the crinkled pages, resulting in the disfigurement so well known and so deplored by all lovers of fine books.

The first quality of the best black board made from old rope is the best choice for “extra” binding. It is very sturdy and not easily broken or bent at the corners. When selecting the thickness suitable for a specific book, consider the size and thickness of the volume. Most modern binders tend to use a relatively[125] thick board, possibly to add bulk to the volume. For manuscripts or other books on vellum, it's better to use wooden boards, which should be clasped. Their stability creates a kind of permanent press that keeps the vellum pages flat. In a damp climate like England, vellum absorbs moisture from the air and quickly becomes rippled unless it is held tightly. Once it’s rippled, the book won’t shut properly without special treatment. Additionally, dust and dampness can easily get into the gaps of the crinkled pages, causing the damage that is well known and lamented by all lovers of fine books.

For large books a “made” board, that is, two boards pasted together, is better than a single board of the same thickness. In making boards a thin and a thick board should be pasted together, the thin board to go nearest the book. It will not be necessary to put a double lining on the inside of such boards, as a thin board will always draw a thick one.

For large books, a “made” board, meaning two boards glued together, is better than a single board of the same thickness. When making boards, a thin board and a thick board should be glued together, with the thin board placed closest to the book. There's no need to add a double lining on the inside of these boards since a thin board will always support a thick one.

Fig. 45.

Fig. 45.

Fig. 45.

If mill-boards are used they are first cut roughly to size with the mill-board[126] shears, screwed up in the “lying” press. The straight arm of the shears is the one to fix in the press, for if the bent arm be undermost, the knuckles are apt to be severely bruised against the end. A better way of fixing the shears is shown at fig. 45. Any blacksmith will bend the arm of the shears and make the necessary clips. This method saves trouble and considerable[127] wear and tear to the “lying” press. Where a great many boards are needed, they may be quickly cut in a board machine, but for “extra” work they should be further trimmed in the plough, in the same way as those cut by the shears. After the boards have been roughly cut to size, they should have one edge cut straight with the plough. To do this one or two pairs of boards are knocked up to the back and inserted in the cutting side of the press, with those edges projecting which are to be cut off, and behind them, as a “cut against,” a board protected by a waste piece of mill-board.

If mill boards are used, they are first cut roughly to size with the mill board[126] shears and then secured in the “lying” press. The straight arm of the shears needs to be fixed in the press; if the bent arm is underneath, it can easily bruise your knuckles against the end. A better way to secure the shears is shown at fig. 45. Any blacksmith can bend the arm of the shears and make the necessary clips. This method reduces hassle and prevents significant[127] wear and tear on the “lying” press. When a large number of boards are needed, they can be quickly cut in a board machine, but for “extra” work, they should be trimmed further in the plough, just like those cut by the shears. After the boards have been roughly cut to size, one edge should be straightened out with the plough. To do this, a pair of boards is placed at the back and inserted into the cutting side of the press, with the edges to be cut off projecting, and behind them, a board is protected by a waste piece of mill board as a “cut against.”

The plough, held by the screw and handle, and guided by the runners on the press, is moved backwards and forwards. A slight turn of the screw at each movement brings the knife forward. In cutting mill-boards which are very hard, the screw should be turned very little each time. If press and plough are in proper order, that part of the board which projects above the cheek of the press should be cut off, leaving the edges perfectly square and straight. If the edge of the press has been damaged, or is out of “truth,” a[128] cutting board may be used between the cheek of the press and the board to be cut, making a true edge for the knife to run on.

The plow, held by the screw and handle, and guided by the runners on the press, is moved back and forth. A slight turn of the screw with each movement brings the knife forward. When cutting very hard millboards, the screw should only be turned a little each time. If the press and plow are in proper condition, the part of the board that sticks out above the cheek of the press should be cut off, leaving the edges perfectly square and straight. If the edge of the press is damaged or not aligned properly, a[128] cutting board can be placed between the cheek of the press and the board being cut to create a true edge for the knife to follow.

Fig. 46.—Lying or Cutting Press

Fig. 46.—Lying or Cutting Press

Fig. 46.—Press for Lying or Cutting

The position of the plough on the press[129] is shown at fig. 46. The side of the press with runners should be reserved for cutting, the other side used for all other work.

The position of the plow on the press[129] is shown at fig. 46. The side of the press with runners should be kept for cutting, while the other side is for all other work.

Fig. 47.

Fig. 47.

Fig. 47.

The plough knife for mill-boards should not be ground at too acute an angle, or the edge will most likely break away at the first cut. The shape shown at fig. 47 is suitable. The knife should be very frequently ground, as it soon gets blunt, which adds greatly to the labour of cutting.

The plough knife for millboards shouldn’t be sharpened at too sharp an angle, or the edge will probably break off with the first cut. The shape shown at fig. 47 is suitable. The knife should be sharpened frequently, as it becomes dull quickly, which significantly increases the effort required for cutting.

After an edge has been cut, each side should be well rubbed with a folder to smooth down any burr left by the plough knife. Then a piece of common paper with one edge cut straight is pasted on to one side of the board, with the straight edge exactly up to the cut edge of the board. Then a piece of paper large enough to cover both sides of the board is pasted round it, and well rubbed down at the cut edge. After having been lined, the boards are nipped in the press to ensure that the lining paper shall stick.[130] They are stood up to dry, with the doubly lined side outwards. The double paper is intended to warp the board slightly to that side, to compensate for the pull of the leather when the book is covered. If the board is a double one, a single lining paper will be sufficient, the thinner board helping to draw the thicker. The paste for lining boards must be fairly thin, and very well beaten up so as to be free from lumps. It is of the utmost importance that the lining papers should stick properly, for unless they stick, no subsequent covering of leather or paper can be made to lie flat.

Once an edge has been cut, each side should be smoothed with a folder to eliminate any burr left by the plough knife. Then, a piece of ordinary paper with one edge cut straight is glued onto one side of the board, aligning the straight edge with the cut edge of the board. Next, a piece of paper large enough to cover both sides of the board is wrapped around it and smoothed down at the cut edge. After lining, the boards are pressed to make sure the lining paper adheres properly.[130] They are then set up to dry, with the doubly lined side facing outward. The double paper is meant to slightly warp the board to that side, balancing the tension of the leather when the book is covered. If the board is a double one, a single lining paper will suffice, as the thinner board helps pull the thicker one. The paste used for lining boards should be fairly thin and well mixed to avoid lumps. It’s crucial that the lining papers adhere properly because if they don’t, no later covering of leather or paper will lie flat.

When the lined boards are quite dry, they should be paired with the doubly lined sides together, and the top back corner marked to correspond with the marks on the top back corners of the book. Then near the top edge, with the aid of a carpenter’s square, two points are marked in a line at right angles to the cut edge. The pair of boards is then knocked up to the back and lowered into the press as before, so that the plough knife will exactly cut through the points. The same operation is repeated on the two remaining uncut edges. In marking out[131] those for the fore-edge, the measurement is taken with a pair of compasses (fig. 48) from the joint of the book to the fore-edge of the first section. If the book has been trimmed, or is to remain uncut, a little more must be allowed for the “squares,” and if it is to be cut in the plough, it must be now decided how much is to be cut off, remembering that it is much better to have the boards a little too large, and so have to reduce them after the book is cut, than to have them too small, and either be obliged to get out a new pair of boards, or unduly cut down the book.

When the lined boards are completely dry, they should be paired with the doubly lined sides facing each other, and the top back corner marked to match the marks on the top back corners of the book. Then, near the top edge, using a carpenter’s square, mark two points in a straight line perpendicular to the cut edge. The pair of boards is then tapped to the back and lowered into the press as before, so that the plough knife will accurately cut through the marked points. This same process is repeated on the other two uncut edges. For marking out those for the fore-edge, the measurement is taken with a pair of compasses (fig. 48) from the joint of the book to the fore-edge of the first section. If the book has been trimmed, or is to remain uncut, a little extra should be allowed for the "squares," and if it’s to be cut with the plough, you need to decide now how much to cut off, keeping in mind that it is much better to have the boards slightly larger and trim them down after the book is cut than to have them too small, which would require getting a new pair of boards or cutting down the book too much.

Fig. 48.

Fig. 48.

Fig. 48.

Fig. 49.

Fig. 49.

Fig. 49.

The height of the boards for a book that has been trimmed, or is to remain uncut, will be the height of the page with a small allowance at each end for the squares. When a pair of boards has been cut all round, it can be tested for squareness by reversing one board, when any inequality that there may be will appear doubled. If the boards are out of truth[132] they should generally be put on one side, to be used for a smaller book, and new boards got out. To correct a badly cut pair of boards, it is necessary to reduce them in size, and the book consequently suffers in proportion. If the boards have been found to be truly cut, they are laid on the book, and the position of the slips marked on them by lines at right angles to the back. A line is then made parallel to the back, about half an inch in (see fig. 49). At the points where the lines cross, a series of holes is punched from the front with a binder’s bodkin on a lead plate, then the board is turned over, and a second series is punched from the back about half an inch from the first. If the groove of the back is shallower than the thickness of the board, the top back edge of the board should be bevelled off with a file. This will not be necessary if the groove is the exact depth. When the holes have been punched, it is well to cut a series of V-shaped depressions from the first series of holes to the back to receive[133] the slips, or they may be too prominent when the book is bound. It will now be necessary to considerably reduce the slips that were frayed out after sewing, and to remove all glue or any other matter attached to them. The extent to which they may be reduced is a matter of nice judgment. In the desire to ensure absolute neatness in the covering, modern binders often reduce the slips to almost nothing. On the other hand, some go to the other extreme, and leave the cord entire, making great ridges on the sides of the book where it is laced in. It should be possible with the aid of the depressions, cut as described, to use slips with sufficient margin of strength, and yet to have no undue projection on the cover. A slight projection is not unsightly, as it gives an assurance of sound construction and strength, and, moreover, makes an excellent starting-point for any pattern that may be used. When the slips have been scraped and reduced, the portion left should consist of long straight silky fibres. These must be well pasted, and the ends very slightly twisted. The pointed ends are then threaded through the first series of holes in the front of the board, and[134] back again through the second (fig. 50). In lacing-in the slips must not be pulled so tight as to prevent the board from shutting freely, nor left so loose as to make a perceptible interval in the joint of the book. The pasted slips having been laced in, their ends are cut off with a sharp knife, flush with the surface of the board. The laced-in slips are then well hammered on a knocking-down iron (see fig. 51), first from the front and then from the back, care being taken that the hammer face should fall squarely, or the slips may be cut. This should rivet them into the board, leaving little or no projection.[135] If in lacing in the fibres should get twisted, no amount of hammering will make them flat, so that it is important in pointing the ends for lacing in, that only the points are twisted just sufficiently to facilitate the threading through the holes, and not enough to twist the whole slip.

The height of the boards for a book that has been trimmed, or is meant to stay uncut, will be the height of the page with a small allowance at each end for the squares. When a pair of boards has been cut all around, you can check for squareness by flipping one board; any inequality will appear doubled. If the boards are not aligned[132], they should usually be set aside for a smaller book, and new boards should be made. To fix a badly cut pair of boards, you need to reduce their size, which will in turn affect the book. If the boards are correctly cut, they are laid on the book, and the position of the slips is marked by lines at right angles to the back. A line is then drawn parallel to the back, about half an inch in (see fig. 49). At the points where the lines intersect, a series of holes is punched from the front with a binder’s bodkin on a lead plate, then the board is flipped over, and a second series is punched from the back about half an inch from the first. If the groove of the back is shallower than the thickness of the board, the top back edge of the board should be beveled off with a file. This won’t be necessary if the groove is just the right depth. Once the holes have been punched, it’s a good idea to cut a series of V-shaped depressions from the first series of holes to the back to receive[133] the slips, or they might be too prominent when the book is bound. Now, you’ll need to significantly reduce the slips that were frayed out after sewing, and remove all glue or any other residue. The extent to which they can be reduced is a matter of careful judgment. In the pursuit of absolute neatness in the covering, modern binders often reduce the slips to almost nothing. On the other hand, some go to the other extreme and leave the cord entire, creating large ridges on the sides of the book where it is laced in. It should be possible, with the help of the depressions cut as described, to use slips with enough strength, yet to have no excessive projection on the cover. A slight projection isn’t unattractive, as it provides assurance of solid construction and strength and also serves as an excellent starting point for any pattern that may be used. After the slips have been scraped and reduced, the remaining part should consist of long straight silky fibers. These must be well pasted, and the ends very slightly twisted. The pointed ends are then threaded through the first series of holes in the front of the board, and[134] back again through the second (fig. 50). When lacing in, the slips must not be pulled so tightly that the board can’t shut freely, nor left so loose that there’s a noticeable gap in the joint of the book. After the pasted slips have been laced in, their ends are cut off with a sharp knife, flush with the surface of the board. The laced-in slips are then well hammered on a knocking-down iron (see fig. 51), first from the front and then from the back, being careful that the hammer face hits straight on, or the slips may get cut. This should secure them into the board, leaving little or no projection.[135] If, while lacing in, the fibers twist, no amount of hammering will flatten them, so it’s important when pointing the ends for lacing in that only the points are twisted just enough to facilitate threading through the holes, and not enough to twist the entire slip.

Fig. 50.

Fig. 50.

Fig. 50.

Fig. 51.

Fig. 51.

Fig. 51.

To lace slips into wooden boards, holes are made with a brace and fine twist bit, and the ends of the frayed out slips may be secured with a wooden plug (see fig. 52).

To lace slips into wooden boards, holes are made using a brace and a fine twist bit, and the ends of the frayed slips can be secured with a wooden plug (see fig. 52).

Old books were sometimes sewn on[136] bands of leather, but as those sewn on cord seem to have lasted on the whole much better, and as, moreover, modern cord is a far more trustworthy material than modern leather, it is better to use cord for any books bound now.

Old books were sometimes stitched onto[136] leather bands, but since those stitched onto cord generally hold up better, and because modern cord is a much more reliable material than modern leather, it’s best to use cord for any books that are bound today.

Fig. 52.

Fig. 52.

Fig. 52.

CLEANING OFF THE BACK AND PRESSING
Fig. 53.

Fig. 53.

Fig. 53.

When the boards have been laced on and the slips hammered down, the book should be pressed. Before pressing, a tin is put on each side of both boards, one being pushed right up into the joint on the inside, and the other up to the joint, or a little over it, on the outside. While in the press, the back should be covered with paste and left to soak for a few minutes. When the glue is soft the surplus on the surface can be scraped off with a piece of wood shaped as shown in fig. 53. For important books it is best to do this in the lying press, but some binders prefer first to build up the books in the standing press, and then to paste the backs and clean them off there. This has the advantage of being a quicker method, and will, in many cases, answer quite well. But for books that require nice adjustment it will be found better to clean off each volume separately in the lying press, and afterwards to build up the books and[138] boards in the standing press, putting the larger books at the bottom. It must be seen that the entire pile is exactly in the centre under the screw, or the pressure will be uneven. To ascertain if the books are built up truly, the pile must be examined from both the front and side of the press. Each volume must also be looked at carefully to see that it lies evenly, and that the back is not twisted or out of shape. This is important, as any form given to the book when it is pressed at this stage will be permanent.

Once the boards are laced on and the slips are hammered down, the book needs to be pressed. Before pressing, a tin is placed on each side of both boards, with one pushed all the way into the joint on the inside and the other up to or just over the joint on the outside. While in the press, the spine should be coated with paste and left to soak for a few minutes. When the glue is soft, any excess on the surface can be scraped off with a shaped piece of wood as shown in fig. 53. For important books, it's best to do this in the lying press, but some binders prefer to first set up the books in the standing press, and then paste the spines and clean them there. This method is quicker and often works fine. However, for books that need precise adjustment, it's better to clean off each volume separately in the lying press and then stack the books and boards in the standing press, placing the larger books on the bottom. It’s crucial to ensure the entire stack is perfectly centered under the screw, or the pressure will be uneven. To check if the books are stacked correctly, the pile should be examined from both the front and side of the press. Each volume also needs to be inspected carefully to ensure it lies flat and that the spine isn’t twisted or misshapen. This is important, as any shape given to the book while pressing at this stage will be permanent.

Any coloured or newly printed plates will need tissues, as in the former pressing; and any folded plates or diagrams or inserted letters will need a thin tin on each side of them to prevent them from marking the book.

Any colored or newly printed plates will need tissues, just like in the previous pressing; and any folded plates, diagrams, or inserted letters will require a thin sheet on each side to prevent them from marking the book.

Again, the pressure on hand-printed books must not be excessive.

Again, the pressure on hand-printed books shouldn't be too much.

The books should be left in the press at least a night. When taken out they will be ready for headbanding, unless the edges are to be cut in boards.

The books should stay in the press for at least one night. When taken out, they’ll be ready for headbanding, unless the edges need to be cut into boards.

CHAPTER X[139]

Cutting in Boards—Gilding and Colouring Edges

Cutting in Boards—Gilding and Coloring Edges

CUTTING IN BOARDS

The knife for cutting edges may be ground more acutely than for cutting boards, and should be very sharp, or the paper may be torn. The plough knife should never be ground on the under side, as if the under side is not quite flat, it will tend to run up instead of cutting straight across. Before beginning to cut edges, the position of the knife should be tested carefully by screwing the plough up, with the press a little open, and noting whereabouts on the left-hand cheek the point of the knife comes. In a press that is true the knife should just clear the edge of the press. If there is too much packing the knife will cut below the edge of the press, and if too little, it will cut above.

The knife for cutting edges can be sharpened more finely than the one for cutting boards and should be very sharp, or else the paper might tear. The plough knife should never be sharpened on the underside; if the underside isn't perfectly flat, it will tend to lift instead of cutting straight across. Before you start cutting edges, you should carefully check the knife's position by adjusting the plough, keeping the press slightly open, and observing where the knife point lands on the left-hand side. In a properly aligned press, the knife should just clear the edge of the press. If there’s too much packing, the knife will cut below the edge of the press, and if there’s too little, it will cut above.

“Packing” is paper inserted between the knife and the metal plate on the plough, to correct the position of the knife. When by experiment the exact thickness of paper necessary for any given[140] knife is found, the packing should be carefully kept when the knife is taken out for grinding, and put back with it into the plough.

“Packing” is paper placed between the knife and the metal plate on the plow to adjust the knife's position. Once the exact thickness of paper needed for a specific [140] knife is determined through testing, the packing should be stored properly when the knife is removed for sharpening and reinserted with the knife into the plow.

The first edge to be cut is the top, and the first thing to do is to place the boards in the position they will hold when the book is bound. The front board is then dropped the depth of the square required, care being taken that the back edge of the board remains evenly in the joint. A piece of cardboard, or two or three thicknesses of paper, are then slipped in between the end paper and the back board to prevent the latter from being cut by the knife. The book is then carefully lowered into the press, with the back towards the workman, until the top edge of the front board is exactly even with the right-hand cheek, and the press screwed up evenly. The back board should show the depth of the square above the left-hand cheek. It is very important that the edge of the back board should be exactly parallel with the press, and if at first it is not so, the book must be twisted until it is right.

The first edge to cut is the top, and the first step is to position the boards as they will be when the book is bound. The front board is then dropped to the required square depth, ensuring that the back edge of the board stays even with the joint. A piece of cardboard or two or three layers of paper are then placed between the endpaper and the back board to keep the latter from being cut by the knife. The book is then carefully lowered into the press, with the back facing the worker, until the top edge of the front board is flush with the right cheek, and the press is tightened evenly. The back board should extend the square depth above the left cheek. It's crucial that the edge of the back board is perfectly parallel to the press, and if it's not at first, the book must be adjusted until it is aligned correctly.

The edges can now be cut with the plough as in cutting mill-boards. The tail of the book is cut in the same way,[141] still keeping the back of the book towards the workman, but cutting from the back board.

The edges can now be trimmed with the plow like cutting mill boards. The bottom of the book is cut the same way,[141] still keeping the spine of the book facing the worker, but cutting from the back board.

Fig. 54.

Fig. 54.

Fig. 54.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 55.

Fig. 55.

Cutting the fore-edge is more difficult. The waste sheets at each end of the book should be cut off flush with the edge of the board, and marks made on them below the edge showing the amount of the square, and consequently how much is to be cut off. The curve of the back, and consequent curve of the fore-edge, must first be got rid of, by inserting a pair of pieces of flat steel called “trindles” (fig. 54) across the back, from the inside of the boards. When these are inserted the back must be knocked quite flat, and, in the case of a heavy book, a piece of tape may be tied round the leaves (see fig. 55) to keep them in position. A pair of cutting boards is placed one on each side of the leaves, the back one exactly up to the point that the edge of the board came to, and the front one as much below that point as it is desired the square of the fore-edge should[142] be. The trindles are removed while the book is held firmly between the cutting boards by the finger and thumb; book and boards are then lowered very carefully into the press. The top edge of the front cutting board should be flush with the right-hand cheek of the press, and that of the back a square above the left-hand cheek (see fig. 56). A further test is to look along the surface of the right-hand cheek, when, if the book has been inserted truly, the amount of the back cutting board in sight should exactly correspond with the amount of the paper to be cut showing above the front board. It will also be necessary before cutting to look at the back, and to see that it has remained flat. If it has gone back to its old curve, or the book has been put into the press crookedly, it must be taken right out again and the[143] trindles inserted afresh, as it is usually a waste of time to try to adjust the book when it is in the press. The leaves are cut in the same way as those of the head and tail.

Cutting the fore-edge is more challenging. The waste sheets at both ends of the book should be cut off even with the edge of the board, and marks should be made on them below the edge to indicate how much of the square should be removed. First, the curve of the back and the corresponding curve of the fore-edge need to be flattened by inserting a pair of flat steel pieces called “trindles” (fig. 54) across the back, from the inside of the boards. Once these are in place, the back must be knocked completely flat. For heavier books, a piece of tape may be wrapped around the leaves (see fig. 55) to hold them in position. A pair of cutting boards is placed on either side of the leaves—with the back one positioned exactly at the point where the edge of the board reached, and the front one set lower than that point by the desired square of the fore-edge[142]. The trindles are taken out while the book is held tightly between the cutting boards using finger and thumb; the book and boards are then carefully lowered into the press. The top edge of the front cutting board should align with the right-hand side of the press, while the back cutting board should sit a square above the left-hand side (see fig. 56). A further check involves looking along the surface of the right-hand side; if the book has been positioned correctly, the visible amount of the back cutting board should match the amount of paper to be cut that is showing above the front board. It's also important to check the back before cutting to ensure it remains flat. If it has reverted to its original curve or if the book is placed in the press crookedly, it must be completely taken out again and the [143]trindles reinserted, as attempting to adjust it while in the press is usually a waste of time. The leaves are cut in the same way as those at the head and tail.

Fig. 56.

Fig. 56.

Fig. 56.

GILDING OR COLOURING THE EDGES OF A CUT BOOK[144]

Gilding the edges of a book cut in boards is much the same process as that described for the trimmed book, excepting that when gilt in boards the edges can be scraped and slightly sand-papered. It is the custom to admire a perfectly solid gilt edge, looking more like a solid sheet of metal, than the leaves of a book. As the essential characteristic of a book is, that it is composed of leaves, this fact is better accepted and emphasised by leaving the edges a little rough, so that even when gilt they are evidently the edges of leaves of paper, and not the sides of a block, or of something solid.

Gilding the edges of a book made from boards is pretty much the same process as for a trimmed book, except that when gilding boards, the edges can be scraped and lightly sanded. It's common to admire a perfectly smooth gilt edge, which looks more like a solid metal sheet than the pages of a book. Since the main characteristic of a book is that it's made of pages, it’s better to leave the edges a bit rough. This way, even when they’re gilded, it’s clear that they are the edges of paper leaves and not the sides of a solid block.

To gild the edges of a cut book the boards should be turned back, and cutting boards put on each side of the book flush with the edge to be gilt. For the fore-edge the book must be thrown up with trindles first, unless it is desired to gild in the round, a process which gives the objectionable solid metallic edge.

To gild the edges of a cut book, the boards should be flipped back, and cutting boards placed on either side of the book aligned with the edge to be gilded. For the fore-edge, the book must be lifted with trindles first, unless you want to gild in the round, which creates the undesirable solid metallic edge.

After the edges have been gilt they may be decorated by tooling, called “gauffering.[145]

After the edges have been gilded, they can be decorated by tooling, known as “gauffering.[145]

This may be done, either by tooling with hot tools directly on the gold while the leaves are screwed up tightly in the press, or by laying another coloured gold on the top of the first and tooling over that, leaving the pattern in the new gold on the original colour. But, to my mind, edges are best left undecorated, except for plain gold or colour.

This can be done either by using hot tools directly on the gold while the leaves are tightly pressed together, or by placing another layer of colored gold on top of the first and tooling over that, leaving the pattern in the new gold on the original color. However, I believe that edges are best left simple, except for plain gold or color.

If the edges are to be coloured, they should be slightly scraped, and the colour put on with a sponge, commencing with the fore-edge, which should be slightly fanned out, and held firmly, by placing a pressing-board above it, and pressing with the hand on this. The colour must be put on very thinly, commencing from the centre of the fore-edge and working to either end, and as many coats put on as are necessary to get the depth of colour required. The head and tail are treated in the same way, excepting that they cannot be fanned out, and the colour should be applied from the back to the fore-edge. If in the fore-edge an attempt is made to colour from one end to the other, and if in the head or tail from the fore-edge to the back, the result will almost certainly be that the sponge will leave a thick[146] deposit of colour round the corner from which it starts.

If you're going to color the edges, first scrape them lightly, then apply the color with a sponge, starting with the fore-edge. Fan it out a bit and hold it steady by placing a pressing board on top and pressing down with your hand. The color should be applied very thinly, starting from the center of the fore-edge and working towards both ends. Apply as many coats as needed to achieve the desired depth of color. The head and tail get the same treatment, except they can't be fanned out, and the color should be applied from the back to the fore-edge. If you try to color from one end to the other on the fore-edge, or from the fore-edge to the back on the head or tail, you'll likely end up with a thick deposit of color at the corner where you start.

For colouring edges almost any stain will answer, or ordinary water-colours may be used if moistened with size.

For coloring edges, almost any stain will work, or you can use regular watercolor if you mix it with some sizing.

When the colour is dry the edge should be lightly rubbed over with a little beeswax, and burnished with a tooth burnisher (see fig. 57).

When the color is dry, gently rub the edge with a bit of beeswax and polish it with a tooth burnisher (see fig. 57).

Fig. 57.

Fig. 57.

Fig. 57.

In addition to plain colour and gilding, the edges of a book may be decorated in a variety of ways. The fore-edge may be fanned out and painted in any device in water-colour and afterwards gilded; the painting will only show when the book is open. The fore-edge for this must be cut very solid, and if the paper is at all absorbent, must be sized with vellum size before being painted. The paints used must be simple water-colour, and the edge must not be touched with the hand before gilding, as if there is any grease or finger-mark on it, the gold will not stick evenly. Painting on the fore-edge should only be attempted when the paper of the book is thin and of good quality. More common methods of decorating edges are by marbling and sprinkling, but they are both[147] inferior to plain colouring. Some pleasant effects are sometimes obtained by marbling edges and then gilding over the marbling.

In addition to solid colors and gold leaf, the edges of a book can be decorated in various ways. The fore-edge can be fanned out and painted with any design in watercolor and then gilded; the painting will only be visible when the book is open. The fore-edge needs to be cut very solidly, and if the paper is somewhat absorbent, it must be sized with vellum size before painting. The paints used should be simple watercolor, and the edge must not be touched with hands before gilding, as any grease or fingerprints will affect how evenly the gold adheres. Painting on the fore-edge should only be done when the paper of the book is thin and of good quality. More common methods of decorating edges include marbling and sprinkling, but both are less impressive than solid coloring. Some nice effects can sometimes be achieved by marbling the edges and then gilding over them.

CHAPTER XI

Headbanding

Headbanding

HEADBANDS

Modern headbands are small pieces of vellum, gut, or cord sewn on to the head and tail of a book with silk or thread. They resist the strain on the book when it is taken from the shelf. The vellum slip or cord must be of such a depth, that when covered with silk it will be slightly lower than the square of the boards. The cut edge of the vellum always slants, and the slip must be placed in position so that it tilts back rather than forward on the book.

Modernized headbands are small strips of vellum, gut, or cord stitched onto the head and tail of a book using silk or thread. They help support the book when it’s taken from the shelf. The vellum strip or cord needs to be deep enough so that when it’s covered with silk, it sits a bit lower than the edges of the boards. The cut edge of the vellum always angles, and the strip should be positioned to tilt back instead of forward on the book.

To start, ease the boards slightly on the slips and pull them down with the top edges flush with the top edge of the leaves. If this is not done the silk catches on the projecting edges as the band is worked. Stand the book in a finishing[148] press, fore-edge to the worker, and tilted forward so as to give a good view of the headband as it is worked. The light must come from the left, and well on to the work. A needle threaded with silk is put in at the head of the book, and through the centre of the first section after the end papers, and drawn out at the back below the kettle stitch with about two-thirds of the silk. The needle is again inserted in the same place, and drawn through until a loop of silk is left. The vellum slip is placed in the loop, with the end projecting slightly to the left. It must be held steady by a needle placed vertically behind it, with its point between the leaves of the first section. The needle end of silk is then behind the headband, and the shorter end in front. The needle end is brought over from the back with the right hand, passed into the left hand, and held taut. The short end is picked up with the right hand, brought over the needle end under the vellum, and pulled tight from the back. This is repeated; the back thread is again drawn up and over the band to the front, the needle end crosses it, and is drawn behind under the vellum slip, and so on. The crossing of[149] the threads form a “bead,” which must be watched, and kept as tight as possible, and well down on the leaves of the book. Whenever the vellum or string begins to shift in position, it must be tied down. This is done when the needle end of silk is at the back. A finger of the left hand is placed on the thread of silk at the back, and holds it firmly just below the slip. The needle end is then brought up and over the slip, but instead of crossing it with the front thread, the needle is passed between the leaves and out at the back of the book, below the kettle stitch, and the thread gradually drawn tight, and from under the left-hand finger. The loop so made will hold the band firmly, and the silk can then be brought up and over the slip and crossed in the usual way. The band should be worked as far as the end papers, and should be finished with a double “tie down,” after which the front thread is drawn under the slip to the back. Both the ends of silk are then cut off to about half an inch, frayed out, and pasted down as flatly as possible on the back of the book.

To begin, slightly ease the boards onto the slips and pull them down so the top edges are flush with the top edge of the leaves. If this isn't done, the silk will catch on the projecting edges while working the band. Position the book in a finishing[148] press, with the fore-edge facing the worker and angled forward for a clear view of the headband while it's being worked on. The light should come from the left and shine directly on the work. A needle threaded with silk is inserted at the head of the book, passing through the center of the first section after the end papers, and pulled out at the back below the kettle stitch, leaving about two-thirds of the silk outside. The needle is reinserted in the same spot and pulled through until a loop of silk is formed. The vellum slip is placed in the loop with its end slightly projecting to the left. It must be held steady with a needle positioned vertically behind it, its point between the leaves of the first section. The needle end of the silk is behind the headband, while the shorter end is in front. The needle end is brought over from the back with the right hand, passed to the left hand, and held taut. The short end is picked up with the right hand, brought over the needle end under the vellum, and pulled tight from the back. This process is repeated; the back thread is again drawn up and over the band to the front, the needle end crosses it, and is drawn behind under the vellum slip, and so forth. The crossing of[149] the threads creates a “bead,” which must be monitored and kept as tight as possible, positioned well down on the leaves of the book. Whenever the vellum or string starts to shift, it must be secured. This is done when the needle end of silk is at the back. A finger of the left hand is placed on the silk thread at the back to hold it firmly just below the slip. The needle end is then brought up and over the slip, but instead of crossing it with the front thread, the needle is passed between the leaves and out at the back of the book below the kettle stitch, gradually tightening the thread from under the left hand's finger. The resulting loop will hold the band securely, allowing the silk to be brought up and over the slip and crossed in the usual manner. The band should be worked all the way to the end papers and finished with a double “tie down,” after which the front thread is drawn under the slip to the back. Both ends of the silk are cut to about half an inch, frayed out, and pasted down as flatly as possible on the back of the book.

The band should be tied down frequently. It is not too much to tie down[150] every third time the needle end of the silk comes to the back. To make good headbands the pull on the silk must be even throughout.

The band should be secured regularly. It's not excessive to secure it[150] every third time the needle end of the silk reaches the back. To create good headbands, the tension on the silk must be uniform throughout.

When the ends of the silk are pasted down, the ends of the vellum slip are cut off as near the silk as possible. The correct length of the headband is best judged by pressing the boards together with thumb and finger at the opposite ends of the band, so as to compress the sections into their final compass. If the band then buckles in the least, it is too long and must be shortened.

When the ends of the silk are glued down, the ends of the vellum slip are trimmed as close to the silk as possible. The right length of the headband is best determined by pressing the boards together with your thumb and finger at the opposite ends of the band, compressing the sections into their final shape. If the band then buckles even slightly, it’s too long and needs to be shortened.

The mediæval headbands were sewn with the other bands (see fig. 32), and were very strong, as they were tied down at every section. Modern worked headbands, although not so strong, are, if frequently tied down, strong enough to resist any reasonable strain. There are many other ways of headbanding, but if the one described is mastered, the various other patterns will suggest themselves if variety is needed. For very large books a double headband may be worked on two pieces of gut or string—a thick piece with a thin piece in front. The string should first be soaked in thin glue and left to[151] dry. Such a band is worked with a figure of eight stitch. Headbands may also be worked with two or three shades of silk. As vellum is apt to get hard and to break when it is used for headbanding, it is well to paste two pieces together with linen in between, and to cut into strips as required.

The medieval headbands were sewn with the other bands (see fig. 32), and they were very strong because they were secured at every section. Modern headbands, while not as strong, can be strong enough to withstand reasonable strain if they are frequently tied down. There are many other methods of making headbands, but if you master the one described, the other patterns will come to mind if you want some variety. For very large books, you can do a double headband with two pieces of gut or string—a thick piece with a thin piece in front. The string should first be soaked in thin glue and left to dry. Such a band is created using a figure of eight stitch. Headbands can also be made with two or three shades of silk. Since vellum tends to harden and break when used for headbanding, it’s a good idea to paste two pieces together with linen in between and cut them into strips as needed.

Machine-made headbands can be bought by the yard. Such bands are merely glued on, but as they have but little strength, should not be used.

Machine-made headbands can be purchased by the yard. These bands are just glued on, but since they aren't very strong, they shouldn't be used.

Where leather joints are used, the headbands may be worked on pieces of soft leather sized and screwed up. If the ends are left long and tied in front while the book is being covered, they may be conveniently let into grooves in the boards before the leather joint is pasted down. This method, I think, has little constructive value, but it certainly avoids the rather unfinished look of the cut-off headband.

Where leather joints are used, the headbands can be made from pieces of soft leather that are cut and shaped. If the ends are left long and tied in front while the book is being covered, they can be easily placed into grooves in the covers before the leather joint is glued down. I think this method has little practical benefit, but it definitely prevents the somewhat unfinished appearance of a cut-off headband.

CHAPTER XII[152]

Preparing for Covering—Paring Leather—Covering—Mitring Corners—Filling-in Boards

Preparing for Covering—Trimming Leather—Covering—Mitering Corners—Filling-in Boards

PREPARING FOR COVERING

After the headband is worked, a piece of brown or other stout paper should be well glued on at the head and tail, care being taken that it is firmly attached to the back and the headband. When dry, the part projecting above the headband is neatly cut off, and the part on the back well sand-papered, to remove any irregularity caused by the tie-downs attaching the headband. For most books this will be quite sufficient lining up, but very heavy books are best further lined up between the bands with linen, or thin leather. This can be put on by pasting the linen or leather and giving the back a very thin coat of glue.

After the headband is made, a piece of sturdy brown paper or another durable type should be securely glued at both the top and bottom, ensuring it’s firmly attached to the back and the headband. Once it's dry, the excess that sticks out above the headband is trimmed off neatly, and the part on the back is sanded down to smooth out any bumps caused by the tie-downs that secure the headband. For most books, this will be enough lining, but for very heavy books, it’s better to line between the bands with linen or thin leather. This can be applied by gluing the linen or leather and putting a very thin layer of glue on the back.

Fig. 58.

Fig. 58.

Fig. 58.

The only thing now left to do before covering will be to set the squares and to cut off a small piece of the back corner of each board at the head and tail, to make it possible for the boards to open and[153] shut without dragging the head-cap out of place. The form of the little piece to be cut off varies with each individual binder, but I have found for an octavo book that a cut slightly sloping from the inside cutting off the corner about an eighth of an inch each way, gives the best result (see fig. 58). When the corner has been cut off, the boards should be thrown back, and the slips between the book and the board well pasted. When these have soaked a little, the squares of the boards are set; that is, the boards are fixed so that exactly the same square shows on each board above head and tail. A little larger square is sometimes an advantage at the tail to keep the head-cap well off the shelf, the essential thing being that both head and both tail squares should be the same. In the case of an old book that has not been recut, the edges will often be found to be uneven. In such cases the boards must be made square, and so set that the book stands up straight.

The only thing left to do before covering is to set the squares and trim a small piece off the back corner of each board at the head and tail. This allows the boards to open and close without pulling the head-cap out of position. The shape of the piece to be cut varies with each binder, but for an octavo book, I’ve found that a slightly sloping cut from the inside, removing about an eighth of an inch from each side, works best (see fig. 58). Once the corner is cut off, the boards should be flipped back, and the slips between the book and the board should be well pasted. After they’ve soaked a bit, the squares of the boards are set, meaning the boards are adjusted so that the same square shows on each board at the head and tail. A slightly larger square at the tail can sometimes be helpful to keep the head-cap off the shelf, but it's crucial that both head and tail squares are the same. In the case of an old book that hasn’t been recut, the edges are often uneven. In such situations, the boards must be squared up and positioned so the book stands straight.

When the slips have been pasted and the squares set, tins can be put inside and outside the boards, and the book given a[154] slight nip in the press to flatten the slips. Only a comparatively light pressure should be given, or the lining up of the headbands or back will become cockled and detached.

When the slips have been pasted and the squares are set, tins can be placed inside and outside the boards, and the book can be given a[154] slight press to flatten the slips. Only a fairly light pressure should be applied, or the alignment of the headbands or spine will become wrinkled and come loose.

PARING LEATHER

While the slips are being set in the press the cover can be got out. Judgment is necessary in cutting out covers. One workman will be able, by careful cutting, to get six covers out of a skin where another will only get four. The firm part of the skin is the back and sides, and this only should be used for the best books. The fleshy parts on the flanks and belly will not wear sufficiently well to be suitable for good bookbinding.

While the slips are being set in the press, the cover can be prepared. It's important to be careful when cutting out covers. One worker might be able to skillfully cut six covers from a skin, while another might only manage four. The firm part of the skin is the back and sides, and only these should be used for high-quality books. The softer areas on the flanks and belly won’t hold up well enough for good bookbinding.

The skin should be cut out leaving about an inch all round for turning in when the book is covered, and when cut out it must be pared. If the leather is of European manufacture most of the paring will have been done before it is sold, and the leather manufacturer will have shaved it to any thickness required. This is a convenience that is partly responsible for the unduly thin leather that is[155] commonly used. The better plan is to get the leather rather thick, and for the binder to pare it down where necessary. For small books it is essential, in order that the covers may open freely, and the boards not look clumsy, that the leather should be very thin at the joint and round the edges of the boards. For such books it is very important that a small, naturally thin skin should be used that will not have to be unduly pared down, and that the large and thicker skins should be kept for large books.

The skin should be cut out, leaving about an inch all around for folding in when the book is covered, and once cut out, it must be thinned. If the leather is made in Europe, most of the thinning will have been done before it’s sold, as the manufacturer will have shaved it to the needed thickness. This convenience partly contributes to the excessively thin leather that is[155] commonly used. A better approach is to get the leather thicker, allowing the binder to trim it down where necessary. For small books, it’s essential for the covers to open freely and for the boards to not look bulky, so the leather should be very thin at the joint and around the edges of the boards. For these books, it’s crucial to use a small, naturally thin skin that won’t need to be overly thinned, reserving larger, thicker skins for bigger books.

Binders like using large skins because there is much less waste, but if these skins are used for small books, so much of the leather substance has to be pared away, that only the comparatively brittle grained surface remains. By the modern process of dyeing this surface is often to some extent injured, and its strength sometimes totally destroyed.

Binders prefer using large hides because it reduces waste, but when these hides are used for small books, a lot of the leather has to be trimmed away, leaving only the relatively weak grained surface. The modern dyeing process often damages this surface to some degree, and in some cases, its strength is completely lost.

When the cover has been cut to size the book is laid on it with the boards open, and a pencil line drawn round them, a mark being made to show where the back comes. The skin is then pared, making it thin where the edge of the boards will come. Great care must be taken that the[156] thinning does not commence too abruptly, or a ridge will be apparent when the leather is on the book.

When the cover has been cut to size, the book is placed on it with the boards open, and a pencil line is drawn around them, marking where the spine will go. The leather is then thinned out where the edge of the boards will be. Care must be taken to ensure that the thinning does not start too suddenly, or a ridge will show up when the leather is on the book.

The paring must be done quite smoothly and evenly. Every unevenness shows when the cover is polished and pressed. Care is needed in estimating the amount that will have to be pared off that part of the leather that covers the back and joints. The object of the binder should be to leave these portions as thick as he can consistently with the free opening of the boards. The leather at the head-caps must be pared quite thin, as the double thickness on the top of the headband is apt to make this part project above the edges of the board. This is a great trouble, especially at the tail, where, if the head-cap projects beyond the boards, the whole weight of the book rests on it, and it is certain to be rubbed off when the book is put on the shelf.

The trimming needs to be done very smoothly and evenly. Any uneven spots will stand out when the cover is polished and pressed. It's important to carefully judge how much leather needs to be removed from the parts that cover the back and joints. The binder's goal should be to keep these areas as thick as possible while still allowing the boards to open freely. The leather at the head-caps must be trimmed down quite thin, as the extra thickness on top of the headband can cause this area to stick up above the edges of the board. This can be a big issue, especially at the tail, where if the head-cap sticks out beyond the boards, the entire weight of the book rests on it, and it will likely get worn down when the book is placed on the shelf.

Fig. 59.

Fig. 59.

Fig. 59.

The method of paring with a French knife (fig. 60, A)—the only form of knife[157] in use by binders that gives sufficient control over the leather—is shown at fig. 59. To use this knife properly, practice is required. The main thing to learn is that the knife must be used quite flat, and made to cut by having a very slight burr[158] on the under side. This burr is got by rubbing the knife on the lithographic stone on which the paring is done. The handle of the knife should never be raised to such a height above the surface of the stone that it is possible to get the under fingers of the right hand over the edge of the stone. Another form of knife suitable for paring the edges of leather is shown at fig. 60, B.

The method of paring with a French knife (fig. 60, A)—the only type of knife[157] used by binders that provides enough control over the leather—is illustrated at fig. 59. To use this knife effectively, practice is necessary. The main thing to master is that the knife should be held quite flat, and it should cut by having a very slight burr[158] on the underside. This burr is created by rubbing the knife on the lithographic stone where the paring takes place. The knife's handle should never be raised so high above the surface of the stone that the fingers of the right hand can reach over the edge of the stone. Another type of knife suitable for paring the edges of leather is shown at fig. 60, B.

Fig. 60.

Fig. 60.

Fig. 60.

To test if the leather has been sufficiently pared, fold it over where the edge of the board will come, and run the finger along the folded leather. If the paring has been done properly it will feel quite even the whole length of the fold; but if there are any irregularities, they will be very apparent, and the paring must be gone over again till they have disappeared.[159] When even, the book must be again laid on the leather with the boards open, and a pencil line drawn round as before. If there are leather joints they will have been pared before the book was sewn, and care must be taken in paring the turn-in of the cover that it is of the same thickness as the leather joint, or it will be impossible to make a neat mitre at the back corners.

To check if the leather is thinned out enough, fold it where the edge of the board will sit and run your finger along the fold. If the thinning is done right, it will feel smooth all along the fold; if there are any bumps, they will stand out, and the thinning needs to be redone until they are gone.[159] Once smooth, place the book back on the leather with the boards open and draw a pencil line around it like before. If there are leather joints, they should have been thinned before the book was sewn, and you need to be careful when thinning the turn-in of the cover so it matches the thickness of the leather joint; otherwise, it will be hard to make a clean mitre at the back corners.

COVERING

Before covering, the book must be looked at to see that the bands are quite square and at equal distances apart. Any slight errors in this respect can be corrected by holding the book in the lying press between backing boards and gently tapping the bands from one side or the other with a piece of wood struck with a hammer. This is best done when the back is cleaned off, but by damping the bands slightly it may be done just before covering. The squares must be looked to, and the edges of the board well rubbed with a folder, or tapped with a hammer, to remove any burr that may have been caused by the plough knife, or any chance[160] blow. The back is then moistened with paste, or, in the case of a very large book, with thin glue, and left to soak. The cover can then be well pasted with thickish paste, that has been previously well beaten up. When the cover is pasted, it can be folded with the pasted sides together and left to soak for a few minutes while the back is again looked to, and any roughness smoothed down with the folder. Before covering, the bands should be nipped up with band nippers (see fig. 61) to make sure that they are sharp. The coverer should have ready before covering a clean paring stone, one or two folders, a pair of nickeled-band nippers, a clean sponge, a little water in a saucer, a piece of thread, and a strip of smooth wood (boxwood for preference), called a band stick, used for smoothing the leather between the bands, a pair of scissors, and a small sharp knife, a pair of waterproof sheets the size of the book, and, if the[161] book is a large one, a pair of tying up boards, with tying up string, and two strips of wood covered in blotting-paper or leather. It is best to have the band nippers for covering nickeled to prevent the iron from staining the leather. The waterproof sheets recommended are thin sheets of celluloid, such as are used by photographers.

Before covering, you need to check that the bands are straight and evenly spaced. Any slight misalignments can be fixed by placing the book in a lying press between backing boards and gently tapping the bands from one side to the other with a piece of wood and a hammer. It's best to do this after cleaning the back, but if necessary, you can slightly dampen the bands just before covering. Ensure the squares are correct, and rub the edges of the board well with a folder or tap them with a hammer to remove any burrs from the plough knife or any accidental hits. Next, moisten the back with paste, or thin glue for a very large book, and let it soak. The cover should be generously pasted with a thick paste that has been well mixed. Once the cover is pasted, fold it with the pasted sides together and let it soak for a few minutes while you check the back again and smooth out any rough spots with a folder. Before covering, the bands should be nipped with band nippers (see fig. 61) to ensure they’re sharp. The coverer should have ready a clean paring stone, one or two folders, a pair of nickeled-band nippers, a clean sponge, a small bowl of water, a piece of thread, and a smooth strip of wood (preferably boxwood), called a band stick, for smoothing the leather between the bands, along with a pair of scissors, a small sharp knife, a pair of waterproof sheets the size of the book, and, if the book is large, a pair of tying up boards with tying-up string and two strips of wood covered in blotting paper or leather. It’s best to use nickeled band nippers for covering to avoid staining the leather with iron. The recommended waterproof sheets are thin sheets of celluloid, like those used by photographers.

Fig. 61.

Fig. 61.

Fig. 61.

When these things are ready, the pasted cover should be examined and repasted if it has dried in any place. The amount of paste to be used for covering can only be learned by experience. A thick leather will take more than a thin one, but, provided the cover sticks tight at every point, the less paste used the better. If there is too much, it will rub up and make very ugly, uneven places under the leather; and if there is too little, the cover will not stick.

When everything is ready, the pasted cover should be checked and reapplied if it has dried in any spots. You'll only learn how much paste to use through experience. Thicker leather will need more paste than thinner leather, but as long as the cover adheres well at every point, using less paste is better. If there's too much, it will create ugly, uneven patches under the leather; if there's too little, the cover won’t stick.

Fig. 62.

Fig. 62.

Fig. 62.

Take the pasted cover and look to see which is the better side of the leather. Lay the front of the book down on this exactly up to the marks that show the beginning of the turn-in. Then draw the leather over the back and on to the other side, pulling it slightly, but not dragging it. Then stand the book on[162] its fore-edge on a piece of waste paper, with the leather turned out on either side, as shown at fig. 62, and nip up the bands with nickeled band nippers (see fig. 63). After this is done there will probably be a good deal of loose leather on the back. This can be got rid of by dragging the leather on to the side; but by far the better plan, when the back is large enough to allow it, is to work up the surplus leather on to the back between the panels. This requires a good deal of practice, and is very seldom done; but it can be done with most satisfactory results. The book should now have the leather on the back[163] stretched lengthways to make it cover the bands, but not stretched the other way, and the leather on the boards should lie perfectly flat and not be stretched at all. The leather on the fore-edge of the board is then rubbed with the hand on the outside, and then on to the edge, and then on the inside. The edge and the inside are smoothed down with a folder, and any excessive paste on the[164] inside squeezed out and removed. When the fore-edge of both boards has been turned in, the head and tail must also be turned in. A little paste is put on to that part of the leather that will turn in below the headband, and this portion is neatly tucked in between the boards and the back. The turned-in edge must lie quite evenly, or it will result in a ridge on the back. The leather is turned in on the two boards in the same way as described for the fore-edge, and the edge rubbed square with a folder. At fig. 64 is shown a convenient form of folder for covering. At the corners the leather must be pulled over as far as possible with two folders meeting at the extreme point, the object being to avoid a cut in the leather at the corner of the board. The folds so formed must be cut off with the scissors (see fig. 65, A), then one edge tucked neatly under the other, (B). Care must be taken throughout not to soil the edges of the leaves.

Take the pasted cover and check which side of the leather looks better. Lay the front of the book down precisely up to the marks that indicate the start of the turn-in. Then, pull the leather over the back and onto the other side, making sure to pull it gently, without dragging it. Stand the book on its fore-edge on a piece of waste paper, with the leather turned out on both sides, as shown at fig. 62, and tighten the bands using nickeled band nippers (see fig. 63). After this step, there will likely be some excess leather on the back. You can get rid of it by dragging the leather to the side; however, a much better approach, when the back is large enough, is to work the extra leather onto the back between the panels. This takes a lot of practice and isn’t done very often, but it can yield great results. The book should now have the leather on the back stretched lengthwise to cover the bands, but not stretched sideways, and the leather on the boards should lie completely flat without any stretch. The leather on the fore-edge of the board is then rubbed by hand on the outside, then onto the edge, and finally on the inside. Use a folder to smooth out the edge and inside, removing any excess paste on the inside. Once the fore-edge of both boards is turned in, you also need to turn in the head and tail. Apply a bit of paste to the part of the leather that will turn in below the headband, and neatly tuck this portion between the boards and the back. The turned-in edge must lie flat; otherwise, it’ll create a ridge on the back. Turn in the leather on the two boards in the same way as for the fore-edge, and rub the edge square with a folder. At fig. 64 is shown a handy folder for covering. At the corners, pull the leather over as far as possible using two folders meeting at the very tip to avoid cutting the leather at the corner of the board. Cut off the folds formed with scissors (see fig. 65, A), then tuck one edge neatly under the other, (B). Be careful throughout not to soil the edges of the leaves.

Fig. 63.

Fig. 63.

Fig. 63.

Fig. 64. Fig. 64.

At the headband the fold of leather,[165] pared thin for the purpose, must be squeezed together with a folder and pulled out a little to leave an even projection that can be turned over to form a head-cap. When both ends have been turned in, in this way, the boards must each be opened and pressed against a straight-edge held in the joint (fig. 66) to ensure that there is enough leather in the turn-in of the joint to allow the cover to open freely; and the leather of the turn-in at the head and tail must[166] be carefully smoothed down with a folder.

At the headband, the folded leather, [165] thinned out for the task, must be squeezed together with a folder and pulled a bit to create an even projection that can be flipped over to form a head-cap. Once both ends have been folded in this way, the boards need to be opened and pressed against a straight edge held at the joint (fig. 66) to make sure there's enough leather in the joint's turn-in for the cover to open freely; and the leather at the head and tail of the turn-in must [166] be carefully smoothed down using a folder.

Fig. 65.

Fig. 65.

Fig. 65.

Fig. 66.

Fig. 66.

Fig. 66.

Fig. 67.

Fig. 67.

Fig. 67.

The book may now be shut up if a waterproof sheet is put at each end to prevent the damp of the cover from cockling the paper. It must then be stood on its fore-edge and the bands again nipped up with a pair of nickeled band nippers, and the panels between the bands well pressed down with the band stick to cause the leather to stick at every point. A piece of thread is tied round the back from head to tail, squeezing the leather in the gap caused by the corners of the board having been cut off. The book is then turned up on end, resting the tail on a folder or anything that will keep the projecting leather for the head-cap from being prematurely flattened. The head-caps (fig. 67) must now be set. To do this the first finger of the left hand is placed behind it, and a sharp folder is pressed into the corners of the head-cap between the headband and the thread. The leather[167] is then tapped over the headband, and the whole turned over on the stone and rubbed at the back with a folder. This operation requires great nicety. The shape of head-cap is shown at fig. 67. The nice adjustment of head-caps and corners, although of no constructional value, are the points by which the forwarding of a book is generally valued.

The book can now be closed if a waterproof sheet is placed at each end to keep the moisture from warping the paper. It should then be positioned on its fore-edge, and the bands should be tightened again with a pair of nickel-plated band nippers. The panels between the bands should be pressed down with a band stick to ensure the leather adheres at every point. A piece of thread is tied around the spine from top to bottom, tightening the leather in the space created by the corners of the board being trimmed. The book is then set upright, resting the tail on a folder or something that will prevent the excess leather of the head-cap from getting flattened too soon. The head-caps (fig. 67) must now be shaped. To do this, place the first finger of the left hand behind it, and press a sharp folder into the corners of the head-cap, between the headband and the thread. The leather[167] is then tapped over the headband, and the whole thing is flipped over onto the stone and rubbed at the back with a folder. This step requires a lot of precision. The design of the head-cap is shown at fig. 67. The careful adjustment of head-caps and corners, while not structurally crucial, is what typically determines the quality of a book's binding.

Fig. 68.

Fig. 68.

Fig. 68.

If the book is a large one, it will be best to tie it up. The method of tying up is shown in fig. 68. The tying up cords will make marks at the side of the bands, that are not unpleasant on a large[168] book. If they are objected to, it is best to tie the book up for about half-an-hour, and then to untie it, and smooth out the marks with the band stick. Even with small books, if the leather seems inclined to give trouble, it is well to tie them up for a short time, then to untie them, to smooth out any marks or inequalities, and to tie them up again.

If the book is large, it's best to tie it up. The way to tie it is shown in fig. 68. The tying cords will leave marks on the sides of the bands, which aren’t too noticeable on a large [168] book. If these marks are an issue, you should tie the book up for about half an hour, then untie it and smooth out the marks with a band stick. Even with smaller books, if the leather seems like it might be a problem, it's a good idea to tie them up for a short period, then untie them, smooth out any marks or imperfections, and tie them up again.

MITRING CORNERS AND FILLING IN

A book that has been covered should be left under a light weight until the next day, with waterproof sheets between the damp cover and the end paper to prevent the sheets of the book from cockling through the damp. When the cover is thoroughly set the boards should be carefully opened, pressing them slightly to the joint to ensure a square and even joint. If, as is sometimes the case, the turn-in of the leather over the joint seems to be inclined to bind, the cover should be merely opened half-way, and the leather of the turns-in of the joint damped with a sponge, and left to soak for a short time, and then the cover can[169] usually be opened without any dragging. A section of a good joint is shown at fig. 69, A, and a bad one at B.

A book that’s been covered should be left under a light weight until the next day, with waterproof sheets placed between the damp cover and the endpaper to keep the pages of the book from warping due to the moisture. Once the cover is completely set, the boards should be gently opened, pressing them slightly at the joint to ensure a square and even connection. If, as can sometimes happen, the leather turn-in over the joint seems to be sticking, the cover should be opened halfway, and the leather of the turn-ins at the joint dampened with a sponge, then left to soak for a short time. After that, the cover can usually be opened without any pulling. A good joint is shown at fig. 69, A, and a bad one at B.

Fig. 69.

Fig. 69.

Fig. 69.

Fig. 70.

Fig. 70.

Fig. 70.

The next operation will be to fill in the board and mitre the corners. To fill in the boards, a piece of paper as thick as the turn-in of the leather (engineer’s cartridge paper answers very well) should be cut a little smaller than the board, with one edge cut straight; then with the straight edge adjusted to the back of the board, and a weight placed on the centre, the paper is marked round with dividers set to the intended width of the turn-in of the leather. Then with a sharp knife, paper and leather may be cut through together. The paper should then be marked to show its position on the board, and the ragged edges of the leather trimmed off. This will leave an even margin of leather on three sides of the inside of the board, and a piece of paper that will exactly fit the remaining space. The corners must next be mitred.[170] To do this, both thicknesses of leather are cut through from the corner of the board to the corner of the inside margin. The knife should be held slightly slanting to make a cut, as shown at fig. 70. The corners should then be thoroughly damped, and the overlapping leather from both sides removed, leaving what should be a neat and straight join. If the leather at the extreme corner should prove to be, as is often the case, too thick to turn in neatly, the corners should be opened out and the leather pared against the thumb nail, and then well pasted and turned back again. The extreme corner may be slightly tapped on the stone with a hammer, and the sides rubbed with a folder, to ensure squareness and sharpness. When all four corners have been mitred, the filling in papers can be pasted in. As they will probably stretch a little with the paste, it will be well to cut off a slight shaving, and they should then fit exactly. When the boards have been filled in and well rubbed[171] down, the book should be left for some hours with the boards standing open to enable the filling-in papers to draw the boards slightly inwards to overcome the pull of the leather.

The next step is to fill in the boards and miter the corners. To fill the boards, cut a piece of paper that’s as thick as the turn-in of the leather (engineer's cartridge paper works great) slightly smaller than the board, with one edge cut straight. Then, with the straight edge aligned with the back of the board and a weight placed in the center, use dividers set to the intended width of the leather's turn-in to mark around the paper. Next, use a sharp knife to cut through the paper and leather together. Mark the paper to indicate its position on the board and trim any ragged edges of the leather. This will leave even margins of leather on three sides of the inside of the board, with a piece of paper that fits perfectly in the remaining space. The corners must be mitered next.[170] To do this, cut through both thicknesses of leather from the corner of the board to the corner of the inside margin. Hold the knife at a slight angle to make the cut, as shown at fig. 70. Dampen the corners thoroughly, then remove the overlapping leather from both sides, leaving a neat and straight joint. If the leather at the corner is too thick to fold neatly, open up the corners and thin the leather using your thumbnail, then paste it well and fold it back. You can lightly tap the extreme corner on a stone with a hammer and rub the sides with a folder to ensure they are square and sharp. Once all four corners are mitered, you can paste in the filling papers. Since they may stretch a bit with the paste, it’s good to trim a little off, so they fit perfectly. Once the boards are filled in and well rubbed[171] down, leave the book open for a few hours to allow the filling papers to pull the boards slightly inward and counteract the pull of the leather.

In cases where there are leather joints the operation is as follows: The waste end paper is removed, and the edge of the board and joint carefully cleaned from glue and all irregularities, and if, as is most likely, it is curved from the pull of the leather, the board must be tapped or ironed down until it is perfectly straight. If there is difficulty in making the board lie straight along the joint before pasting down, it will be well first to fill in with a well pasted and stretched thin paper, which, if the boards are left open, will draw them inwards. If the leather joint is pasted down while the board is curved, the result will be a most unsightly projection on the outside. When the joint has been cleaned out, and the board made to lie flat, the leather should be pasted down and mitred. The whole depth of the turn-in of the covering leather in the joint must not be removed, or it will be unduly weakened. The mitring line should not come from the extreme corner,[172] but rather farther down, and there it is well to leave a certain amount of overlap in the joint, for which purpose the edge of the turn-in leather and the edge of the leather joint should be pared thin. After pasting down the leather joints the boards should be left open till they are dry (see fig. 71). The turn-in and leather joint are then trimmed out, leaving an even margin of leather all round the inside of the[173] board, and the panel in the centre filled in with a piece of thick paper.

In cases where there are leather joints, the process is as follows: Remove the waste endpaper and carefully clean the edge of the board and joint from glue and any irregularities. If the board is likely curved from the tension of the leather, tap or iron it down until it is perfectly straight. If it's difficult to make the board lie flat along the joint before gluing, it's a good idea to first fill in with a well-pasted and stretched thin paper, which, if the boards are left open, will pull them inward. If the leather joint is glued down while the board is curved, it will result in an unsightly bulge on the outside. Once the joint is cleaned and the board is lying flat, paste down the leather and miter it. Do not remove the entire depth of the turn-in of the covering leather at the joint, or it will be too weak. The mitering line should not start from the extreme corner but rather slightly lower down, where it’s advisable to leave some overlap in the joint. For this, thin the edges of the turn-in leather and the edge of the leather joint. After pasting down the leather joints, leave the boards open until they dry (see fig. 71). The turn-in and leather joint are then trimmed, leaving an even margin of leather around the inside of the board, and the panel in the center filled with a piece of thick paper.

Fig. 71.

Fig. 71.

Fig. 71.

When corners and filling in are dry, the boards may be shut up, and the book is ready for finishing.

When the corners and filling are dry, the boards can be closed up, and the book is ready for finishing.

It is a common practice to wash up the covers of books that have become stained with a solution of oxalic acid in water. This is a dangerous thing to do, and is likely to seriously injure the leather. Leather, when damp, must not be brought in contact with iron or steel tools, or it may be badly stained.

It’s common to clean the covers of books that have gotten stained with a mixture of oxalic acid and water. This is risky and can seriously damage the leather. When leather is damp, it shouldn’t come into contact with iron or steel tools, or it could get badly stained.

CHAPTER XIII

Library Binding—Binding very Thin Books—Scrap-Books—Binding on Vellum—Books covered with Embroidery

Library Binding—Binding very Thin Books—Scrapbooks—Binding on Vellum—Books Covered with Embroidery

LIBRARY BINDING
Specifications III and IV

To produce cheaper bindings, as must be done in the case of large libraries, some alteration of design is necessary. Appearance must to some extent be sacrificed to strength and durability, and not, as is too[174] often the case, strength and durability sacrificed to appearance. The essentials of any good binding are, that the sections should be sound in themselves, and that there should be no plates or odd sheets “pasted on,” or anything that would prevent any leaf from opening right to the back; the sewing must be thoroughly sound; the sewing materials of good quality; the slips firmly attached to the boards; and the leather fairly thick and of a durable kind, although for the sake of cheapness it may be necessary to use skins with flaws on the surface. Such flawed skins cost half, or less than half, the price of perfect skins, and surface flaws do not injure the strength of the leather. By sewing on tape, great flexibility of the back is obtained, and much time, and consequent expense, in covering is saved. By using a French joint much thicker leather than usual can be used, with corresponding gain in strength.

To produce cheaper bindings, especially for large libraries, some changes in design are necessary. You have to sacrifice some appearance for strength and durability, rather than the other way around, which happens too often. The key aspects of a good binding are that the sections should be sturdy on their own and that there should be no plates or loose sheets “pasted on” or anything that would stop any page from opening all the way to the back. The sewing must be solid; the sewing materials should be of good quality; the slips need to be securely attached to the boards; and the leather should be reasonably thick and durable, though for the sake of cost, it may be necessary to use skins with surface flaws. These flawed skins can cost half or even less than half the price of perfect ones, and such flaws don’t affect the leather's strength. Using tape for sewing allows for great flexibility in the spine and saves a lot of time, and therefore money, in the covering process. By employing a French joint, you can use much thicker leather than usual, which significantly increases strength.

To bind an octavo or smaller book according to the specification given (III, page 307); first make all sections sound, and guard all plates or maps. Make end papers with zigzags. After the sections have been thoroughly pressed, the book will be ready[175] for marking up and sewing. In marking up for sewing on tapes, two marks will be necessary for each tape. When there are several books of the same size to be sewn, they may be placed one above the other in the sewing press, and sewn on to the same tapes. It will be found that the volumes when sewn can easily be slid along the tapes, which must be long enough to provide sufficient for the slips of each. The split boards may be “made” of a thin black mill-board with a thicker straw-board. To “make” a pair of split boards the pieces of straw-and mill-board large enough to make the two are got out, and the straw-board well glued, except in the centre, which should previously be covered with a strip of thin mill-board or tin about four inches wide. The strip is then removed, and the thin black board laid on the glued straw-board and nipped in the press. When dry, the made board is cut down the centre, which will leave two boards glued together all over except for two inches on one side of each. The boards then are squared to the book in a mill-board machine. The back of the book is glued up, and in the ordinary way rounded and backed. The edges may be[176] cut with a guillotine. The ends of the tapes are glued on the waste end paper, which should be cut off about an inch and a half from the back. The split boards are then opened and glued, and the waste end papers with slips attached are placed in them (see fig. 72), and the book nipped in the press. To form a “French joint” the boards should be kept about an eighth of an inch from the back of the book. The book is then ready for covering. The leather must not be pared too thin, as the French joint will give plenty of play and allow the use of much thicker leather than usual. If time and money can be spared, headbands can be worked, but they are not absolutely necessary, and a piece of string may be inserted into the turning of the leather at head and tail in the place of them. When the book is[177] covered, a piece of string should be tied round the joints, and the whole given a nip in the press. The corners of the boards should be protected by small tips of vellum or parchment. The sides may be covered with good paper, which will wear quite as well as cloth, look better, and cost less.

To bind an octavo or smaller book based on the provided specifications (III, page 307), start by ensuring all sections are secure and protecting all plates or maps. Create end papers with zigzags. Once the sections have been thoroughly pressed, the book will be ready[175] for marking and sewing. For sewing on tapes, you'll need two marks for each tape. If you have several books of the same size to sew, stack them in the sewing press and sew them onto the same tapes. You'll find that the sewn volumes can easily slide along the tapes, which should be long enough for the slips. The split boards can be made from a thin black mill-board paired with a thicker straw-board. To make a set of split boards, cut pieces of straw and mill board large enough for both. Glue the straw board well, except at the center, which should be covered with a strip of thin mill board or tin about four inches wide. Remove the strip, lay the thin black board on the glued straw board, and press it. Once dry, cut the made board down the center, leaving two boards glued together everywhere except for two inches on one side of each. Then, square the boards to the book using a mill-board machine. Glue up the back of the book and round and back it in the usual way. The edges can be[176] cut with a guillotine. The ends of the tapes are glued to the waste end paper, which should be cut about an inch and a half from the back. Open the split boards and glue them, placing the waste end papers with the attached slips inside them (see fig. 72), and nip the book in the press. To form a “French joint,” keep the boards about an eighth of an inch from the back. The book is now ready for covering. The leather shouldn’t be made too thin, as the French joint will allow for some flexibility and thicker leather than usual can be used. If time and resources permit, headbands can be added, but they aren't essential; a piece of string can be inserted into the leather at the head and tail in their place. Once the book is[177] covered, tie a piece of string around the joints and nip everything in the press. Protect the corners of the boards with small tips of vellum or parchment. The sides can be covered with good paper, which will wear as well as cloth, look better, and cost less.

Fig. 72.

Fig. 72.

Fig. 72.

The lettering of library books is very important (see Chapter XV).

The labeling of library books is very important (see Chapter XV).

BINDING VERY THIN BOOKS

Books consisting of only one section may be bound as follows:—A sheet of paper to match the book, and two coloured sheets for end papers, are folded round the section, and a “waste” paper put over all. A strip of linen is pasted to the back of the waste, and the whole sewn together by stitching through the fold. The waste may be cut off and inserted with the linen in a split board, as for library bindings. The back edges of the board should be filed thin, and should not be placed quite up to the back, to allow for a little play in the joints.

Books that have only one section can be bound like this: A matching sheet of paper and two colored sheets for end papers are wrapped around the section, and a scrap piece of paper covers everything. A strip of linen is glued to the back of the scrap, and everything is sewn together by stitching through the fold. The scrap can be cut off and placed with the linen in a split board, similar to library bindings. The back edges of the board should be thinned out and shouldn’t be positioned all the way to the back to allow for some movement in the joints.

The leather is put on in the ordinary[178] way, except that the linen at the head and tail must be slit a little to allow for the turn in. If waterproof sheets are first inserted, the ends may be pasted, the boards shut, and the book nipped in the press. By substituting a piece of thin leather for the outside coloured paper, a leather joint can be made.

The leather is applied in the usual[178] way, but the linen at the top and bottom needs to be cut a bit to fit the turn-in. If waterproof sheets are added first, the ends can be glued, the boards closed, and the book pressed. By replacing the outer colored paper with a piece of thin leather, a leather joint can be created.

SCRAP-BOOKS

Scrap-books, into which autograph letters, sketches, or other papers can be pasted, may be made as follows:—Enough paper of good quality is folded up to the size desired, and pieces of the same paper, of the same height, and about two inches wide, are folded down the centre and inserted between the backs of the larger sheets, as shown at fig. 73. It is best not to insert these smaller pieces in the centre of the section, as they would be troublesome in sewing. If, after sewing, the book is filled up with waste paper laid between the leaves, it will make it manageable while being forwarded.

Scrapbooks, where you can stick in autograph letters, sketches, or other papers, can be made like this: Get enough good-quality paper folded to the desired size, and cut pieces of the same paper to the same height and about two inches wide. Fold these smaller pieces in half and place them between the larger sheets, as shown at fig. 73. It's better not to place these smaller pieces in the center of the section, as they can be a hassle when sewing. After sewing, fill the book with waste paper laid between the pages to keep it manageable while being sent off.

It is best to use a rather darkly-toned or coloured paper, as, if a quite white paper is used, any letters or papers that[179] have become soiled, will look unduly dirty.

It’s better to use a darker-colored paper because if you use bright white paper, any letters or documents that have gotten dirty will look even more stained.

Fig. 73.

Fig. 73.

Fig. 73.

Autograph letters may be mounted in the following ways:—If the letter is written upon both sides of a single leaf, it may be either “inlaid,” or guarded, as shown at fig. 74, A. A letter on a folded sheet of notepaper should have the folds strengthened with a guard of strong thin paper, and be attached by a guard made, as shown at fig. 74, B; or if on very heavy paper, by a double guard, as shown at fig. 74, C. Torn edges of letters may be strengthened with thin Japanese paper.

Autograph letters can be mounted in the following ways:—If the letter is written on both sides of a single sheet, it can be either “inlaid” or guarded, as shown at fig. 74, A. A letter on a folded sheet of notepaper should have the folds reinforced with a guard of sturdy thin paper and attached by a guard made, as shown at fig. 74, B; or if on very heavy paper, by a double guard, as shown at fig. 74, C. Torn edges of letters can be reinforced with thin Japanese paper.

Fig. 74.

Fig. 74.

Fig. 74.

Thin paper, written or printed only on one side, may be mounted on a page of the book. It is better to attach these by[180] their extreme edges only, as if pasted down all over they may cause the leaves to curl up.

Thin paper, written or printed only on one side, can be attached to a page of the book. It's better to secure these by[180] their outer edges only, because if they are glued down completely, they might cause the pages to curl.

Letters or any writing or drawing in lead pencil should be fixed with size before being inserted.

Letters or any writing or drawing in pencil should be secured with a fixative before being added.

Silver prints of photographs are best mounted with some very quick-drying paste, such as that sold for the purpose by the photographic dealers. If the leaf on which they are mounted is slightly damped before the photograph is pasted down, it will be less likely to cockle. If this is done, waterproof sheets should be put on each side of the leaf while it dries. If photographs are attached by the edges only, they will not be so liable to draw the paper on which they are mounted; but sometimes they will not lie flat themselves.

Silver prints of photographs are best mounted with a fast-drying paste, like the ones sold specifically for this purpose by photography suppliers. If the page where they’re mounted is lightly dampened before the photo is pasted down, it’s less likely to warp. If you do this, waterproof sheets should be placed on either side of the page while it dries. If the photographs are attached only by their edges, they are less likely to pull on the paper they’re mounted on; however, they may not lie flat themselves.

In cases where very thick letters or papers have to be pasted in, a few more leaves of the book should be cut out, to make a corresponding thickness at the back.

In situations where really thick letters or papers need to be pasted in, a few more pages of the book should be removed to match the thickness in the back.

VELLUM BINDINGS

Vellum covers may be limp without boards, and merely held in place by the[181] slips being laced through them, or they may be pasted down on boards in much the same way as leather.

Vellum covers can be flexible without boards, and just secured by the[181] slips threaded through them, or they can be glued onto boards in a similar way to leather.

If the edges of a book for limp vellum binding are to be trimmed or gilt, that should be done before sewing. For the ends a folded piece of thin vellum may replace the paste-down paper. The sewing should be on strips of vellum. The back is left square after glueing, and headbands are worked as for leather binding, or may be worked on strips of leather, with ends left long enough to lace into the vellum (see p. 151). The back and headbands are lined with leather, and the book is ready for the cover.

If you're trimming or gilding the edges of a book with limp vellum binding, you should do that before sewing. For the ends, a folded piece of thin vellum can replace the paste-down paper. The sewing should be done on strips of vellum. The back remains square after gluing, and headbands are worked like they are for leather binding or can be made from strips of leather, with the ends left long enough to lace into the vellum (see p. 151). The back and headbands are lined with leather, and then the book is ready for the cover.

A piece of vellum should be cut out large enough to cover the book, and to leave a margin of an inch and a half all round. This is marked with a folder on the under side, as shown at fig. 75, A. Spaces 1 and 2 are the size of the sides of the book with surrounding squares; space 3 is the width of the back, and space 4 the width for the overlaps on the fore-edge. The corners are cut, as shown at 5, and the edges are folded over, as at B. The overlap 4 is then turned over, and the back folded, as at C. The slips are now[182] laced through slits made in the vellum.

A piece of vellum should be cut out big enough to cover the book and leave a margin of one and a half inches all around. This is marked with a folder on the underside, as shown at fig. 75, A. Spaces 1 and 2 are the sizes of the sides of the book with surrounding squares; space 3 is the width of the spine, and space 4 is the width for the overlaps on the front edge. The corners are cut, as shown at 5, and the edges are folded over, as at B. The overlap 4 is then turned over, and the spine is folded, as at C. The slips are now[182] laced through slits made in the vellum.

Fig. 75.

Fig. 75.

Fig. 75.

A piece of loose, toned paper may be put[183] inside the cover to prevent any marks on the book from showing through; and pieces of silk ribbon of good quality are laced in as shown, going through both cover and vellum ends, if there are any, and are left with ends long enough to tie (see fig. 76).

A piece of loose, quality paper can be placed inside the cover to stop any marks on the book from showing through. Good quality silk ribbons are threaded in as shown, going through both the cover and any vellum ends, if there are any, and are left with ends long enough to tie (see fig. 76).

Fig. 76.

Fig. 76.

Fig. 76.

If paper ends are used, the silk tape need only be laced through the cover, and the end paper pasted over it on the inside.

If you use paper ends, just lace the silk tape through the cover, and then paste the end paper over it on the inside.

Another simple way of keeping a vellum book shut is shown at fig. 77. A bead is attached to a piece of gut laced into the vellum, and a loop of catgut is laced in the other side, and looped over the bead as shown.

Another straightforward method for keeping a vellum book closed is shown at fig. 77. A bead is attached to a piece of gut threaded into the vellum, and a loop of catgut is threaded on the other side, then looped over the bead as shown.

If the book is to have stiff boards, and[184] the vellum is to be pasted to them, it is best to sew the sections on tapes or vellum slips, to back the book as for leather, and to insert the ends of the slips in a split board, leaving a French joint, as described for library bindings. Vellum is very stiff, and, if it is pasted directly to the back, the book would be hard to open. It is best in this case to use what is known as a hollow back.

If the book is going to have stiff covers, and[184] the vellum is going to be glued to them, it's best to sew the sections onto tapes or vellum strips, back the book like you would for leather, and insert the ends of the strips into a split board, leaving a French joint, as explained for library bindings. Vellum is quite stiff, and if it is glued directly to the spine, the book would be difficult to open. In this case, it's better to use what’s called a hollow back.

Fig. 77.

Fig. 77.

Fig. 77.

To make a hollow back, a piece of stout paper is taken which measures once the length of the back and three times the width. This is folded in three. The centre portion is glued to the back and well rubbed down, and the overlapping edges turned back and glued one to the other (fig. 78). This will leave a flat, hollow casing, formed by the single paper glued to the back of the book and the double paper to which the vellum may be attached. Or it is better to line up the back with leather, and to place a piece of thick paper the size of the back on to the pasted vellum where the back will be when the book is covered.

To create a hollow back, take a sturdy piece of paper that is the same length as the back and three times its width. Fold it into thirds. Glue the center section to the back and press it down firmly, then fold the overlapping edges back and glue them together (fig. 78). This will result in a flat, hollow casing made from the single layer of paper glued to the book's back and the double layer that the vellum can be attached to. Alternatively, it’s better to line the back with leather and place a piece of thick paper, the size of the back, onto the glued vellum where the back will sit once the book is covered.

Fig. 78.

Fig. 78.

Fig. 78.

When the book is ready for covering, the vellum should be cut out and lined with paper. In lining vellum the paste[185] must be free from lumps, and great care must be taken not to leave brush marks. To avoid this, when the lining paper has been pasted it can be laid, paste downwards, on a piece of waste paper and quickly pulled up again; this should remove surplus paste and get rid of any marks left by the brush. When the vellum has been lined with paper, it should be given a light nip in the press between blotting-paper, and while still damp it is pasted, the book covered, and the corners mitred. A piece of thin string is tied round the head-caps and pressed into the French joint.

When the book is ready for covering, the vellum should be cut out and lined with paper. When lining the vellum, the paste[185] must be free of lumps, and you should be careful not to leave any brush marks. To prevent this, once the lining paper is pasted, you can lay it, paste side down, on a piece of scrap paper and quickly lift it up again; this will remove excess paste and eliminate any marks left by the brush. After the vellum has been lined with paper, it should be lightly pressed between blotting paper, and while it's still damp, it gets pasted, the book is covered, and the corners are mitered. A piece of thin string is tied around the head caps and pressed into the French joint.

Waterproof sheets are placed inside the covers, and the book then nipped in the press and left to dry under a light weight. If the vellum is very stiff and difficult to turn in, it may be moistened with a little warm water to soften it.

Waterproof sheets are placed inside the covers, and then the book is pressed and left to dry under some weight. If the vellum is very stiff and hard to turn, it can be dampened with a bit of warm water to soften it.

Books with raised bands have sometimes been covered with vellum, but the back[186] becomes so stiff and hard, that this method, though it looks well enough, cannot be recommended. Vellum is a durable material, and can be had of good quality, but it is so easily influenced by changes of temperature, that it is rather an unsuitable material for most bindings.

Books with raised bands have sometimes been covered with vellum, but the spine becomes so stiff and hard that this method, although it looks fine, can't be recommended. Vellum is a durable material and can be found in good quality, but it's easily affected by temperature changes, making it a rather unsuitable choice for most bindings.

BOOKS COVERED WITH EMBROIDERY AND WOVEN MATERIAL

To cover a book with embroidered material bind it with split boards, a French joint, and a hollow back, as described for vellum (see fig. 78). Glue the back of the book with thin glue well worked up, and turning in the head and tail of the embroidery, put the book down on it so that the back will come exactly in the right place. Press down the embroidery with the hand to make sure that it sticks. When it is firmly attached to the back, first one board and then the other should be glued, and the embroidery laid down on it. Lastly, the edges are glued and stuck down on the inside of the board, and the corners mitred. Velvet or any other thick material can be put down in the same way. For very thin material[187] that the glue would penetrate and soil, the cover should be left loose, and only attached where it turns in. A loose lining of good paper may be put between the book and the cover.

To cover a book with embroidered material, bind it with split boards, a French joint, and a hollow back, just like you would for vellum (see fig. 78). Apply thin glue to the back of the book, making sure it’s well mixed, and while folding in the top and bottom of the embroidery, place the book down so the back aligns perfectly. Press down on the embroidery by hand to ensure it adheres. Once it's securely attached to the back, glue one board, then the other, and lay the embroidery on top. Finally, glue the edges down on the inside of the board, and miter the corners. You can use velvet or any other thick material in the same manner. For very thin material[187] that the glue might penetrate and stain, keep the cover loose and only attach it where it folds in. A loose lining of quality paper can be placed between the book and the cover.

The inside corners where the cover has been cut should be neatly sewn up. The edges of the boards and head-caps may be protected all round with some edging worked in metal thread. It is well in embroidering book covers to arrange for some portion of the pattern to be of raised metal stitches, forming bosses that will protect the surface from wear.

The inside corners where the cover has been cut should be neatly sewn up. The edges of the boards and head-caps can be protected all around with some metal thread edging. When embroidering book covers, it's a good idea to include some raised metal stitches in the pattern, creating bosses that will protect the surface from wear.

Should any glue chance to get on the surface, the cover should be held in the steam of a kettle and the glue wiped off, and the cover again steamed.

If any glue accidentally gets on the surface, hold the cover in the steam of a kettle, wipe off the glue, and steam the cover again.

CHAPTER XIV[188]

Decoration—Tools—Finishing—Tooling on Vellum—Inlaying on Leather

Decoration—Tools—Finishing—Tooling on Vellum—Inlaying on Leather

DECORATION OF BINDING—TOOLS

The most usual, and perhaps the most characteristic, way of decorating book covers is by “tooling.” Tooling is the impression of heated (finishing) tools. Finishing tools are stamps of metal that have a device cut on the face, and are held in wooden handles (fig. 79).

The most common, and maybe the most distinctive, way to decorate book covers is through “tooling.” Tooling is the impression made by heated (finishing) tools. Finishing tools are metal stamps that have a design cut into the face, and are attached to wooden handles (fig. 79).

Fig. 79.

Fig. 79.

Fig. 79.

Tooling may either be blind tooling, that is, a simple impression of the hot tools, or gold tooling, in which the impression of the tool is left in gold on the leather.

Tooling can be either blind tooling, which is just a basic impression of the heated tools, or gold tooling, where the impression of the tool is left in gold on the leather.

Tools for blind tooling are best “die-sunk,” that is, cut like a seal. The “sunk” part of the face of the tool, which may be more or less modelled, forms the pattern, and the higher part[189] depresses the leather to form a ground. In tools for gold tooling, the surface of the tool gives the pattern.

Tools for blind tooling are best “die-sunk,” meaning they’re shaped like a seal. The “sunk” part of the tool's face, which can be shaped in various ways, creates the pattern, while the raised part[189] presses down the leather to create a base. In tools for gold tooling, the tool’s surface provides the pattern.

Tools may be either complex or simple in design, that is to say, each tool may form a complete design with enclosing border, as the lower ones on page 323, or it may be only one element of a design, as at fig. 100. Lines may be run with a fillet (see fig. 88), or made with gouges or pallets.

Tools can be either complex or simple in their design. Each tool can either form a complete design with an enclosing border, like the lower ones on page 323, or it may just be one element of a design, as seen at fig. 100. Lines can be created with a fillet (see fig. 88) or made using gouges or pallets.

Gouges are curved line tools. They are made in sets of arcs of concentric circles (see fig. 80, A). The portion of the curves cut off by the dotted line C will make a second set with flatter curves. Gouges are used for tooling curved lines.

Gouges are curved line tools. They come in sets of arcs of concentric circles (see fig. 80, A). The section of the curves cut off by the dotted line C will create a second set with flatter curves. Gouges are used for shaping curved lines.

Fig. 80.

Fig. 80.

Fig. 80.

A “pallet” may be described as a segment of a roll or fillet set in a handle, and[190] used chiefly for putting lines or other ornaments across the backs of books (see fig. 81). A set of one-line pallets is shown at fig. 80, B.

A “pallet” is a piece of a roll or fillet attached to a handle, and[190] it's mainly used for applying lines or other decorations on the spines of books (see fig. 81). A collection of single-line pallets is displayed at fig. 80, B.

Fillets are cut with two or more lines on the edge. Although the use of double-line fillets saves time, I have found that a few single-line fillets with edges of different gauges are sufficient for running all straight lines, and that the advantage of being able to alter the distances between any parallel lines is ample compensation for the extra trouble involved by their use. In addition to the rigid stamps, an endless pattern for either blind or gold tooling may be engraved on the circumference of a roll, and impressed on the leather by wheeling.

Fillets are created with two or more lines along the edge. While using double-line fillets can save time, I've found that a few single-line fillets with edges of different widths are enough for drawing all straight lines. The benefit of adjusting the distance between any parallel lines makes up for the extra effort needed to use them. Besides the rigid stamps, you can engrave an endless pattern for either blind or gold tooling on the edge of a roll, which can then be impressed on the leather by wheeling.

Fig. 81.

Fig. 81.

Fig. 81.

The use of a roll in finishing dates from the end of the fifteenth century, and some satisfactory bindings were decorated with its aid. The ease with which it can be used has led in modern times to its abuse, and I hardly know of a single instance of a modern binding on which rolls have been used for the decoration with satisfactory results. The gain in time and trouble is at the expense of freedom and life in the[191] design; and for extra binding it is better to build up a pattern out of small tools of simple design, which can be arranged in endless variety, than to use rolls.

The use of a roll in finishing goes back to the late fifteenth century, and some nice bindings were enhanced with its help. However, the ease of using it has led to its misuse in recent times, and I can hardly think of a single modern binding where rolls were used for decoration with satisfying results. The convenience comes at the cost of freedom and vibrancy in the[191] design; for additional binding, it's better to create a pattern using small, simple design tools that can be arranged in countless ways instead of relying on rolls.

Tools for hand-tooling must not be too large, or it will be impossible to obtain clear impressions. One inch square for blind tools, or three-quarters of an inch for gold tools, is about the maximum size for use with any certainty and comfort. Tools much larger than this have to be worked with the aid of a press, and are called blocks.

Tools for hand-tooling shouldn't be too big, or it will be tough to get clear impressions. About one inch square for blind tools, or three-quarters of an inch for gold tools, is the maximum size for confident and comfortable use. Tools much larger than this need a press to be used and are referred to as blocks.

FINISHING

The first thing the finisher does to a book is to go over the back with a polisher and smooth out any irregularities.

The first thing the finisher does to a book is go over the spine with a polisher and smooth out any flaws.

Two forms of polisher are shown at fig. 82. The lower one is suitable for polishing backs and inside margins, and the upper for sides. Polishers must be used warm, but not too hot, or the leather may be scorched, and they must be kept moving on the leather. Before using they should be rubbed bright on a piece of the finest emery paper, and polished on a piece of leather. New[192] polishers often have sharp edges that would mark the leather. These must be rubbed down with files and emery-paper.

Two types of polishers are shown at fig. 82. The lower one is good for polishing backs and inside margins, while the upper one is for sides. Polishers should be used warm, but not too hot, or the leather might get scorched, and they need to be kept moving over the leather. Before using them, they should be rubbed bright on a piece of the finest emery paper and polished on a piece of leather. New[192] polishers often have sharp edges that can scratch the leather. These edges need to be smoothed down with files and emery paper.

Leathers with a prominent grained surface, such as morocco, seal or pig skin, may either have the grain rough or crushed flat. If there is to be much finishing, the grain had better be crushed, but for large books that are to have only a small amount of finishing, the grain is best left unflattened.

Leathers with a noticeable grain, like morocco, seal, or pigskin, can have either a rough or flattened texture. If a lot of finishing is involved, it's better for the grain to be flattened. However, for large books that will have just a little finishing, it’s best to leave the grain intact.

Fig. 82.

Fig. 82.

Fig. 82.

If the grain of the leather is to be “crushed,” it may be done at this stage. To do this, one board at a time is damped with a sponge and put in the standing-press, with a pressing plate on the grained side, and a pad of blotting-paper, or some such yielding substance, on the other (see fig. 83). The press is then screwed up tight, and the board left for a short[193] time. For some leathers this operation is best done after the binding has been finished and varnished, in which case, of course, the boards cannot be damped before pressing. No flexibly sewn book should be subject to great pressure after it has been covered, or the leather on the back may crinkle up and become detached.

If the grain of the leather needs to be "crushed," this can be done at this stage. To do this, take one board at a time, dampen it with a sponge, and place it in the standing press, with a pressing plate on the grained side and a pad of blotting paper or some other soft material on the opposite side (see fig. 83). Then, tighten the press and leave the board for a short[193] time. For some types of leather, it's better to do this operation after the binding has been completed and varnished, which means that the boards cannot be dampened before pressing. No flexibly sewn book should undergo excessive pressure after it has been covered, or the leather on the spine may crinkle and come loose.

The next thing will be to decide what lettering and what decoration, if any, is to be put on the volume. The lettering should be made out first (see page 215). If the book is to be at all elaborately decorated, paper patterns must be made out, as described in Chapter XVI.

The next thing to do is decide what lettering and decoration, if any, should be included on the book. The lettering should be finalized first (see page 215). If the book is going to have elaborate decoration, paper patterns need to be created, as outlined in Chapter XVI.

Fig. 83.

Fig. 83.

Fig. 83.

For tooling the back, the book is held in the finishing press between a pair of backing boards lined with leather (see fig. 84), and the paper pattern put across the back, with the ends either slightly pasted to the backing boards, or caught between them and the book.

For tooling the back, the book is placed in the finishing press between two backing boards covered with leather (see fig. 84), and the paper pattern is laid across the back, with the ends either lightly glued to the backing boards or held between them and the book.

For the sides, the pattern is very slightly pasted on to the leather at the four[194] corners. The book is then put in the finishing press, with the board to be tooled open and flat on the cheek of the press, unless the book is a large one, when it is easier to tool the sides out of the press.

For the sides, the pattern is lightly glued onto the leather at the four[194] corners. The book is then placed in the finishing press, with the board to be tooled facing open and flat on the side of the press, unless the book is large, in which case it’s easier to tool the sides outside of the press.

Fig. 84.

Fig. 84.

Fig. 84.

The selected tools, which should be ready on the stove (see fig. 85), are one at a time cooled on a wet pad, and then pressed in their former impressions upon the paper. The degree of heat required varies a good deal with the leather used, and will only be learned by experience. It is better to have the tool too cool than[195] too hot, as it is easy to deepen impressions after the paper is removed; but if they are already too deep, or are burnt, it will be impossible to finish clearly. Generally speaking, tools should hiss very slightly when put on the cooling pad. In cooling, care must be taken to put the shank of the tools on to the wet pad, as, if the end[196] only is cooled, the heat is apt to run down again, and the tool will still be too hot.

The selected tools, which should be ready on the stove (see fig. 85), are cooled one at a time on a wet pad, and then pressed into their original impressions on the paper. The amount of heat needed varies quite a bit depending on the leather used, and you'll only learn this through experience. It's better to have the tool too cool than too hot, as it's easy to make impressions deeper after the paper is removed; but if they are already too deep or burnt, it will be impossible to finish clearly. Generally speaking, tools should make a very slight hissing sound when placed on the cooling pad. When cooling, be careful to put the shank of the tools onto the wet pad, since if only the end is cooled, the heat can run down again, and the tool will still be too hot.

Fig. 85.—Finishing Stove

Fig. 85.—Finishing Stove

Finishing Oven

Before removing the paper, one corner at a time should be lifted up, and the leather examined to see that no part of the pattern has been missed.

Before taking off the paper, lift up one corner at a time and check the leather to make sure no part of the pattern has been overlooked.

In some patterns where the design is close, or in which the background is dotted in, it will not be necessary to blind in every leaf and dot through the paper. If the lines with perhaps the terminal leaves are blinded in, the rest can be better worked directly through the gold. This method implies the “glairing in” of the whole surface. It is not suitable for open patterns, where the glaire might show on the surface of the leather.

In some designs where the pattern is close together, or where the background is dotted, it won't be necessary to cover every leaf and dot on the paper. If the lines, especially the edge leaves, are covered, the rest can be better worked directly through the gold. This method involves “glairing in” the entire surface. It isn't suitable for open patterns, where the gloss might show on the surface of the leather.

If the book is only to have lines, or some simple straight line pattern, it is often easier to mark it up without the paper, with a straight-edge and folder. In panelling a back, the side lines of all the panels should be marked in at the same time with a folder, working against the straight-edge, held firmly at the side of the back. If the panels are worked separately, it is difficult to get the side lines squarely above each other. The lines at[197] the top and bottom of the panel may be marked in with a folder, guided by a piece of stiff vellum held squarely across the back. If there are lines to be run round the board, they can be marked in with a pair of dividers guided by the edge of the board, except those at the back. These must be measured from the fore-edge of the board and run in with straight-edge and folder.

If the book is just going to have lines or a simple straight line pattern, it's usually easier to mark it up without using paper, with a straightedge and folder. When paneling a back, the side lines of all the panels should be marked in at once with a folder, working against the straightedge that's held firmly at the side of the back. If the panels are done separately, it’s hard to align the side lines perfectly on top of each other. The lines at[197]the top and bottom of the panel can be marked with a folder, guided by a piece of stiff vellum held squarely across the back. If there are lines to be drawn around the board, they can be marked with a pair of dividers along the edge of the board, except for those at the back. Those need to be measured from the fore-edge of the board and drawn in with a straightedge and folder.

When straight lines occur in patterns that are blinded through the paper, it will be enough if the ends only are marked through with a small piece of straight line, and the lines completed with straight-edge and folder, after the paper has been removed.

When straight lines appear in patterns that are obscured by the paper, it’s sufficient to mark just the ends with a small straight line, and then finish the lines with a straight edge and folder after the paper has been taken away.

Unless the finisher has had considerable experience, it is best to deepen all folder lines by going over them in blind with a fillet or piece of straight line.

Unless the finisher has significant experience, it's best to enhance all folder lines by reinforcing them in blind with a fillet or a piece of straight line.

When the pattern has been worked in blind, either through a paper pattern or directly on to the leather with the tools, and any inlays stuck on (see page 213), the cover should be well washed with clean water. Some finishers prefer to use common vinegar or diluted acetic acid for washing up books. If vinegar is used it[198] must be of the best quality, and must not contain any sulphuric acid. Cheap, crude vinegar is certain to be injurious to the leather. Porous leather, such as calf or sheep skin, will need to be washed over with paste-water, and then sized.

When the pattern has been worked in blind, either using a paper pattern or directly on the leather with the tools, and any inlays are attached (see page 213), the cover should be thoroughly washed with clean water. Some finishers prefer to use regular vinegar or diluted acetic acid for cleaning books. If vinegar is used, it[198] must be of the highest quality and must not contain any sulfuric acid. Cheap, poor-quality vinegar is sure to damage the leather. Porous leather, like calf or sheepskin, will need to be washed with paste-water and then sized.

Paste-water is paste and water well beaten up to form a milky liquid, and is applied to the leather as evenly as possible with a sponge. When the paste-water is dry, the leather should be washed with size. Size can be made by boiling down vellum cuttings, or by dissolving gelatine or isinglass in warm water.

Paste-water is a mix of paste and water that’s well-stirred to create a milky liquid, and it’s applied to the leather as evenly as possible with a sponge. Once the paste-water dries, the leather should be washed with size. Size can be made by boiling down vellum scraps or by dissolving gelatin or isinglass in warm water.

For the less porous leathers, such as morocco, seal, or pig skin, no paste-water or size is necessary, unless the skin happens to be a specially open one, or the cover has been cut from the flank or belly. Then it is best to put a little paste in the vinegar or water used for washing up. When the leather is nearly, but not quite, dry the impressions of the tools must be painted with glaire. Finishers’ glaire may be made from the white of eggs well beaten up, diluted with about half as much vinegar, and allowed to settle. Some finishers prefer to use old, evil-smelling glaire, but provided it is a day old, and has been well[199] beaten up, fresh glaire will work quite well.

For less porous leathers, like morocco, seal, or pigskin, you don’t need any paste-water or size, unless the skin is particularly open or the cover has been cut from the flank or belly. In that case, it's best to add a bit of paste to the vinegar or water used for cleaning. When the leather is almost dry, the impressions from the tools should be coated with glaire. Finishers’ glaire can be made by beating the whites of eggs, diluting it with about half as much vinegar, and letting it settle. Some finishers prefer to use old, smelly glaire, but as long as it’s a day old and has been well-beaten, fresh glaire will work just fine.[199]

The impressions of any heavy or solid tools should be given a second coat of glaire when the first has ceased to be “tacky,” and if the leather is at all porous, all impressions had better have a second coat.

The impressions from any heavy or solid tools should get a second coat of glaire once the first coat is no longer sticky, and if the leather is even slightly porous, all impressions should really have a second coat.

As glaire is apt to show and disfigure the leather when dry, it is best to use it as sparingly as possible, and, excepting where the pattern is very close, to confine it to the impressions of the tools. It is not at all an uncommon thing to see the effect of an otherwise admirably tooled binding spoilt by a dark margin round the tools, caused by the careless use of glaire. Glaire should not be used unless it is quite liquid and clean. Directly it begins to get thick it should be strained or thrown away.

As glaire tends to show and ruin the leather when it dries, it's best to use it as little as possible. Unless the design is very intricate, it should only be applied to the impressions made by the tools. It's quite common to see a beautifully tooled binding ruined by a dark border around the tools, which is caused by the careless application of glaire. Glaire should only be used when it's completely liquid and clean. As soon as it starts to thicken, it should be strained or discarded.

The finisher should not glaire in more than he can tool the same day. When the glaire has ceased to be “tacky,” the gold is laid on.

The finisher shouldn't apply more glaire than they can work with in one day. Once the glaire is no longer "tacky," the gold is applied.

Fig. 86.

Fig. 86.

Fig. 86.

At first it will be found difficult to manage gold leaf. The essential conditions are, that there should be no draught, and that the cushion and knife should be quite free from grease. The gold cushion[200] and knife are shown at fig. 86. A little powdered bath-brick rubbed into the cushion will make it easier to cut the gold cleanly. The blade of the gold knife should never be touched with the hand, and before using it, both sides should be rubbed on the cushion. A book of gold is laid open on the cushion, and a leaf of gold is lifted up on the gold knife, which is slipped under it, and turned over on to the cushion. A light breath exactly in the centre of the sheet should make it lie flat, when it may be cut into pieces of any size with a slightly sawing motion of the knife. The book with the pattern ready prepared, and the glaire sufficiently dry (not sticky), is rubbed lightly with a small piece of cotton-wool greased with a little cocoanut oil. The back of the hand is greased in the same way, and a pad of clean cotton-wool is held in the right hand, and having been made as flat as possible by[201] being pressed on the table, is drawn over the back of the hand. This should make it just greasy enough to pick up the gold, but not too greasy to part with it readily when pressed on the book. As little grease as possible should be used on the book, as an excess is apt to stain the leather and to make the gold dull. After experiment it has been found that cocoanut oil stains the leather less than any other grease in common use by bookbinders, and is more readily washed out by benzine.

At first, managing gold leaf can be challenging. The key conditions are that there should be no drafts, and the cushion and knife must be completely free of grease. The gold cushion[200] and knife are shown at fig. 86. Rubbing a bit of powdered bath-brick into the cushion will help you cut the gold more cleanly. Never touch the blade of the gold knife with your hand; instead, rub both sides on the cushion before using it. Open a book of gold on the cushion, lift a leaf of gold with the knife, slide it underneath, and turn it onto the cushion. A gentle breath right in the center of the sheet should make it lay flat, allowing you to cut it into pieces of any size with a slight sawing motion of the knife. The book with the prepared pattern and the glaire should be dry enough (not sticky) and should be lightly rubbed with a small piece of cotton wool that has a little coconut oil. Grease the back of your hand in the same way and hold a pad of clean cotton wool in your right hand, pressing it flat against the table before drawing it over the back of your hand. This should make it just greasy enough to pick up the gold but not so greasy that it doesn’t readily release it when pressed onto the book. Use as little grease as possible on the book, as too much can stain the leather and dull the gold. After experimenting, it has been found that coconut oil stains the leather less than other greases commonly used by bookbinders and is more easily washed out with benzene.

Fig. 87.

Fig. 87.

Fig. 87.

If the gold cracks, or is not solid when pressed on the book, a second thickness should be used. This will stay down if the under piece is lightly breathed upon.

If the gold cracks or isn’t solid when pressed onto the book, a second layer should be used. This will stay down if the underneath piece is lightly breathed on.

For narrow strips of gold for lines, a little pad covered with soft leather may be made, as in fig. 87.

For narrow strips of gold for lines, you can make a small pad covered with soft leather, like in fig. 87.

It will be found of advantage to first use the bottom leaf of gold in the book[202] and then to begin at the top and work through, or else the bottom leaf will almost certainly be found to be damaged by the time it is reached. The gold used should be as nearly pure as it can be got. The gold-beaters say that they are unable to beat pure gold as thin as is usual for gold leaf; but the quite pure gold is a better colour than when alloyed, and the additional thickness, although costly, results in a more solid impression of the tools.

It’s helpful to start with the bottom sheet of gold in the book[202] and then work your way to the top, or else the bottom sheet will likely get damaged by the time you get to it. The gold used should be as pure as possible. The gold-beaters say they can't make pure gold as thin as the usual gold leaf, but pure gold has a nicer color than when it’s mixed with other metals, and the extra thickness, while more expensive, gives a sturdier impression of the tools.

The cost of a book of twenty-four leaves three and a half inches square of English gold leaf of good ordinary quality is from 1s. 3d. to 1s. 6d., whereas the cost of a book of double thick pure gold leaf is 3s. to 3s. 6d. For tooled work it is worth paying the increased price for the sake of the advantages in colour and solidity; but for lines and edges, which use up an immense amount of gold, the thinner and cheaper gold may quite well be used.

The price of a book with twenty-four pages, measuring three and a half inches square, made of good quality English gold leaf ranges from 1s. 3d. to 1s. 6d. Meanwhile, a book made of double thick pure gold leaf costs between 3s. and 3s. 6d. For detailed tooling work, it’s worth spending more for the benefits of better color and durability; however, for lines and edges that consume a lot of gold, the thinner and more affordable gold works just fine.

Besides pure gold leaf, gold alloyed with various metals to change its colour can be had. None of the alloys keep their colour as well as pure gold, and some of them, such as those alloyed with copper for red gold, and with silver for pale gold, tarnish[203] very quickly. These last are not to be recommended.

Along with pure gold leaf, gold mixed with different metals to alter its color is available. None of the alloys maintain their color as well as pure gold, and some, like those mixed with copper for red gold and with silver for pale gold, tarnish[203] very quickly. These are not recommended.

For silver tooling aluminium leaf may be used, as silver leaf tarnishes very quickly.

For silver tooling, aluminum leaf can be used since silver leaf tarnishes very quickly.

When the gold is pressed into the impressions of the tools with the pad of cotton-wool, they should be plainly visible through it.

When the gold is pressed into the impressions of the tools with a cotton pad, they should be clearly visible through it.

The pattern must now be worked through the gold with the hot tools. The tools are taken from the stove, and if too hot cooled on a pad as for blinding-in. The heat required to leave the gold tooling solid and bright and the impressions clear will vary for different leathers, and even for different skins of the same leather. For trial a tool may be laid on the pad until it ceases to hiss, and one or two impressions worked with it. If the gold fails to stick, the heat may be slightly increased.

The pattern now needs to be pressed into the gold with the heated tools. The tools are taken from the stove, and if they are too hot, they can be cooled on a pad like for blinding-in. The heat needed to keep the gold tooling solid, bright, and with clear impressions will differ for various leathers and even for different skins of the same leather. To test it, a tool can be placed on the pad until it stops hissing, and then one or two impressions can be made with it. If the gold doesn’t stick, the heat can be increased slightly.

If the leather is slightly damp from the preparation the tools will usually work better, and less heat is required than if it has been prepared for some time and has got dry.

If the leather is a little damp from the preparation, the tools will generally work better, and you'll need less heat than if it has been prepared for a while and has dried out.

Before using, the faces of all tools must be rubbed bright on the flesh side of a piece of leather. It is impossible to tool[204] brightly with dirty tools. A tool should be held in the right hand, with the thumb on the top of the handle, and steadied with the thumb or first finger of the left hand. The shoulder should be brought well over the tool, and the upper part of the body used as a press. If the weight of the body is used in finishing, the tools can be worked with far greater firmness and certainty, and with less fatigue, than if the whole work is done with the muscles of the arms.

Before using, all tool faces must be rubbed bright on the flesh side of a piece of leather. You can't tool[204] effectively with dirty tools. Hold the tool in your right hand, with your thumb on top of the handle, and steady it with your left thumb or first finger. Your shoulder should be positioned directly over the tool, using the upper body as a press. When you use your body weight for finishing, the tools can be worked with much more strength and precision, and it will be less tiring than if you rely solely on your arm muscles.

Large and solid tools will require all the weight that can be put on them, and even then the gold will often fail to stick with one impression. Tools with small surfaces, such as gouges and dots, must not be worked too heavily, or the surface of the leather may be cut.

Large and heavy tools need as much weight as you can apply to them, and even then, the gold might not adhere well with just one impression. Tools with smaller surfaces, like gouges and dots, shouldn't be used too heavily, or you risk cutting into the leather surface.

To strike a large or solid tool, it should first be put down flat, and then slightly rocked from side to side and from top to bottom, but must not be twisted on the gold.

To hit a big or heavy tool, it should first be placed flat, then gently rocked side to side and from top to bottom, but it must not be twisted on the gold.

A tool may be struck from whichever side the best “sight” can be got, and press and book turned round to the most convenient position.

A tool can be hit from whichever side gives the best "sight," and the press and book can be turned to the most convenient position.

It is difficult to impress some tools,[205] such as circular flower tools, twice in exactly the same place. Such tools should have a mark on one side as a guide. This should always be kept in the same position when blinding-in and tooling, and so make it possible to impress a second time without “doubling.” An impression is said to be “doubled” when the tool has been twisted in striking, or one impression does not fall exactly over the other.

It can be challenging to impress some tools,[205] like circular flower tools, in the exact same spot twice. These tools should have a mark on one side as a guide. This mark should always be kept in the same position during the blinding-in and tooling process, allowing for a second impression without any “doubling.” An impression is considered “doubled” when the tool has been twisted while striking, or when one impression doesn’t align perfectly over the other.

The hot tool should not be held hovering over the impression long, or the preparation will be dried up before the tool is struck. Tooling will generally be brighter if the tools are struck fairly sharply, and at once removed from the leather, than if they are kept down a long time.

The hot tool shouldn't be held hovering over the impression for too long, or the preparation will dry out before the tool is pressed down. Tooling will usually look better if the tools are pressed down sharply and then quickly lifted from the leather, rather than keeping them in place for a long time.

To “strike” dots, the book should be turned with the head to the worker, and the tool held with the handle inclining slightly towards him. This will make them appear bright when the book is held the right way up.

To “strike” dots, the book should be turned with the head facing the worker, and the tool held with the handle tilted slightly towards him. This will make them look bright when the book is held the right way up.

Gouges must be “sighted” from the inside of the curve, and struck evenly, or the points may cut into the leather. Short straight lines may be put in with pieces of line, and longer ones with a fillet.[206]

Gouges need to be "sighted" from the inside of the curve and struck evenly, or the points might cut into the leather. You can use pieces of string for short straight lines and a fillet for longer ones.[206]

A one line fillet is shown at fig. 88; the space filed out of the circumference is to enable lines to be joined neatly at the corners. That the lines may be clearly visible through the gold, the book should be placed so that the light comes from the left hand of the worker and across the line. It is well to have a basin of water in which to cool fillets, as there is so much metal in them, that the damp sponge or cotton used for cooling tools would very rapidly be dried up. When the fillet has been cooled, the edge should be rubbed on the cleaning pad, and the point exactly adjusted to the corner of the line to be run (see fig. 88). The fillet is then run along the line with even pressure.

A one-line fillet is shown at fig. 88; the space filled out from the circumference allows the lines to be joined neatly at the corners. To ensure the lines are clearly visible through the gold, the book should be positioned so that the light comes from the worker’s left side and across the line. It’s a good idea to have a basin of water to cool the fillets since they contain a lot of metal, which would cause the damp sponge or cotton used for cooling tools to dry out quickly. Once the fillet has cooled, the edge should be rubbed on the cleaning pad, and the point should be precisely adjusted to the corner of the line to be drawn (see fig. 88). The fillet is then run along the line with even pressure.

Fig. 88.

Fig. 88.

Fig. 88.

For slightly curved lines, a very small fillet may be used.[207]

For slightly curved lines, a tiny fillet can be used.[207]

When all the prepared part of a pattern has been tooled, it is well rubbed to remove the loose gold with a slightly greasy rag, or with a piece of bottle indiarubber which has been softened in paraffin. After a time the rubber or rag may be sold to the gold-beater, who recovers the gold. To prepare indiarubber for cleaning off gold, a piece of bottle rubber is cut into small pieces and soaked in paraffin for some hours. This should cause the pieces to reunite into a soft lump. This can be used until it is yellow with gold throughout.

When all the prepared parts of a pattern have been tooled, it’s thoroughly rubbed to remove the loose gold using a slightly greasy rag or a piece of bottle rubber that has been softened in paraffin. After a while, the rubber or rag can be sold to the gold-beater, who recovers the gold. To prepare rubber for cleaning off gold, a piece of bottle rubber is cut into small pieces and soaked in paraffin for a few hours. This will cause the pieces to come together into a soft lump. This can be used until it turns yellow with gold throughout.

When all free gold is rubbed off, the finisher can see where the tooling is imperfect. Impressions which are not “solid” must be reglaired, have fresh gold laid on, and be retooled. But if, as will sometimes happen with the best finishers, the gold has failed to stick properly anywhere, it is best to wash the whole with water or vinegar, and prepare afresh.

When all the excess gold is removed, the finisher can see where the tooling isn't perfect. Areas that aren't "solid" need to be polished again, have new gold added, and be retooled. But if, as can sometimes occur with the best finishers, the gold hasn’t adhered properly anywhere, it's best to wash the entire piece with water or vinegar and start over.

As an excess of grease is apt to dull the gold and soil the leather, it is better to use it very sparingly when laying on fresh gold for mending. For patching, benzine may be used instead of grease. When the gold is picked up on the cotton-wool pad, rapidly go over the[208] leather with wool soaked in benzine, and at once lay down the gold. Benzine will not hold the gold long enough for much tooling, but it will answer for about half-an-hour, and give plenty of time for patching.

As too much grease can dull gold and stain leather, it's best to use it very sparingly when applying fresh gold for repairs. For patching, you can use benzine instead of grease. When picking up gold with the cotton-wool pad, quickly go over the leather with wool soaked in benzine, and immediately apply the gold. Benzine won't hold the gold for long enough for extensive tooling, but it's good for about half an hour, which gives you ample time for patching.

Imperfect tooling arises from a variety of causes. If an impression is clear, but the gold not solid, it is probably because the tool was not hot enough, or was not put down firmly. If only one side of an impression fails to stick, it is usually because the tool was unevenly impressed. If an impression is blurred, and the gold has a frosted look, it is because the leather has been burned, either because the tool was too hot, or kept down too long, or the preparation was too fresh.

Imperfect tooling comes from several different reasons. If an impression is clear but the gold isn’t solid, it’s likely because the tool wasn’t hot enough or wasn’t pressed down firmly. If only one side of an impression fails to stick, it’s usually because the tool was unevenly pressed. If an impression is blurry and the gold looks frosted, it’s because the leather has been burned, either because the tool was too hot, held down too long, or the preparation was too fresh.

To mend double or burnt impressions the leather should be wetted and left to soak a short time, and the gold can be picked out with a wooden point. When nearly dry the impressions should be put in again with a cool tool, reglaired and retooled.

To fix double or burned impressions, the leather should be dampened and allowed to soak for a short time, and the gold can be carefully picked out with a wooden tool. When it's almost dry, the impressions should be replaced using a cool tool, reshaped and retouched.

It is very difficult to mend neatly if the leather is badly burnt. Sometimes it may be advisable to paste a piece of new leather over a burnt impression before retooling.[209]

It’s really hard to repair cleanly if the leather is severely burnt. Sometimes, it might be a good idea to glue a patch of new leather over a burn mark before working on it again.[209]

If a tool is put down in the wrong place by mistake, it is difficult to get the impression out entirely. The best thing to do is to damp the leather thoroughly, leave it to soak for a little while, and pick up the impression with the point of a pin. It is best not to use an iron point for this, as iron is apt to blacken the leather.

If a tool is accidentally placed in the wrong spot, it’s tough to completely remove the impression. The best approach is to dampen the leather thoroughly, let it soak for a bit, and then lift the impression with the tip of a pin. It's better not to use an iron point for this, as iron can easily blacken the leather.

Leather is difficult to tool if it has not a firm surface, or if it is too thin to give a little when the tool is struck.

Leather is hard to work with if it doesn't have a firm surface or if it's too thin to give a bit when the tool strikes it.

When the tooling is finished, and the loose gold removed with the rubber, the leather should be washed with benzine, to remove any grease and any fragments of gold that may be adhering by the grease only.

When the tooling is done and the excess gold is wiped away with rubber, the leather should be cleaned with benzine to get rid of any grease and any pieces of gold that might be stuck just by the grease.

The inside margins of the boards are next polished and varnished, and the end papers pasted down. Or if there is a leather joint, the panel left on the board may be filled in (see Chapter XVII).

The inner edges of the covers are then polished and varnished, and the end papers are glued down. If there’s a leather joint, the area left on the cover can be filled in (see Chapter XVII).

When the end papers are dry, the sides and back may be polished and varnished.

When the end papers are dry, the sides and back can be polished and varnished.

It is important that the varnish should be of good quality, and not too thick, or it will in time turn brown and cause the gold to look dirty. Some of the light French spirit varnishes prepared for bookbinders answer well. Varnish must be[210] used sparingly, and is best applied with a pad of cotton-wool. A little varnish is poured on to the pad, which is rubbed on a piece of paper until it is seen that the varnish comes out thinly and evenly. It is then rubbed on the book with a spiral motion. The quicker the surface is gone over, provided every part is covered, the better. Varnish will not work well if it is very cold, and in cold weather both the book and varnish bottle should be slightly warmed before use. Should an excess of varnish be put on in error, or should it be necessary to retool part of the book after it has been varnished, the varnish can be removed with spirits of wine. Varnish acts as a preservative to the leather, but has the disadvantage, if used in excess, of making it rather brittle on the surface. It must, therefore, be used very sparingly at the joints. It is to be hoped that a perfectly elastic varnish, that will not tarnish the gold, will soon be discovered.

It’s important that the varnish is good quality and not too thick, or it will eventually turn brown and make the gold look dirty. Some of the light French spirit varnishes designed for bookbinders work well. Varnish should be[210]used sparingly, and it’s best to apply it with a cotton-wool pad. Pour a little varnish onto the pad and rub it on a piece of paper until it spreads thinly and evenly. Then, apply it to the book in a spiral motion. The faster you cover the surface, as long as every part is covered, the better. Varnish doesn’t work well in very cold weather, so both the book and varnish bottle should be slightly warmed before use. If you accidentally apply too much varnish, or need to retouch part of the book after varnishing, you can remove it with spirits of wine. Varnish serves as a preservative for the leather, but if used too much, it can make the surface a bit brittle. So, it should be used very sparingly at the joints. Hopefully, a completely elastic varnish that won’t tarnish the gold will be discovered soon.

As soon as the varnish is dry the boards may be pressed, one at a time, to give the leather a smooth surface (see fig. 83), leaving each board in the press for some hours.

As soon as the varnish dries, the boards can be pressed, one at a time, to create a smooth surface on the leather (see fig. 83), leaving each board in the press for several hours.

Fig. 89.

Fig. 89.

Fig. 89.

After each board has been pressed separately the book should be shut, and pressed[211] again with pressing plates on each side of it, and with tins covered with paper placed inside each board. Light pressure should be given to books with tight backs, or the leather may become detached.

After each board has been pressed separately, the book should be closed and pressed[211] again with pressing plates on each side of it, and with tins covered with paper placed inside each board. Light pressure should be applied to books with tight backs, or the leather may come loose.

If, on removing from the press, the boards will not keep shut, the book should[212] be pressed again with a folded sheet of blotting-paper in each end. The blotting-paper should have the folded edge turned up, and be placed so that this turned-up edge will be in the joint behind the back edge of the board when the book is shut.

If, when taken out of the press, the covers won't stay closed, the book should[212] be pressed again with a folded sheet of blotting paper at each end. The blotting paper should have the folded edge facing up and should be positioned so that this edge is in the joint behind the back edge of the cover when the book is closed.

A small nipping-press suitable for giving comparatively light pressure, is shown at fig. 89.

A small nipping press designed to provide relatively light pressure is shown at fig. 89.

TOOLING ON VELLUM

Most covering vellum has a sticky surface, that marks if it is handled. This should be washed off with clean water before tooling. The pattern is blinded in through the paper as for leather, excepting that the paper must not be pasted directly to the vellum, but may be held with a band going right round the board or book. It is best to glaire twice, and to lay on a small portion of gold at a time with[213] benzine. As vellum burns very readily, the tools must not be too hot, and some skill is needed to prevent them from slipping on the hard surface.

Most covering vellum has a sticky surface that leaves marks if it's handled. This should be washed off with clean water before tooling. The pattern is pressed into the paper like with leather, except that the paper must not be pasted directly to the vellum. Instead, it can be held in place with a band wrapped around the board or book. It's best to apply glaire twice and to apply a small amount of gold at a time with [213] benzine. Since vellum burns easily, the tools shouldn't be too hot, and some skill is needed to keep them from slipping on the hard surface.

Vellum must not be polished or varnished.

Vellum shouldn't be polished or varnished.

INLAYING ON LEATHER

Inlaying or onlaying is adding a different leather from that of the cover, as decoration. Thus on a red book, a panel or a border, or other portion, may be covered with thin green leather, or only flowers or leaves may be inlaid, while a jewel-like effect may be obtained by dots, leaves, and flowers, tooled over inlays of various colours. Leather for inlaying should be pared very thin. To do this the leather is cut into strips, wetted, and pared on a stone with a knife shaped somewhat as at fig. 60, B. When the thin leather is dry the inlays of the leaves and flowers, &c., may be stamped out with steel punches cut to the shape of the tools; or if only a few inlays are needed, the tools may be impressed on the thin leather, and the inlays cut out with a sharp knife. The edges of the larger[214] inlays should be pared round carefully. For inlaying a panel or other large surface, the leather is pared very thin and evenly with a French knife, and a piece of paper pasted on to the grained side and left to dry. When dry, the shape of the panel, or other space to be inlaid, is marked on it through the paper pattern, and leather and paper cut through to the shape required. The edges must then be carefully pared, and the piece attached with paste, and nipped in the press to make it stick. When the paste is dry, the paper may be damped and washed off. The object of the paper is to prevent the thin leather from stretching when it is pasted.

Inlaying or onlaying involves adding a different piece of leather than that of the cover for decorative purposes. For example, on a red book, a panel or a border could be covered with thin green leather, or just flowers or leaves might be inlaid. A jewel-like effect can be created with dots, leaves, and flowers tooled over inlays of various colors. The leather used for inlaying should be cut very thin. This is done by cutting the leather into strips, wetting them, and paring them on a stone with a knife that resembles the tool at fig. 60, B. Once the thin leather is dry, the inlays of leaves, flowers, etc., can be stamped out using steel punches shaped like the tools; if only a few inlays are needed, the tools can be impressed into the thin leather, and the inlays can be cut out with a sharp knife. The edges of the larger inlays should be carefully rounded. For inlaying a panel or other large area, the leather should be pared very thin and evenly with a French knife, and a piece of paper should be pasted onto the grained side and left to dry. Once dry, the shape of the panel or space to be inlaid is marked on it through the paper pattern, and both the leather and paper are cut to the required shape. The edges must then be carefully pared, and the piece attached with paste, then pressed to ensure it adheres. When the paste is dry, the paper can be dampened and washed off. The purpose of the paper is to prevent the thin leather from stretching when it’s pasted.

For white inlays it is better to use Japanese paper than leather, as white leather, when pared very thin, will show the colours of the under leather through, and look dirty. If paper is used, it should be sized with vellum size before tooling.

For white inlays, it's better to use Japanese paper instead of leather, as white leather, when shaved very thin, will show the colors of the leather underneath and look dirty. If you use paper, it should be sized with vellum size before tooling.

When many dots or leaves are to be inlaid, the pieces of leather, cut out with the punch, may be laid face downwards on a paring stone, and a piece of paper, thickly covered with paste, laid on it. This, on being taken up, will carry with[215] it the “inlays,” and they can be picked up one at a time on the point of a fine folder, and stuck on the book.

When you need to inlay a lot of dots or leaves, the leather pieces cut out with the punch can be placed face down on a paring stone, and a piece of paper, thoroughly coated with paste, can be laid on top. When this is lifted, it will carry the “inlays” with it, which can then be picked up one at a time with the tip of a fine folder and adhered to the book.

“Inlays” of tools are attached after the pattern has been “blinded” in, and must be again worked over with the tool, in blind, when the paste is nearly dry.

“Inlays” of tools are attached after the pattern has been “blinded” in, and must be worked over again with the tool, blindly, when the paste is nearly dry.

On vellum an effect, similar to that of inlays on leather, can be obtained by the use of stains.

On vellum, a look similar to that of inlays on leather can be achieved by using stains.

CHAPTER XV

Lettering—Blind Tooling—Heraldic Ornament

Lettering - Blind Tooling - Heraldic Ornament

LETTERING ON THE BACK

Lettering may be done either with separate letters, each on its own handle, or with type set in a type-holder and worked across the back as a pallet. Although by the use of type great regularity is ensured, and some time saved, the use of handle letters gives so much more freedom of arrangement, that their use is advocated for extra binding. Where a great many copies of the same work[216] have to be lettered, the use of type has obvious advantages.

Text design can be done using separate letters, each on its own handle, or with type set in a type-holder and worked across the back like a pallet. While using type ensures greater consistency and saves time, handle letters provide much more flexibility in arrangement, making them a better option for special binding. When many copies of the same work[216] need to be lettered, using type has clear advantages.

A great deal depends on the design of the letters used. Nearly all bookbinders’ letters are made too narrow, and with too great difference between the thick and thin strokes. At fig. 90 is shown an alphabet, for which I am indebted to the kindness of Mr. Emery Walker. The long tail of the Q is meant to go under the U. It might be well to have a second R cut, with a shorter tail, to avoid the great space left when an A happens to follow it. I have found that four sizes of letters are sufficient for all books.

A lot depends on the design of the letters used. Almost all bookbinders' letters are too narrow and have too much difference between the thick and thin strokes. At fig. 90 is an alphabet that I'm grateful to Mr. Emery Walker for. The long tail of the Q is intended to go under the U. It might be a good idea to have a second R made with a shorter tail to avoid the large space left when an A follows it. I've found that four sizes of letters are enough for all books.

Fig. 90.

Fig. 90.

Fig. 90.

Fig. 91.

Fig. 91.

Fig. 91.

Fig. 92. Fig. 92.

To make out a lettering paper for the back of a book, cut a strip of good thin[217] paper as wide as the height of the panel to be lettered. Fold it near the centre, and mark the fold with a pencil. This should give a line exactly at right angles to the top and bottom of the strip. Then make another fold the distance from the first of the width of the back; then bring the two folds together, and make a third fold in the exact centre. The paper should then be as shown at fig. 91. Supposing the lettering to be THE WORKS OF ROBERT LOUIS STEVENSON, select the size of letter you desire to use, and take an E and mark on a piece of spare paper a line of E’s, and laying your folded paper against it, see how many letters will go in comfortably. Supposing you find that four lines of five letters of the selected size can be put in, you must see if your title can be conveniently cut up into four lines of five letters, or less. It might be done as shown at fig. 93. But if you prefer not to split the[218] name STEVENSON, a smaller letter must be employed, and then the lettering may be as at fig. 94.

To create a lettering paper for the back of a book, cut a strip of good thin[217] paper that is as wide as the height of the panel to be lettered. Fold it near the center and mark the fold with a pencil. This will give you a line that is exactly perpendicular to the top and bottom of the strip. Next, make another fold the distance from the first equal to the width of the back; then bring the two folds together and make a third fold in the exact center. The paper should then look like fig. 91. Assuming the lettering says THE WORKS OF ROBERT LOUIS STEVENSON, choose the size of letters you want to use, take an E, and mark a line of E's on a piece of spare paper. Place your folded paper next to it to see how many letters can fit comfortably. If you find that four lines of five letters in the selected size can fit, check if your title can be easily divided into four lines of five letters or less. This could be arranged as shown at fig. 93. However, if you prefer not to split the name STEVENSON, a smaller letter size must be used, allowing the lettering to appear as at fig. 94.

To find out the position of the lines of lettering on a panel, the letter E is again taken and impressed five times at the side of the panel, as shown at fig. 92, leaving a little greater distance between the lowest letter and the bottom of the panel, than between the letters. The paper is then folded on the centre fold, and, with dividers set to the average distance between the head of one letter and the head of the next, five points are made through the folded paper. The paper is opened, turned over, and the points joined with a fine folder worked against the straight-edge. It should leave on the front five raised lines, up to which the head of the letters must be put.

To figure out where the lines of text go on a panel, take the letter E and press it five times on the side of the panel, as shown at fig. 92, leaving a slightly larger gap between the lowest letter and the bottom of the panel than between the other letters. Next, fold the paper in half, and using dividers set to the average distance between the top of one letter and the top of the next, mark five points through the folded paper. Open the paper, flip it over, and connect the points with a fine folder along a straight edge. This should create five raised lines on the front, where the heads of the letters should align.

Fig. 93.

Fig. 93.

Fig. 93.

Fig. 94.

Fig. 94.

Fig. 94.

The letters in the top line are counted,[219] and the centre letter marked. Spaces between words are counted as a letter; thus in “THE WORKS,” “W” will be the centre letter, and should be put on the paper first, and the others added on each side of it. Some thought is needed in judging where to put the centre, as the difference in the width of such letters as “M” and “W” and “I” and “J” have to be taken into account.

The letters in the top line are counted,[219] and the center letter is marked. Spaces between words count as a letter; so in “THE WORKS,” “W” will be the center letter and should be placed on the paper first, with the others added on each side. Some thought is needed to decide where to put the center, as the difference in the width of letters like “M” and “W” compared to “I” and “J” has to be considered.

As a general rule, lettering looks best if it comfortably fills the panel, but of course it cannot always be made to do this. The greatest difficulty will be found in making titles of books that consist of a single word, look well. Thus if you have “CORIOLANUS” to place on a back which is not more than 58-inch wide, if it is put across as one word, as at fig. 95 (1), it will be illegible from the smallness of the type, and will tell merely as a gold line at a little distance. If a reasonably large type is used, the word must be broken up somewhat, as at (2), which is perhaps better, but still not at all satisfactory. The word may be put straight along the back, as at fig. (3), but this hardly looks well on a book with raised[220] bands, and should be avoided unless necessary.

As a general rule, lettering looks best when it comfortably fills the panel, but of course, this isn't always possible. The biggest challenge is making book titles that consist of a single word look good. For example, if you need to place “CORIOLANUS” on a spine that’s not more than 58 inches wide, putting it all in one word as shown at fig. 95 (1) will make it hard to read because the type will be too small. From a distance, it will just look like a gold line. If you use a reasonably large type, you'll need to break the word up somewhat, as shown at (2), which is perhaps better but still not quite right. You could position the word straight along the spine, as in fig. (3), but that doesn't look great on a book with raised[220] bands, and should only be done if absolutely necessary.

Fig. 95.

Fig. 95.

Fig. 95.

The use of type of different sizes in lettering a book should be avoided when possible, and on no account whatever should letters of different design be introduced. Occasionally, when the reason for it is obvious, it may be allowable to make a word shorter by putting in a small letter, supposing that only thus could reasonably large type be used. It is especially allowable in cases where, in a set of volumes, there is one much thinner than the others. It is generally better to make some compromise with the lettering of the thin volume, than to spoil the[221] lettering of the whole set by using too small a letter throughout (see fig. 115).

The use of different size types when lettering a book should be avoided whenever possible, and under no circumstances should letters of different designs be introduced. Occasionally, when the reason is clear, it might be acceptable to shorten a word by using a smaller letter if that’s the only way to use reasonably large type. This is especially acceptable in cases where one volume in a set is much thinner than the others. It’s generally better to compromise on the lettering of the thin volume than to ruin the lettering of the entire set by using letters that are too small throughout (see fig. 115).

On very thin books it is sometimes hardly possible to get any lettering at all on the back. In such cases the lettering is best put on the side.

On very thin books, it can be difficult to get any lettering on the back at all. In these situations, it's best to place the lettering on the side.

In the case of some special books that are to have elaborately decorated bindings, and are on that account sufficiently distinct from their neighbours, a certain amount of freedom is permissible with the lettering, and a little mystery is not perhaps out of place. But in most cases books have to be recognised by their titles, and it is of the utmost importance that the lettering should be as clear as possible, and should fully identify the volume.

In the case of some special books that have elaborate decorated bindings, making them distinct from others, there is some freedom allowed with the lettering, and a touch of mystery might be fitting. However, in most cases, books need to be recognized by their titles, and it is extremely important that the lettering is as clear as possible and fully identifies the volume.

For lettering half-bindings and other books on which much time cannot be spared, it would take too long to make out a paper, as described for extra bindings, nor is there on such work much occasion for it. For such books the lettering should be written out carefully, the whole panel prepared and glaired in, and the gold laid on. Then with a piece of fine silk or thread lines may be marked across the gold as a guide to the finisher, and the letters worked from the centre[222] outward, as described for making out the paper pattern. Of course this method does not allow of such nice calculation and adjustment as when a paper pattern is made out; but if a general principle of clear lettering is recognised and accepted, very good results may be obtained.

For lettering half-bindings and other books where time is limited, it would take too long to create a paper template, as mentioned for extra bindings, and there's not much need for it in these cases. For these books, the lettering should be written out carefully, the entire panel prepared and glazed, and the gold applied. Then, using a fine silk or thread, lines can be marked across the gold as a guide for the finisher, and the letters should be worked from the center[222] outward, as described for creating the paper pattern. Of course, this method doesn't allow for as precise calculations and adjustments as when using a paper pattern; however, if a general principle of clear lettering is recognized and accepted, very good results can be achieved.

BLIND TOOLING
Fig. 96.

Fig. 96.

Fig. 96.

At the end of the book characteristic examples of blind-tooled books are given (pages 321-25). It will be seen that most of the tools form complete designs in themselves. Although the use of detached die-sunk tools was general, there were also simple tools used, which, when combined,[223] made up more or less organic designs, and allowed more freedom to the finisher (see figs. 96 and 97).

At the end of the book, there are examples of blind-tooled books provided (pages 321-25). You’ll notice that most of the tools create complete designs on their own. Although detached die-sunk tools were commonly used, there were also simpler tools, which when combined,[223] formed more or less cohesive designs and allowed the finisher more freedom (see figs. 96 and 97).

Fig. 97.

Fig. 97.

Fig. 97.

Some use may also be made of interlaced strap-work designs, either worked with gouges, or a small fillet. A book bound in oaken boards, with a leather back with knotted decoration, is shown at page 330. I have found that such binding and decoration is more satisfactory in scheme for old books, than most forms of modern binding.[224]

Some may also utilize interlaced strap-work designs, either created with gouges or a small fillet. A book bound in oak boards, with a leather spine featuring knotted decoration, is shown on page 330. I've found that this type of binding and decoration looks better for old books than most modern binding styles.[224]

If a design is simple, the cover is marked up with dividers, and the tools impressed direct upon the leather; or, if it is elaborate, a paper pattern is made out, and the tools blinded through the paper, as described for gold tooling. The leather is then damped with water, and the impressions retooled.

If a design is simple, the cover is marked with dividers, and the tools are pressed directly onto the leather; if it's more detailed, a paper pattern is created, and the tools are pressed through the paper, as described for gold tooling. The leather is then moistened with water, and the impressions are refined.

Fig. 98.

Fig. 98.

Fig. 98.

The panel lines on most of the bindings before 1500 show evidence of having been put in with a tool which has been pushed along the leather, and not with a wheel. I have found that a tool guided by a straight-edge, and “jiggered” backwards and forwards, makes by far the best lines for blind-tool work. It should be borne in mind that the line is formed by the raised portion of leather, and so the tool should be cut somewhat as at fig. 98. This should leave three ridges on the leather. Blind tooling may be gone over and over until it is deep enough, and may be combined with various other methods of working. For instance, in tooling such a spray as is shown at fig. 99, the leaf would be formed by five impressions of the second tool, shown at A, the extremity of the impressions could be joined with[225] gouges, the stalk and veining could either be run in with a fillet or worked with gouges. The grapes would best be worked with a tool cut for the purpose. One edge of all gouge or fillet impressions can be smoothed down with some such tool as shown in section at B. This has to be worked round the gouge lines with a steady hand, and may be fairly hot if it is kept moving. At C is shown a section of a gouge impression before and after the use of this tool. The ground can be dotted in, or otherwise gone over with some small tool to throw up the pattern.

The panel lines on most bindings before 1500 show signs of being made with a tool that was pushed along the leather, rather than being made with a wheel. I've discovered that a tool guided by a straight edge and moved back and forth creates the best lines for blind-tool work. It's important to remember that the line is created by the raised part of the leather, so the tool should be cut somewhat like at fig. 98. This will leave three ridges on the leather. Blind tooling can be repeated until it’s deep enough and can be combined with various other methods. For example, when tooling a spray like the one shown at fig. 99, the leaf can be shaped using five impressions from the second tool shown at A. The ends of the impressions can be joined with[225] gouges, and the stalk and veining can be done with a fillet or gouges. The grapes should be worked with a tool designed for that purpose. You can smooth one edge of all gouge or fillet impressions with a tool like the one shown in section at B. This needs to be maneuvered around the gouge lines with a steady hand and can be fairly hot as long as it keeps moving. At C, there’s a section of a gouge impression before and after using this tool. The ground can be dotted in, or otherwise enhanced with a small tool to define the pattern.

Blind tooling can sometimes be used in combination with gold tooling.

Blind tooling can sometimes be used together with gold tooling.

Fig. 99.

Fig. 99.

Fig. 99.

In the fifteenth century the Venetian binders used little roundels of some gesso-like substance, that were brightly coloured or gilt, in combination with blind tooling[226] (see p. 325). This is a method that might be revived.

In the fifteenth century, Venetian binders used small round pieces made of a gesso-like material that were brightly colored or gold-plated, along with blind tooling[226] (see p. 325). This is a technique that could be brought back.

What is known as “leather work” is a further development of blind tooling. This method of decoration has been revived lately, but not generally with success. “Leather work” may be divided into two branches; in one the surface of the leather is cut to outline the pattern, and in the other the leather is embossed from the back, while wet, and the pattern outlined by an indented line. Sometimes the two methods are combined. As embossing from the back necessitates the work being done before the leather is on the book, it is not very suitable for decorating books. Leather first decorated and then stuck on the book, never looks as if it was an integral part of the binding. The cut leather work, which may be done after the book is bound, and leaves the surface comparatively flat, is a better method to employ for books, provided the cuts are not too deep, and are restricted to the boards, so as not to weaken the leather at the back and joints. Much of the leather used for “leather work” is of very poor quality, and will not last; for modelling it must be thick on the side of the book, and for[227] the book to open it must be pared thin at the joint, thus making it necessary to use a thick skin very much pared down, and consequently weakened (see p. 155). Another very common fault in modelled “leather work” is, that the two sides and the back are often worked separately and stuck together on the book, necessitating a join, and consequently a weak place in the hinge, where strength is most wanted. Again, in most modern “leather work,” those who do the decoration do not, as a rule, do the binding, and often do not understand enough of the craft to do suitable work.

What we call “leather work” is an evolution of blind tooling. This decoration technique has made a comeback recently, but not always with success. "Leather work" can be split into two categories: in one, the leather's surface is cut to create an outline of the pattern, and in the other, the leather is embossed from the back while it's wet, with the pattern marked by an indented line. Sometimes, both techniques are used together. However, since embossing from the back requires the work to be done before the leather is attached to the book, it isn't very practical for book decoration. Leather that’s first decorated and then glued onto the book never looks like it’s part of the binding. The cut leather work, which can be done after the book is bound and keeps the surface relatively flat, is a better method for books, as long as the cuts aren't too deep and are confined to the boards, so they don't weaken the leather at the back and joints. Much of the leather used for "leather work" is of poor quality and won't last; for modeling, it needs to be thick on the book's side, and to allow the book to open, it must be thinned at the joint. This means a thick piece of leather is often shaved down, resulting in it being weakened (see p. 155). Another common issue in modelled "leather work" is that the two sides and the back are often worked on separately and then stuck together on the book, creating a seam that becomes a weak spot in the hinge, where more strength is needed. Furthermore, in most modern "leather work," the people who do the decoration typically don’t handle the binding and often lack a deep enough understanding of the craft to produce quality work.

All those engaged in leather work are advised to learn to bind their own books, and to only use such methods of decoration, as can be carried out on the bound book.

Everyone involved in leather work is encouraged to learn how to bind their own books and to use only those decorating techniques that can be applied to the bound book.

HERALDRY ON BOOK COVERS

It is an old and good custom to put the arms of the owner of a library on the covers of the books he has bound. The traditional, and certainly one of the best ways to do this, is to have an arms block designed and cut. To design an arms[228] block, knowledge of heraldry is needed, and also some clear idea of the effect to be aimed at. A very common mistake in designing blocks is to try and get the effect of hand tooling. Blocks should be and look something entirely different. In hand tooling much of the effect is got from the impressions of small tools reflecting the light at slightly different angles, giving the work life and interest. Blocked gold being all in one plane, has no such lights in it, and depends entirely on its design for its effect.

It's an old and valued tradition to put the owner's coat of arms on the covers of the books they have bound. A classic and definitely one of the best ways to do this is by having an arms block designed and created. Designing an arms[228] block requires knowledge of heraldry and a clear idea of the desired effect. A common mistake when designing blocks is trying to mimic the effect of hand tooling. Blocks should be and appear completely different. In hand tooling, much of the effect comes from the impressions of small tools reflecting light at slightly different angles, which gives the work life and interest. Blocked gold, being all on one flat surface, doesn't have those variations in light and relies solely on its design for impact.

Provided the heraldry identifies the owner, it should be as simply drawn as it can be; the custom of indicating the tinctures by lines and dots on the charges, generally makes a design confused, obscuring the coat it is intended to make clear. In designing heraldic blocks it is well to get a good deal of solid flat surface of gold to make the blocked design stand out from any gold-tooled work on the cover.

As long as the heraldry identifies the owner, it should be as simple as possible; using lines and dots to indicate colors on the symbols usually makes the design confusing, obscuring the coat it's meant to clarify. When creating heraldic blocks, it's important to include a lot of solid flat areas of gold to make the blocked design stand out against any gold tooling on the cover.

Another way of putting armorial bearings on covers, is to paint them in oil paint. In the early sixteenth century the Venetians copied the Eastern custom of sinking panels in their book covers, and[229] painted coats of arms on these sunk portions very successfully. The groundwork of the shield itself was usually raised a little, either by something under the leather, or by some gesso-like substance on its surface.

Another way to apply armorial bearings on covers is to paint them with oil paint. In the early sixteenth century, the Venetians adopted the Eastern practice of creating recessed panels in their book covers and painted coats of arms on these recessed areas quite effectively. The background of the shield itself was usually raised slightly, either by using something beneath the leather or by applying a gesso-like material on its surface.[229]

Arms blocks should be placed a little above the centre of the cover. Generally, if the centre of the block is in a line with the centre band of a book with five bands, it will look right.

Arms blocks should be positioned slightly above the center of the cover. Typically, if the center of the block aligns with the center band of a book that has five bands, it will look correct.

Blocks are struck with the aid of an arming or blocking press. The block is attached to the movable plate of the press called the “platen.” To do this some stout brown paper is first glued to the platen, and the block glued to this, and the platen fixed in its place at the bottom of the heating-box. In blocking arms on a number of books of different sizes, some nice adjustment of the movable bed is needed to get the blocks to fall in exactly the right place.

Blocks are pressed using a blocking press. The block is attached to the movable plate of the press, known as the “platen.” To do this, a sturdy piece of brown paper is glued to the platen, and then the block is glued to that. The platen is then secured at the bottom of the heating box. When blocking arms on several books of different sizes, a precise adjustment of the movable bed is required to ensure the blocks align perfectly.

For blocking, one coat of glaire will be enough for most leathers. The gold is laid on as for hand tooling. The block should be brought down and up again fairly sharply. The heat needed is about the same as for hand tooling.

For blocking, one coat of glaire will be enough for most leathers. The gold is applied just like hand tooling. The block should be brought down and up again fairly sharply. The heat required is about the same as for hand tooling.

CHAPTER XVI[230]

Designing for Gold-Tooled Decoration

Designing for Gold-Tooled Decor

DESIGNING TOOLS

For gold tooling, such tools as gouges, dots, pieces of straight line, and fillets are to be had ready-made at most dealers. Other tools are best designed and cut to order. At first only a few simple forms will be needed, such as one or two flowers of different sizes, and one or two sets of leaves (see fig. 100).

For gold tooling, tools like gouges, dots, straight lines, and fillets are commonly available at most shops. Other tools are best designed and custom-made. Initially, you'll only need a few basic shapes, like one or two flowers in different sizes and one or two sets of leaves (see fig. 100).

Fig. 100 (reduced)

Fig. 100 (reduced)

Fig. 100 (smaller)

In designing tools, it must be borne in mind that they may appear on the book many times repeated, and so must be simple in outline and much conventionalised. A more or less naturalistic drawing of a flower, showing the natural irregularities, may look charming, but if a[231] tool is cut from it, any marked irregularity becomes extremely annoying when repeated several times on a cover. So with leaves, unless they are perfectly symmetrical, there should be three of each shape cut, two curving in different directions, and the third quite straight (see fig. 101). To have only one leaf, and to have that curved, produces very restless patterns. The essence of gold-tool design, is that patterns are made up of repeats of impressions of tools, and that being so, the tools must be so designed that they will repeat pleasantly, and in practice it will be found that any but simple forms will become aggressive in repetition.

When designing tools, it's important to remember that they might appear multiple times on the book, so they need to be simple in shape and highly standardized. A somewhat naturalistic drawing of a flower, showing its natural irregularities, might look lovely, but if a[231] tool is created from it, any noticeable irregularity will become really annoying when it’s repeated several times on a cover. The same goes for leaves; unless they are perfectly symmetrical, you should cut three of each shape: two bending in different directions and one completely straight (see fig. 101). Having just one leaf, especially if it's curved, creates very restless patterns. The core idea of gold-tool design is that patterns are composed of repeated impressions of tools, and since that's the case, the tools must be designed in such a way that they repeat in a pleasing manner. In practice, you'll find that any forms that are not simple will become overwhelming when repeated.

Fig. 101.

Fig. 101.

Fig. 101.

Designs for tools should be made out with Indian ink on white paper, and they may be larger than the size of the required tool. The tool-cutter will reduce any drawing to any desired size, and will, from one drawing, cut any number of tools of different sizes. Thus, if a set of[232] five leaves of the same shape is wanted, it will only be necessary to draw one, and to indicate the sizes the others are to be in some such way as shown at fig. 102.

Designs for tools should be made with Indian ink on white paper, and they can be larger than the size of the tool that's needed. The tool-cutter can resize any drawing, and from one drawing, it can produce multiple tools of different sizes. So, if you want a set of[232] five leaves with the same shape, you only need to draw one and specify the sizes for the others in a way similar to what's shown at fig. 102.

It is not suggested that special tools should be cut for each pattern, but the need of new tools will naturally arise from time to time, and so the stock be gradually increased. It is better to begin with a very few, and add a tool or two as occasion arises, than to try to design a complete set when starting.

It’s not recommended to create special tools for every pattern, but the need for new tools will come up from time to time, so the inventory should be gradually expanded. It’s better to start with just a few tools and add one or two as needed, rather than trying to design a complete set right from the beginning.

Fig. 102.

Fig. 102.

Fig. 102.

Tools may be solid or in outline. If in outline they may be used as “inlay” tools, and in ordering them the tool-cutter should be asked to provide steel punches for cutting the inlays.

Tools can be solid or just outlined. If they're outlined, they can be used as "inlay" tools, and when ordering them, the tool-cutter should be asked to supply steel punches for cutting the inlays.

COMBINING TOOLS TO FORM PATTERNS

It is well for the student to begin with patterns arranged on some very simple[233] plan, making slight changes in each succeeding pattern. In this way an individual style may be established. The usual plan of studying the perfected styles of the old binders, and trying to begin where they left off, in practice only leads to the production of exact imitations, or poor lifeless parodies, of the old designs. Whereas a pattern developed by the student by slow degrees, through a series of designs, each slightly different from the one before it, will, if eccentricities are avoided, probably have life and individual interest.

It's a good idea for students to start with patterns set out in a simple[233] way, making small changes with each new pattern. This approach can help them develop a unique style. The common method of studying the perfected styles of past binders and trying to pick up where they left off usually results in exact copies or uninspired imitations of old designs. On the other hand, a pattern that the student develops gradually, through a series of designs each slightly different from the last, will likely have more life and individual appeal, as long as they avoid any eccentricities.

Perhaps the easiest way to decorate a binding is to cover it with some small repeating pattern. A simple form of diaper as a beginning is shown at fig. 104. To make such a pattern cut a piece of good, thin paper to the size of the board of a book, and with a pencil rule a line about an eighth of an inch inside the margin all round. Then with the point of a fine folder that will indent, but not cut the paper, mark up as shown in fig. 103. The position of the lines A A and B B are found by simply folding the paper, first side to side, and then head to tail. The other lines can be put in without any[234] measurement by simply joining all points where lines cross. By continual re-crossing, the spaces into which the paper is divided can be reduced to any desired size. If the construction lines are accurately put in, the spaces will all be of the same size and shape. It is then evident that a repeating design to fill any one of the spaces can be made to cover the whole surface.

Perhaps the easiest way to decorate a binding is to cover it with a small repeating pattern. A simple example of a diaper pattern is shown at fig. 104. To create such a pattern, cut a piece of good, thin paper to the size of the book board, and with a pencil, draw a line about an eighth of an inch inside the margin all around. Then, using a fine folder that can indent but not cut the paper, mark up as shown in fig. 103. The positions of the lines A A and B B are found by simply folding the paper, first side to side, and then head to tail. The other lines can be added without any measurement by simply connecting all points where the lines cross. By continuously crossing the lines, the spaces created on the paper can be reduced to any desired size. If the construction lines are accurately placed, the spaces will all be the same size and shape. It is then clear that a repeating design to fill any one of the spaces can be created to cover the entire surface.

Fig. 103.

Fig. 103.

Fig. 103.

In fig. 104, it is the diagonal lines only that are utilised for the pattern. To avoid confusion, the cross lines that helped to determine the position of the diagonals are not shown.[235]

In fig. 104, only the diagonal lines are used for the pattern. To prevent confusion, the cross lines that indicated the position of the diagonals are not displayed.[235]

Fig. 104 (reduced)

Fig. 104 (reduced)

Fig. 104 (smaller)

The advantage of using the point of a[236] folder to mark up the constructional lines of a pattern instead of a pencil, is that the lines so made are much finer, do not rub out, and do not cause confusion by interfering with the pattern. Any lines that will appear on the book, such as the marginal lines, may be put in with a pencil to distinguish them.

The benefit of using the point of a [236] folder to outline the construction lines of a pattern instead of a pencil is that the lines created are much finer, won't erase, and won't cause confusion by disrupting the pattern. Any lines that need to show in the book, like the marginal lines, can be added with a pencil for clarity.

Having marked up the paper, select a flower tool and impress it at the points where the diagonal lines cross, holding it in the smoke of a candle between every two or three impressions. When the flower has been impressed all over, select a small piece of straight line, and put a stalk in below each flower; then a leaf put in on each side of the straight line will complete the pattern.

Having marked up the paper, choose a flower tool and press it down at the points where the diagonal lines cross, holding it in the smoke of a candle between every two or three impressions. Once the flower has been impressed all over, take a small straight line and add a stalk below each flower; then place a leaf on each side of the straight line to complete the pattern.

Fig. 105 (reduced)

Fig. 105 (reduced)

Fig. 105 (smaller version)

A development of the same principle is shown at fig. 105, in which some gouges are introduced. Any number of other combinations will occur to any one using the tools. Frequently questions will arise as to whether a tool is to be put this way or that way, and whether a line is to curve up or down. Whenever there is such an alternative open, there is the germ of another pattern. All-over diaper patterns[237] may be varied in any number of ways. One way is to vary the design in alternate spaces. If this is done one of the designs should be such that it will divide down the centre both ways and so finish off the pattern comfortably at the edges. The pattern may be based on the upright and the cross-lines of the marking up, or the marking up may be on a different principle[238] altogether. The designer, after a little practice, will be bewildered by the infinite number of combinations that occur to him.

A development of the same principle is shown at fig. 105, where some gouges are introduced. Anyone using the tools will come up with plenty of other combinations. Questions will often come up about whether to position a tool this way or that way, and whether a line should curve up or down. Whenever there’s a choice to make, there’s the potential for another pattern to emerge. All-over diaper patterns[237] can be modified in many ways. One option is to alternate the design in different spaces. If you do this, one of the designs should be set up to split down the center both ways, creating a clean finish at the edges. The pattern may be based on the vertical and horizontal lines used for marking up, or the marking up might be done using an entirely different approach[238]. After some practice, the designer will be amazed by the endless combinations that come to mind.

Fig. 106 (reduced)

Fig. 106 (reduced)

Fig. 106 (smaller)

The diaper is selected for a beginning, because it is the easiest form of pattern to make, as there is no question of getting round corners, and very little of studying proportion. It is selected also because it teaches the student the decorative value of simple forms repeated on some orderly system. When he has grasped this, he has grasped the underlying principle of nearly all successful tooled ornament. Diapers are good practice, because in a close, all-over pattern the tools must be put down in definite places, or an appalling muddle will result. In tooling; a repeat of the same few tools, is the best possible practice, giving as it does the same work[239] over and over again under precisely the same conditions, and concentrating, on one book cover, the practice that might be spread over several backs and sides more sparingly decorated, when variety[240] of conditions would confuse the student.

The diaper is chosen as a starting point because it's the simplest type of pattern to create, with no need to worry about round corners or much focus on proportion. It's also selected because it teaches students the artistic value of simple shapes repeated in a systematic way. Once they've understood this, they grasp the basic principle behind most successful tooled ornamentation. Diapers provide good practice since, in a tight, all-over pattern, tools need to be placed precisely, or it will lead to a messy result. In tooling, repeating the same few tools is the best practice possible, as it involves doing the same work[239] repeatedly under exactly the same conditions, allowing for concentrated practice on one book cover instead of spreading it out over multiple less-decorated backs and sides, where varied conditions could confuse the student.

Fig. 107.

Fig. 107.

Fig. 107.

When the principles of the diaper have been mastered, and the student has become familiar with the limitations of his tools, other schemes of decoration may be attempted, such as borders, centres, or panels.

When the basics of the diaper technique have been learned, and the student has gotten to know the limitations of his tools, they can try out other decoration ideas, like borders, centers, or panels.

A form of border connected with cross-lines is shown at fig. 106. This is made up of a repeat of the spray built up of three tools and four gouges shown at fig. 107, with slight modification at the corners. Other schemes for borders are those in which flowers grow inwards from the edge of the boards, or outwards from a panel at the centre, or on both sides of a line about half an inch from the edge. A pattern may also be made to grow all round the centre panel. Borders will be found more difficult to manage than simple diapers, and at first, are best[241] built up on the same principle—the repeat of some simple element.

A type of border featuring cross-lines is illustrated at fig. 106. This border consists of a repeated spray made up of three tools and four gouges, as shown at fig. 107, with slight modifications at the corners. Other border styles include flowers growing inward from the edges of the boards, outward from a central panel, or along both sides of a line about half an inch from the edge. A design can also be created to grow around the central panel. Borders are generally more challenging to work with than simple patterns, so it's best to start by building them up using the same concept—repeating a simple element.[241]

Fig. 108 (reduced)

Fig. 108 (reduced)

Fig. 108 (smaller)

The decoration may be concentrated on parts of the cover, such as the centre or corners. A design for a centre is shown at fig. 108, and below is shown the way to construct it. A piece of paper is folded, as shown by the dotted lines, and an eighth of the pattern drawn with a soft pencil and folded over on the line A, and transferred by being rubbed at the back with a folder. This is lined in with a pencil, and folded over on the line B and rubbed off. This is lined in and folded over on A and C, rubbed off as before, and the whole lined in. The overs and unders of the lines are then marked, and gouges selected to fit. Of course it will take several trials before the lines will interlace pleasantly, and the tools fit in. Another centre, in which a spray is repeated three times, is shown at fig. 109, and any number of others will occur to the student after a little practice. A change of tools, or the slight alteration of a line, will give an entirely new aspect to a pattern. At page 334 is shown an all-over pattern growing from the bottom centre of the board. In this design the leather was[242] dark green, with a lighter green panel in the centre. The berries were inlaid in bright red. Although at first glance it seems an intricate design, it is made up like the others of repetitions of simple[243] forms.

The decoration can be focused on certain areas of the cover, like the center or corners. A design for the center is shown at fig. 108, with instructions below on how to create it. Start by folding a piece of paper as indicated by the dotted lines, then sketch an eighth of the pattern lightly with a soft pencil and fold it over along line A. Transfer the design by rubbing the back with a folder. Use a pencil to outline the design, fold it over along line B, and rub it off. Repeat this for lines A and C, and then outline the whole design. Mark the overs and unders of the lines and choose gouges that fit. It may take several attempts to get the lines to interlace nicely and for the tools to fit properly. Another center design that features a spray repeated three times is shown at fig. 109, and with some practice, students will come up with many more ideas. Changing tools or slightly altering a line can completely transform a pattern. On page 334, there's an all-over pattern that starts from the bottom center of the board. In this design, the leather was dark green, with a lighter green panel in the center, and the berries were inlaid in bright red. Although it might look complicated at first, like the others, it consists of repetitions of simple forms.

Fig. 109 (reduced)

Fig. 109 (reduced)

Fig. 109 (smaller)

When the student has become proficient in the arrangement of tools in combination with lines, a design consisting entirely, or almost entirely, of lines may be tried. This is more difficult, because the limitations are not so obvious; but here again the principle of repetition, and even distribution, should be followed. At fig. 110 is shown a design almost entirely composed of lines, built up on the same principle as the centre at fig. 108.

When the student has become skilled at organizing tools along with lines, a design made up mostly or entirely of lines can be attempted. This is more challenging because the boundaries aren't as clear; however, the principles of repetition and even distribution should still apply. At fig. 110 is a design that is almost entirely made of lines, created using the same principle as the center at fig. 108.

Fig. 110 (reduced)

Fig. 110 (reduced)

Fig. 110 (smaller version)

The ends of the bands form a very[244] pleasant starting-place for patterns. At pp. 330, 332-6 are shown ways of utilising[245] this method. To look right, a pattern must be consistent throughout. The tools and their arrangement must have about the same amount of convention. Gold tooling, dealing, as it does, with flat forms in silhouette only, necessitates very considerable formality in the design of the tools and of their arrangement on the cover. Modern finishers have become so skilful, that they are able to produce in gold tooling almost any design that can be drawn in lines with a pencil, and some truly marvellous results are obtained by the use of inlays, and specially cut gouges. As a rule, such patterns simply serve to show the skill of the finisher, and to make one wonder who could have been foolish enough to select so limited and laborious a method as gold tooling for carrying them out.

The ends of the bands create a very[244] nice starting point for patterns. At pp. 330, 332-6 are shown ways to use[245] this method. To look right, a pattern needs to be consistent throughout. The tools and their arrangement should have roughly the same level of convention. Gold tooling, which deals only with flat shapes in silhouette, requires a high level of formality in the design of the tools and their arrangement on the cover. Modern finishers have become so skilled that they can create almost any design in gold tooling that can be sketched with a pencil, and some truly amazing results come from using inlays and specially shaped gouges. Typically, such patterns are just meant to show off the finisher's skill and make one wonder who would be foolish enough to choose such a limited and labor-intensive method as gold tooling to execute them.

Generally speaking, successful gold-tooled patterns show evidence of having been designed with the tools; of being, in fact, mere arrangements of the tools, and not of having been first designed with a pencil, and then worked with tools cut to fit the drawing. This does not of course apply to patterns composed entirely of lines, or to patterns composed of lines of dots.[246]

In general, successful gold-tooled patterns appear to have been created using the tools themselves; they seem to be simple arrangements made by the tools rather than something first sketched out with a pencil and then crafted with tools shaped to match the drawing. This doesn't, of course, apply to patterns made entirely of lines or patterns made up of lines of dots.[246]

If artists wish to design for gold tooling without first mastering the details, probably the safest way will be for them to design in lines of gold dots. Some successful patterns carried out in this way were shown at the Arts and Crafts Exhibition some years ago.

If artists want to create designs for gold tooling without mastering all the details first, the safest approach is to use lines of gold dots in their designs. Some successful patterns done this way were displayed at the Arts and Crafts Exhibition a few years ago.

Designs for gold-tooled binding should always be constructed on some geometrical plan, and whatever pattern there is, symmetrically distributed over the cover.

Designs for gold-tooled binding should always be based on a geometrical plan, and any pattern present should be symmetrically arranged across the cover.

If lettering can be introduced, it will be found to be most useful when arranging a pattern. It gives dignity and purpose to a design, and is also highly decorative. Lettering may be arranged in panels, as at page 332, or in a border round the edge of the board, and in many other ways. It may either consist of the title of the book, or some line or verse from it or connected with it, or may refer to its history, or to the owner. Anything that gives a personal interest to a book, such as the arms of the owner, the initials or name of the giver or receiver of a present, with perhaps the date of the gift, is of value.

If you incorporate lettering, it can be really helpful when putting together a design. It adds elegance and intention to the artwork, and it’s also very decorative. Lettering can be arranged in panels, as shown on page 332, or as a border around the edges of the board, among other options. It might include the book's title, a line or verse from it, something related to its history, or details about the owner. Anything that adds a personal touch to a book, like the owner's coat of arms, initials, or the name of the person who gave or received it, along with the date of the gift, is valuable.

The use of the small fillet makes it possible to employ long, slightly-curved[247] lines. Gold-tooled lines have in themselves such great beauty, that designers are often tempted to make them meander about the cover in a weak and aimless way. As the limitations enforced by the use of gouges tend to keep the curves strong and small, and as the use of the small fillet tends to the production of long, weak curves, students are advised at first to restrict the curved lines in their patterns to such as can be readily worked with gouges.

Using the small fillet allows for the creation of long, slightly curved[247] lines. Gold-tooled lines are inherently beautiful, which often tempts designers to have them wander around the cover in an aimless and weak manner. Since the limitations of using gouges help maintain strong, small curves, and since the small fillet tends to produce long, weak curves, students are advised to initially limit the curved lines in their designs to those that can be easily worked with gouges.

Fig. 111.

Fig. 111.

Fig. 111.

It must be remembered that a gouge or fillet line is very thin, and will look weak if it goes far without support. For this reason interlaced lines are advocated.

It should be noted that a gouge or fillet line is very thin and will appear weak if it stretches too far without support. For this reason, interlaced lines are recommended.

Gouge lines are easier to work, and look better, if a small space is left where the gouges end. This is especially the[248] case where lines bearing leaves or flowers branch from the main stem (see fig. 111).

Gouge lines are easier to manage and look better if you leave a small gap where the gouges finish. This is particularly true when lines featuring leaves or flowers branch off from the main stem (see fig. 111).

Gouges and fillets need not always be of the same thickness of line, and two or three sets of different gauges may be kept. A finisher can always alter the thickness of a gouge with emery paper.

Gouges and fillets don’t always have to be the same line thickness, and you can keep two or three sets of different gauges. A finisher can always change the thickness of a gouge using emery paper.

One method of arranging gold-tooled lines is to treat them in design as if they were wires in tension, and knot and twist them together. Provided the idea is consistently adhered to throughout, such a pattern is often very successful.

One way to arrange gold-tooled lines is to design them as if they were wires under tension, twisting and knotting them together. As long as the concept is followed consistently, this pattern can be very effective.

Fig. 112.

Fig. 112.

Fig. 112.

A simple arrangement of straight lines will be sufficient ornamentation for most books. Three schemes for such ornamentation are shown. In fig. 112 the[249] “tie-downs” may be in “blind” and the lines in gold. The arrangement shown at fig. 113 leaves a panel at the top which may be utilised for lettering.[250]

A simple design of straight lines will be enough decoration for most books. Three ideas for this kind of decoration are shown. In fig. 112 the “tie-downs” can be in “blind” and the lines in gold. The design at fig. 113 leaves a space at the top that can be used for lettering.

Fig. 113.

Fig. 113.

Fig. 113.

[251] Fig. 114.

Fig. 114.

Fig. 114.

Fig. 115.
Fig. 115.

Fig. 115.

Fig. 115.

DESIGNING FOR BACKS[252]

The decoration of the back of a book is difficult owing to the very small space usually available in the panels. The first consideration must be the lettering, and when that has been arranged, as described in Chapter XV, a second paper is got out for the pattern. The back panel should generally be treated in the same style and, if possible, with the same tools as the sides, if they are decorated. It will often be found far easier to design a full-gilt side than a satisfactory back.

The decoration on the back of a book is challenging due to the limited space typically available in the panels. The primary focus should be on the lettering, and once that's set up, as explained in Chapter XV, a second sheet is used for the pattern. The back panel should usually be styled similarly to the sides, and if they're decorated, it's ideal to use the same tools for both. You'll often find it much simpler to design a fully gilded side than to create an appealing back.

A design may be made to fit one panel of the book and repeated on all those not required for lettering (see pages 332-34), or it may be made to grow up from panel to panel (see fig. 115). In the case of sets of books in which the volumes vary very much in thickness, some pattern must be made that can be contracted and expanded without altering the general look of the back (see fig. 115).[253]

A design can be created to fit one panel of the book and repeated on all the panels that don’t need lettering (see pages 332-34), or it can be designed to flow from one panel to the next (see fig. 115). For sets of books where the volumes differ significantly in thickness, a pattern must be developed that can be adjusted without changing the overall appearance of the spine (see fig. 115).[253]

DESIGNING FOR INSIDE OF BOARDS

The inside margins of the board permit of a little delicate decoration. At fig. 116 are shown two ways of treating this part of the binding. The inside of the board is sometimes covered all over with leather, and tooled as elaborately, or more elaborately, than the outside. If there are vellum ends, they may be enriched with a little tooling.

The inner margins of the board allow for some subtle decoration. At fig. 116 are shown two ways to handle this section of the binding. The inside of the board is sometimes completely covered in leather and tooled as intricately, or even more intricately, than the outside. If there are vellum ends, they might be enhanced with a bit of tooling.

Fig. 116.

Fig. 116.

Fig. 116.

The edges of the boards may have a gold line run on them, and the head-cap may be decorated with a few dots.

The edges of the boards might have a gold line running along them, and the top cover could be decorated with some dots.

CHAPTER XVII[254]

Pasting down End Papers—Opening Books

Pasting down endpapers—Opening books

PASTING DOWN END PAPERS

When the finishing is done, the end papers should be pasted down on to the board; or if there is a leather joint, the panel left should be filled in to match the end paper.

When the finishing is complete, the end papers should be glued down to the board; or if there's a leather joint, the space left should be filled in to match the end paper.

To paste down end papers, the book is placed on the block with the board open (see fig. 117, A), the waste sheets are torn off, the joints cleared of any glue or paste, and the boards flattened, as described at page 171 for pasting down leather joints. One of the paste-down papers is then stretched over the board and rubbed down in the joint, and the amount to be cut off to make it fit into the space left by the turn-in of the leather is marked on it with dividers, measuring from the edge of the board. A cutting tin is then placed on the book, the paste-down paper turned over it, and the edges trimmed off to the divider points with a[255] knife and straight-edge, leaving small pieces to cover the ends of the joint (fig. 117, A, c).

To attach the endpapers, the book is set on the block with the cover open (see fig. 117, A). The excess sheets are torn off, any glue or paste is cleared from the joints, and the boards are flattened, as explained on page 171 for pasting down leather joints. One of the paste-down papers is then stretched over the board and smoothed into the joint. The amount to be cut off to fit into the space left by the leather turn-in is marked using dividers, measuring from the edge of the board. A cutting tin is placed on the book, the paste-down paper is turned over it, and the edges are trimmed to the divider marks with a[255] knife and a straight-edge, leaving small pieces to cover the ends of the joint (fig. 117, A, c).

The cutting and pasting down of these small pieces in the joint are rather difficult; they should come exactly to the edges of the board.

The cutting and pasting of these small pieces in the joint are pretty tricky; they need to match the edges of the board exactly.

Fig. 117.

Fig. 117.

Fig. 117.

When both paste-down papers are trimmed to size, one of them is well pasted with thin paste in which there[256] are no lumps, with a piece of waste paper under it to protect the book. The joints should also be pasted, and the paste rubbed in with the finger and any surplus removed.

When both paste-down papers are cut to size, one of them is evenly coated with a thin layer of paste that’s lump-free, using a piece of scrap paper underneath to protect the book. The joints should also be pasted, and the paste should be smoothed in with your finger, removing any excess.

The pasted paper is then brought over on to the board, the edges adjusted exactly to their places, and rubbed down. The joint must next be rubbed down through paper. It is difficult to get the paper to stick evenly in the joint, and great nicety is needed here. All rubbing down must be done through paper, or the “paste-down” will be soiled or made shiny.

The pasted paper is then brought over to the board, with the edges aligned precisely in their places, and pressed down. The joint must then be smoothed out through paper. It can be challenging to make the paper stick evenly at the joint, and precision is crucial here. All smoothing must be done through paper, or the “paste-down” will get dirty or shiny.

Some papers stretch very much when pasted, and will need to be cut a little smaller than needed, and put down promptly after pasting. Thin vellum may be put down with paste in which there is a very little glue, but thicker vellum is better put down with thin glue. In pasting vellum, very great care is needed to prevent the brush-marks from showing through. If the vellum is thin, the board must be lined with white or toned paper with a smooth surface. This paper must be quite clean, as any marks will show through the vellum, and make it look dirty.

Some papers stretch a lot when glued, so they need to be cut a bit smaller than required and placed right after applying the glue. Thin vellum can be glued with a paste that has a little bit of glue in it, but thicker vellum is better applied with thin glue. When pasting vellum, it's crucial to be careful to avoid brush marks showing through. If the vellum is thin, the board should be lined with white or toned paper that has a smooth surface. This paper must be completely clean, as any marks will show through the vellum and make it look dirty.

When one side is pasted down the book[257] can be turned over without shutting the board, and the other board opened and pasted down in the same way (see fig. 117, B). In turning over a book, a piece of white paper should be put under the newly-pasted side, as, being damp, it will soil very readily. When both ends have been pasted down the joints should be examined and rubbed down again, and the book stood up on end with the boards open until the end papers are dry. The boards may be held open with a piece of cardboard cut as shown at fig. 71.

When one side is glued down, the book[257] can be flipped over without closing the cover, and the other cover can be opened and glued down in the same way (see fig. 117, B). When flipping through a book, place a piece of white paper under the newly glued side to prevent it from getting dirty since it can easily stain when damp. After both ends have been glued down, check and smooth the joints, then stand the book upright with the covers open until the endpapers are dry. You can prop the covers open with a piece of cardboard cut as shown at fig. 71.

If there are cloth joints they are put down with glue, and the board paper is placed nearly to the edge of the joint, leaving very little cloth visible.

If there are cloth joints, they are secured with glue, and the board paper is positioned almost to the edge of the joint, leaving very little cloth exposed.

In the process of finishing, the boards of a book will nearly always be warped a little outward, but the pasted end papers should draw the boards a little as they dry, causing them to curve slightly towards the book. With vellum ends there is a danger that the boards will be warped too much.

In the finishing process, the covers of a book will almost always be slightly warped outward, but the glued end papers should pull the covers inward a bit as they dry, causing them to curve slightly towards the book. With vellum ends, there’s a risk that the covers will warp too much.

OPENING NEWLY BOUND BOOKS

Before sending out a newly bound book the binder should go through it, opening[258] it here and there to ease the back. The volume is laid on a table, and the leaves opened a short distance from the front, and then at an equal distance from the back, and then in one or two places nearer the centre of the book, the leaves being pressed down with the hand at each opening. If the book is a valuable one, every leaf should then be turned over separately and each opening pressed down, beginning from the centre and working first one way and then the other. In this way the back will be bent evenly at all points. When a book has been opened, it should be lightly pressed for a short time without anything in the joints.

Before sending out a newly bound book, the binder should check it by opening[258] it in a few places to help with the spine. The book is placed on a table, and the pages are opened slightly from the front, then at an equal distance from the back, and finally in one or two spots closer to the center of the book, pressing down on the pages with a hand at each opening. If it's a valuable book, each page should then be flipped over individually, and each opening pressed down, starting from the center and moving in both directions. This will ensure the spine bends evenly at all points. Once a book has been opened, it should be lightly pressed for a short time without anything in the joints.

If a book is sent out unopened, the first person into whose hand it falls will probably open it somewhere in the centre, bending the covers back and “breaking” the back; and if any leaves chance to have been stuck together in edge-gilding, they are likely to be torn if carelessly opened. A book with a “broken” back will always have a tendency to open in the same place, and will not keep its shape. It would be worth while for librarians to have newly bound books carefully opened. An assistant could “open” a large number[259] of books in a day, and the benefit to the bindings would amply compensate for the small trouble and cost involved.

If a book is sent out unopened, the first person who gets it will probably open it somewhere in the middle, bending the covers back and “breaking” the spine; and if any pages happen to be stuck together due to gilding, they are likely to tear if opened carelessly. A book with a “broken” spine will always tend to open in the same spot and won’t hold its shape. It would be worth it for librarians to have newly bound books opened carefully. An assistant could “open” a large number [259] of books in a day, and the benefits for the bindings would more than make up for the minor trouble and cost involved.

CHAPTER XVIII

Clasps and Ties—Metal on Bindings

Clasps and Ties—Metal on Covers

CLASPS AND TIES

Some books need to be clasped to keep the leaves flat. All books written or printed on vellum should have clasps. Vellum unless kept flat is apt to cockle, and this in a book will force the leaves apart and admit dust. If a book is tightly wedged in a shelf the leaves will be kept flat, but as the chance removal of any other book from the row will remove the pressure, it is much better to provide clasps for vellum books.

Some books need to be fastened to keep the pages flat. All books written or printed on vellum should have fasteners. Vellum, unless kept flat, tends to warp, which can make the pages separate and let in dust. If a book is tightly packed on a shelf, the pages will stay flat, but if any other book is taken out from the row, it will relieve the pressure, so it's much better to provide fasteners for vellum books.

Very thick books, and those with a great many folded plates, are better for having clasps to prevent the leaves from sagging. As nearly all books are now kept in bookshelves, and as any projection on the side of a book is likely to injure the neighbouring[260] volume, a form of clasp should be used that has no raised parts on the boards.

Very thick books, especially those with lots of folded plates, are better off with clasps to keep the pages from sagging. Since almost all books are now stored on shelves, and any part that sticks out on the side of a book can damage the adjacent[260] volume, it’s best to use a clasp design that doesn’t have any raised parts on the covers.

Fig. 118.

Fig. 118.

Fig. 118.

At fig. 118 is shown a simple clasp suitable for small books with mill-board sides, with details of the metal parts, made of thick silver wire below. Double boards must be “made,” and the flattened ends of the silver catch inserted between the two thicknesses, and glued in place. About one-eighth of an inch of the end should project. In covering, the leather must be pierced and carefully worked round the catch. To make the plait, three strips of thin leather are slipped through the ring, and the ends of each strip pasted together. The three doubled strips are then plaited and the end of the plait put through a hole in the lower board of the book about half an inch from the edge, and glued down inside. A groove may be cut in the mill-board from the hole to the edge before covering, to make a depression[261] in which the plait will lie, and a depression may be scooped out of the inner surface of the board to receive the ends.

At fig. 118, there's a simple clasp suitable for small books with mill-board sides, along with details of the metal parts made from thick silver wire below. Double boards need to be “made,” and the flattened ends of the silver catch should be inserted between the two layers and glued in place. About one-eighth of an inch of the end should stick out. When covering, the leather must be pierced and carefully worked around the catch. To create the braid, three strips of thin leather are slipped through the ring, and the ends of each strip are glued together. The three doubled strips are then braided, and the end of the braid is put through a hole in the lower board of the book about half an inch from the edge and glued down inside. A groove can be cut in the mill-board from the hole to the edge before covering to create a depression where the braid will sit, and a depression can also be scooped out of the inner surface of the board to accommodate the ends.

Fig. 119.

Fig. 119.

Fig. 119.

At fig. 119 is a somewhat similar clasp with three plaits suitable for large books. The metal end and the method of inserting it into wooden boards are shown below. The turned-down end should go right through the board, and be riveted on the inside. When the three plaits are worked, a little band of silver may be riveted on just below the ring.

At fig. 119 is a similar clasp with three braids suited for large books. The metal end and how to insert it into wooden boards are shown below. The turned-down end should go all the way through the board and be riveted on the inside. When the three braids are done, a small band of silver can be riveted just below the ring.

A very simple fastening that is sometimes useful is shown at fig. 77. A very small bead is threaded on to a piece of catgut, and the two ends of the gut brought together and put through a larger bead. The ends of the gut with the beads on them are laced into the top[262] board of the book, with the bead projecting over the edge, and a loop of gut is laced into the bottom board. If the loop can be made exactly the right length, this is a serviceable method.

A very simple fastening that can be helpful is shown at fig. 77. A small bead is threaded onto a piece of catgut, and the two ends of the gut are brought together and passed through a larger bead. The ends of the gut with the beads on them are laced into the top[262] board of the book, with the bead sticking out over the edge, and a loop of gut is laced into the bottom board. If the loop is the right length, this is a practical method.

Silk or leather ties may be used to keep books shut, but they are apt to be in the way when the book is read, and as hardly anybody troubles to tie them, they are generally of very little use.

Silk or leather ties can be used to keep books closed, but they tend to get in the way when you're reading, and since hardly anyone bothers to tie them, they are usually not very helpful.

METAL ON BINDINGS

Metal corners and bosses are a great protection to bindings, but if the books are to go into shelves, the metal must be quite smooth and flat. A metal shoe on the lower edge of the boards is an excellent thing for preserving the binding of heavy books.

Metal corners and bosses provide excellent protection for bindings, but if the books are going on shelves, the metal needs to be completely smooth and flat. A metal shoe on the bottom edge of the covers is a great way to preserve the binding of heavy books.

Bosses and other raised metal work should be restricted to books that will be used on lecterns or reading desks. The frontispiece is from a drawing of an early sixteenth-century book, bound in white pigskin, and ornamented with brass corners, centres, and clasps; and at page 323 is shown a fifteenth-century binding with plain protecting bosses. On this book[263] there were originally five bosses on each board, but the centre ones have been lost.

Bosses and other raised metalwork should be limited to books that will be used on lecterns or reading desks. The frontispiece is based on a drawing of an early sixteenth-century book, bound in white pigskin, and decorated with brass corners, centers, and clasps; and on page 323, there’s a fifteenth-century binding with plain protective bosses. On this book[263], there were originally five bosses on each board, but the center ones have been lost.

Bindings may be entirely covered with metal, but the connection between the binding and the book is in that case seldom quite satisfactory. The most satisfactory metal-covered bindings that I have seen are those in which the metal is restricted to the boards. The book is bound in wooden boards, with thick leather at the back, and plaques of metal nailed to the wood. The metal may be set with jewels or decorated with enamel, and embossed or chased in various ways.

Bindings can be fully covered in metal, but the connection between the binding and the book is usually not very good. The best metal-covered bindings I've come across are the ones where the metal is limited to the boards. The book is bound in wooden boards, with thick leather on the spine, and metal plaques attached to the wood. The metal can be set with jewels or embellished with enamel, and it can be embossed or designed in various ways.

Jewels are sometimes set in invisible settings below the leather of bindings, giving them the appearance of being set in the leather. This gives them an insecure look, and it is better to frankly show the metal settings and make a decorative feature of them.

Jewels are sometimes placed in hidden settings beneath the leather of bindings, making them look like they are set into the leather. This creates a somewhat unstable appearance, and it's preferable to openly display the metal settings and turn them into a decorative feature.

CHAPTER XIX

Leather

Leather

LEATHER

Of all the materials used by the bookbinders, leather is the most important[264] and the most difficult to select wisely. It is extremely difficult to judge a leather by its appearance.

Of all the materials used by bookbinders, leather is the most important[264] and the most challenging to choose wisely. It's really tough to assess leather just by how it looks.

“We find now, that instead of leather made from sheep, calf, goat, and pigskins, each having, when finished, its own characteristic surface, that sheepskins are got up to look like calf, morocco, or pigskin; that calf is grained to resemble morocco, or so polished and flattened as to have but little character left; while goatskins are grained in any number of ways, and pigskin is often grained like levant morocco. So clever are some of these imitations, that it takes a skilled expert to identify a leather when it is on a book.”

“We now find that instead of leather made from sheep, calf, goat, and pigskins—each with its own unique surface when finished—sheepskins are processed to look like calf, morocco, or pigskin; calf is grained to resemble morocco, or so polished and flat that it loses much of its character; meanwhile, goatskins are grained in various ways, and pigskin is often grained to look like levant morocco. Some of these imitations are so skillful that it takes a trained expert to identify the leather when it's on a book.”

There have been complaints for a long time of the want of durability of modern bookbinding leather, but there has not been until lately any systematic investigation into the causes of its premature decay.

There have been complaints for a long time about the lack of durability of modern bookbinding leather, but until recently, there hasn't been any thorough investigation into the reasons for its early deterioration.

By permission, I shall quote largely from the report of the committee appointed by the Society of Arts to inquire into the subject. There are on this special committee leather manufacturers, bookbinders, librarians, and owners of libraries. The[265] report issued is the result of an immense amount of work done. Many libraries were visited, and hundreds of experiments and tests were carried out by the sub-committees. There is much useful information in the report that all bookbinders and librarians should read. The work of the committee is not yet finished, but its findings may be accepted as conclusive as far as they go.

By permission, I will quote extensively from the report of the committee appointed by the Society of Arts to explore this topic. This special committee includes leather manufacturers, bookbinders, librarians, and library owners. The[265] report produced is the result of a tremendous amount of work. Many libraries were visited, and hundreds of experiments and tests were conducted by the sub-committees. The report contains a lot of useful information that all bookbinders and librarians should read. The committee's work is not yet complete, but its findings can be considered conclusive for now.

The committee first set themselves to ascertain if the complaints of the premature decay of modern bookbinding leather are justified by facts, and on this point report that:—

The committee first aimed to determine whether the complaints about the early deterioration of modern bookbinding leather are supported by facts, and regarding this, they report that:—

“As regards the common belief that modern binding leather does decay prematurely, the sub-committee satisfied themselves that books bound during the last eighty or hundred years showed far greater evidence of deterioration than those of an earlier date. Many recent bindings showed evidence of decay after so short a period as ten, or even five years. The sub-committee came to the conclusion that there is ample justification for the general complaint that modern leather is not so durable as that formerly used. To fix the date of the commencement[266] of this deterioration was a difficult matter; but they came to the conclusion that while leather of all periods showed some signs of decay, the deterioration becomes more general on books bound after 1830, while some leathers seem to be generally good until about 1860, after which date nearly all leathers seem to get worse. The deterioration of calf bindings at the latter end of the 19th century may be attributed as much to the excessive thinness as to the poor quality of the material.”

“As for the common belief that modern binding leather breaks down too quickly, the sub-committee confirmed that books bound in the last eighty to hundred years showed much more signs of deterioration than those from earlier eras. Many recent bindings started to show decay after such a short time as ten or even five years. The sub-committee concluded that there is plenty of reason to support the widespread complaint that modern leather isn’t as durable as what was used in the past. Pinpointing the exact start of this deterioration was challenging; however, they concluded that while leather from all time periods shows some level of decay, the decline becomes more pronounced in books bound after 1830, and some leathers appear to be mostly good until around 1860, after which nearly all leathers seem to decline. The deterioration of calf bindings toward the end of the 19th century can be attributed as much to their excessive thinness as to the poor quality of the material.”

The committee endeavoured to ascertain the relative durability of the leathers used for bookbinding, and after visiting many libraries, and comparing bindings, they report as follows:—

The committee worked to determine the durability of the leathers used for bookbinding, and after visiting many libraries and comparing different bindings, they report as follows:—

“As to the suitability of various leathers, the sub-committee came to the conclusion that of the old leathers (15th and 16th century), white pigskin, probably alum ‘tanned,’ is the most durable, but its excessive hardness and want of flexibility renders this leather unsuitable for most modern work. Old brown calf has lasted fairly well, but loses its flexibility, and becomes stiff and brittle when exposed to light and air. Some of the white tawed[267] skins of the 15th and 16th century, other than white pigskin, and probably deerskin, have lasted very well. Some 15th and 16th century sheepskin bindings have remained soft and flexible, but the surface is soft, and usually much damaged by friction. Vellum seems to have lasted fairly well, but is easily influenced by atmospheric changes, and is much affected by light. Early specimens of red morocco from the 16th to the end of the 18th century were found in good condition, and of all the leathers noticed, this seems to be the least affected by the various conditions to which it had been subjected. In the opinion of the committee, most of this leather has been tanned with sumach or some closely allied tanning material. Morocco bindings earlier than 1860 were generally found to be in fairly good condition, but morocco after that date seems to be much less reliable, and in many cases has become utterly rotten. During the latter part of the 18th century it became customary to pare down calf until it was as thin as paper. Since about 1830 hardly any really sound calf seems to have been used, as, whether thick or thin, it appears generally to have perished. Sheepskin[268] bindings of the early part of the century are many of them still in good condition. Since about 1860 sheepskin as sheepskin is hardly to be found. Sheepskins are grained in imitation of other leathers, and these imitation-grained leathers are generally found to be in a worse condition than any of the other bindings, except, perhaps, some of the very thin calfskin. Undyed modern pigskin seems to last well, but some coloured pigskin bindings had entirely perished. Modern leathers dyed with the aid of sulphuric acid are all to be condemned. In nearly every case Russia leather was found to have become rotten, at least in bindings of the last fifty years.”

“As for the suitability of different leathers, the sub-committee concluded that among the old leathers (15th and 16th centuries), white pigskin, probably alum-tanned, is the most durable. However, its excessive hardness and lack of flexibility make it unsuitable for most modern uses. Old brown calf has held up reasonably well, but it loses its flexibility and becomes stiff and brittle when exposed to light and air. Some of the white tawed[267] skins from the 15th and 16th centuries, other than white pigskin, likely deerskin, have lasted very well. Some 15th and 16th century sheepskin bindings have remained soft and flexible, but their surface is delicate and usually suffers from friction damage. Vellum seems to have held up fairly well, but it is easily influenced by changes in the atmosphere and is greatly affected by light. Early examples of red morocco from the 16th to the end of the 18th century were found in good shape, and of all the leathers noted, this one seems to be the least impacted by various conditions it faced. The committee believes most of this leather was tanned with sumach or a closely related tanning agent. Morocco bindings made before 1860 were generally found to be in fair condition, but those made after that date seem to be much less reliable, and in many cases, they have completely rotted. During the latter part of the 18th century, it became standard to thin calfskin down to the thickness of paper. Since about 1830, it appears that hardly any truly sound calfskin has been used, as both thick and thin varieties generally seem to have degraded. Early 19th-century sheepskin bindings are still in good shape, but since around 1860, authentic sheepskin has become rare. Sheepskins are often grained to imitate other leathers, and these imitation-grained leathers are usually found to be in worse condition than most other bindings, except possibly for some very thin calfskin. Undyed modern pigskin seems to last well, but some colored pigskin bindings have completely deteriorated. Modern leathers dyed with sulfuric acid are all to be criticized. In nearly every case, Russia leather has been found to have rotted, at least in bindings from the last fifty years.”

On the question of the causes of the decay noticed and the best methods of preparing leather in the future, I may quote the following:—

On the topic of what caused the decay noted and the best ways to prepare leather moving forward, I can reference the following:—

“The work of a sub-committee, which was composed of chemists specially conversant with the treatment of leather, was directed specially to the elucidation of the following points: an investigation of the nature of the decay of leather used for bookbinding; an examination of the causes which produced this decay; a research[269] into the best methods of preparing leather for bookbinding; and a consideration of the points required to be dealt with in the preservation of books.

The sub-committee, made up of chemists who specialize in leather treatment, focused on clarifying the following issues: exploring the reasons behind the decay of leather used in bookbinding, examining the causes of this decay, researching the best methods for preparing leather for bookbinding, and considering the aspects needed for preserving books.[269]

“Taking these points in order, the first one dealt with is the question of the nature of the decay of leather. To arrive at their conclusions on this subject, the sub-committee made a number of tests and analyses of samples of decayed leather bookbindings, as well as of leathers used for binding. The committee found that the most prevalent decay was what they term a red decay, and this they think may be differentiated into old and new, the old red decay being noticeable up to about 1830, and the new decay since that date. In the old decay, the leather becomes hard and brittle, the surface not being easily abraded by friction. The older form is specially noticeable in calf-bound books, tanned presumably with oak bark. The new form affects nearly all leathers, and in extreme cases seems absolutely to destroy the fibres. Another form of deterioration, more noticeable in the newer books, renders the grain of the leather liable to peel off when exposed to the slightest friction. This is the most[270] common form of decay noted in the more recent leathers. In nearly all samples of Russia leather a very violent form of red decay was noticed. In many cases the leather was found to be absolutely rotten in all parts exposed to light and air, so that on the very slightest rubbing with a blunt instrument the leather fell into fine dust....

“Taking these points in order, the first one addressed is the question of what causes leather to decay. To reach their conclusions on this topic, the sub-committee conducted various tests and analyses of samples from decayed leather bookbindings, along with leathers used for binding. The committee discovered that the most common form of decay is what they refer to as red decay, which they believe can be divided into old and new varieties. The old red decay was prevalent until about 1830, while the new decay has been observed since that time. In the old decay, the leather becomes hard and brittle, and its surface is not easily worn away by friction. This older form is particularly evident in calf-bound books, tanned most likely with oak bark. The new form, however, affects nearly all types of leather and, in severe cases, appears to completely destroy the fibers. Another type of deterioration, more noticeable in newer books, makes the grain of the leather prone to peeling off with even the slightest friction. This is the most[270] common form of decay observed in more recent leathers. In almost all samples of Russia leather, a very severe type of red decay was noted. In many instances, the leather was found to be completely rotten in all areas exposed to light and air, to the extent that even the slightest rubbing with a blunt instrument would reduce the leather to fine dust....

“The second point is the cause of the decay. An extensive series of experiments was carried out with a view of determining the causes of the decay of bindings. The sub-committee find that this is caused by both mechanical and by chemical influences. Of the latter, some are due to mistakes of the leather manufacturer and the bookbinder, others to the want of ventilation, and to improper heating and lighting of libraries. In some cases inferior leathers are finished (by methods in themselves injurious) so as to imitate the better class leathers, and of course where these are used durability cannot be expected. But in the main the injury for which the manufacturer and bookbinder are responsible must be attributed rather to ignorance of the effect of the means employed to give the leather the[271] outward qualities required for binding, than to the intentional production of an inferior article.... Leathers produced by different tanning materials, although they may be equally sound and durable mechanically, vary very much in their resistance to other influences, such as light, heat, and gas fumes.

“The second point is the cause of the decay. A comprehensive series of experiments was conducted to identify the causes of binding decay. The sub-committee found that this issue is due to both mechanical and chemical factors. Some of the chemical issues stem from mistakes made by the leather manufacturer and the bookbinder, while others result from poor ventilation, as well as inadequate heating and lighting in libraries. In some instances, low-quality leathers are processed (using methods that are harmful in themselves) to mimic higher-quality leathers, and obviously, durability cannot be expected from these. However, the primary harm for which the manufacturer and bookbinder are accountable is more a matter of ignorance regarding the effects of the methods used to give the leather the[271] outward qualities needed for binding than an intention to produce a subpar product.... Leathers made from different tanning agents, while equally strong and durable mechanically, can vary significantly in how they withstand other factors like light, heat, and gas fumes.”

“For bookbinding purposes, the sub-committee generally condemn the use of tanning materials belonging to the catechol group, although the leathers produced by the use of these materials are for many purposes excellent, and indeed superior. The class of tanning materials which produce the most suitable leather for this particular purpose belong to the pyrogallol group, of which a well known and important example is sumach. East Indian or ‘Persian’ tanned sheep and goat skins, which are suitable for many purposes, and are now used largely for cheap bookbinding purposes, are considered extremely bad. Books bound in these materials have been found to show signs of decay in less than twelve months, and the sub-committee are inclined to believe that no book bound in these leathers, exposed on a shelf to sunlight[272] or gas fumes, can ever be expected to last more than five or six years. Embossing leather under heavy pressure to imitate a grain has a very injurious effect, while the shaving of thick skins greatly reduces the strength of the leather by cutting away the tough fibres of the inner part of the skin. The use of mineral acids in brightening the colour of leather, and in the process of dyeing, has a serious effect in lessening its resistance to decay. A good deal yet remains to be learned about the relative permanency of the different dyes.”

“For bookbinding, the sub-committee generally advises against using tanning materials from the catechol group, even though leathers made with these materials are excellent and often superior for many purposes. The best tanning materials for this specific use come from the pyrogallol group, with sumach being a well-known and important example. East Indian or ‘Persian’ tanned sheep and goat skins, which are suitable for various uses and are now widely used for inexpensive bookbinding, are considered very poor quality. Books bound with these materials have been seen to decay in less than twelve months, and the sub-committee believes that no book bound in these leathers, when exposed to sunlight[272] or gas fumes on a shelf, can be expected to last more than five or six years. Embossing leather under heavy pressure to mimic a grain is very harmful, while shaving thick skins significantly weakens the leather by cutting away the tough fibers of the inner skin layer. Using mineral acids to brighten the leather color and during dyeing seriously reduces its resistance to decay. There is still much to learn about the relative permanence of different dyes.”

On analysis free sulphuric acid was found to be present in nearly all bookbinding leather, and it is the opinion of the committee that even a small quantity of this acid materially lessens the durability of the leather.

On analysis, free sulfuric acid was found in almost all bookbinding leather, and the committee believes that even a small amount of this acid significantly reduces the leather's durability.

“It has been shown by careful experiment, that even a minute quantity of sulphuric acid used in the dye bath to liberate the colour is at once absorbed by the leather, and that no amount of subsequent washing will remove it. In a very large proportion of cases the decay of modern sumach-tanned leather has been due to the sulphuric acid used in the dye[273] bath, and retained in the skin. We have examined very many samples of leather manufactured and sold specially for bookbinding purposes, from different factories, bought from different dealers, or kindly supplied by bookbinders and by librarians, and have found them to contain, in a large number of cases, free sulphuric acid, from 0.5 up to 1.6 per cent.”

“It has been demonstrated through careful experiments that even a small amount of sulfuric acid used in the dye bath to release the color is immediately absorbed by the leather, and no amount of subsequent washing can remove it. In many cases, the deterioration of modern sumach-tanned leather has been caused by the sulfuric acid used in the dye bath, which remains in the skin. We have examined numerous samples of leather specifically manufactured and sold for bookbinding from various factories, purchased from different dealers, or generously supplied by bookbinders and librarians, and found that in many instances, they contained free sulfuric acid ranging from 0.5 to 1.6 percent.”

The publication of the report should tend to fix a standard for bookbinding leather. Hitherto there has been no recognised standard. Bookbinders have selected leather almost entirely by its appearance. It has now been shown that appearance is no test of durability, and the mechanical test of tearing the leather is insufficient. Sound leather should tear with difficulty, and the torn edges should be fringed with long, silky fibres, and any leather which tears very easily, and shows short, curled-up fibres at the torn edges, should be discarded. But though good bookbinding leather will tear with difficulty, and show long fibres where torn, that is in itself not a sufficient test; because it has been shown that the leather that is mechanically the strongest, is not necessarily the most[274] durable and the best able to resist the adverse influences to which books are subject in libraries.

The report's publication should help establish a standard for bookbinding leather. Until now, there hasn't been an accepted standard. Bookbinders have mainly chosen leather based on how it looks. It's now clear that appearance doesn't indicate durability, and the mechanical test of tearing the leather is not enough. Good leather should tear with difficulty, and the torn edges should have long, silky fibers. Any leather that tears easily and shows short, curled fibers at the torn edges should be rejected. However, even though quality bookbinding leather will tear with difficulty and display long fibers when torn, that alone isn't a sufficient test; it's been proven that the mechanically strongest leather isn't necessarily the most durable and doesn't best withstand the damaging conditions books face in libraries.[274]

The report shows that bookbinders and librarians are not, as a general rule, qualified to select leather for bookbinding. In the old days, when the manufacture of leather was comparatively simple, a bookbinder might reasonably be expected to know enough of the processes employed to be able to select his leather. But now so complicated is the manufacture, and so many are the factors to be considered, that an expert should be employed.

The report shows that bookbinders and librarians are generally not qualified to choose leather for bookbinding. In the past, when leather production was relatively simple, a bookbinder could reasonably be expected to know enough about the processes involved to select their leather. However, now the manufacturing process is so complex and there are so many factors to consider that an expert should be hired.

“The committee have satisfied themselves that it is possible to test any leather in such a way as to guarantee its suitability for bookbinding. They have not come to any decision as to the desirability of establishing any formal or official standard, though they consider that this is a point which well deserves future consideration.”

“The committee has confirmed that it's possible to test any leather to ensure it's suitable for bookbinding. They haven't decided whether to establish a formal or official standard, but they believe this is a matter worthy of future discussion.”

It is to be hoped that some system of examining and hall-marking leather by some recognised body, may be instituted. If librarians will specify that the leather to be employed must be certified to be manufactured according to the recommendations of the Society of Arts[275] Committee, there is no reason why leathers should not be obtained as durable as any ever produced. This would necessitate the examining and testing of batches of leather by experts. At present this can be done more or less privately at various places, such as the Yorkshire College, Leeds, or the Herolds’ Institute, Bermondsey. In the near future it is to be hoped that some recognised public body, such as one of the great City Companies interested in leather, may be induced to establish a standard, and to test such leathers as are submitted to them, hall-marking those that come up to the standard. This would enable bookbinders and librarians, in ordering leather, to be sure that it had not been injured in its manufacture. The testing, if done by batches, should not add greatly to the cost of the leather.

It is hoped that a system for examining and certifying leather by a recognized organization will be established. If librarians specify that the leather used must be certified as manufactured according to the recommendations of the Society of Arts Committee, there’s no reason why leathers shouldn’t be obtained that are as durable as any ever produced. This would require experts to examine and test batches of leather. Currently, this can be done more or less privately at various places, like the Yorkshire College in Leeds or the Herolds’ Institute in Bermondsey. In the near future, it is hoped that a recognized public body, such as one of the major City Companies involved in leather, could be encouraged to establish a standard and test the leathers that are submitted to them, hall-marking those that meet the standard. This would allow bookbinders and librarians to be confident that the leather ordered had not been damaged in its manufacture. The testing, if conducted in batches, should not significantly increase the cost of the leather.

On the question of the qualities of an ideal bookbinding leather the committee report:—

On the topic of the qualities of ideal bookbinding leather, the committee reports:—

“It is the opinion of the committee, that the ideal bookbinding leather must have, and retain, great flexibility.... (It) must have a firm grain surface, not easily damaged by friction, and should not be[276] artificially grained.... The committee is of opinion that a pure sumach tannage will answer all these conditions, and that leather can, and will, be now produced that will prove to be as durable as any made in the past.”

“It is the committee's opinion that the best leather for bookbinding needs to have and maintain great flexibility. It should have a strong grain surface that isn't easily damaged by friction and should not be artificially grained. The committee believes that a pure sumach tanning process will meet all these requirements and that leather can be produced now that will be just as durable as any made in the past.”

The committee has so far only dealt with vegetable-tanned leather. I have used, with some success, chrome-tanned calfskin. Chrome leather is difficult to pare, and to work, as it does not become soft when wet, like vegetable-tanned leather. It will stand any reasonable degree of heat, and so might perhaps be useful for top-shelf bindings and for shelf edging. It is extremely strong mechanically, but without further tests I cannot positively recommend it except for trial.

The committee has only worked with vegetable-tanned leather so far. I've had some success using chrome-tanned calfskin. Chrome leather is challenging to trim and work with because it doesn’t soften when wet like vegetable-tanned leather does. It can withstand quite a bit of heat, so it might be useful for high-quality bindings and shelf edging. It's extremely strong, but without more testing, I can't fully recommend it—just for trying it out.

While the strength and probable durability of leather can only be judged by a trained leather chemist, there remains for the binders selection, the kind of leather to use, and its colour.

While the strength and likely durability of leather can only be assessed by a trained leather chemist, the choice of leather type and its color is still up to the binders.

Most of the leather prepared for bookbinding is too highly finished. The finishing processes add a good deal to the cost of the leather, and are apt to be injurious to it, and as much of the high[277] finish is lost in covering, it would be better for the bookbinder to get rougher leather and finish it himself when it is on the book.

Most of the leather used for bookbinding is overly refined. The finishing processes increase the cost of the leather significantly and can be harmful to it. Since much of the high finish gets covered up, it would be better for the bookbinder to use rougher leather and finish it themselves once it's on the book.

The leathers in common use for bookbinding are:—

The leathers commonly used for bookbinding are:—

  • Goatskin, known as morocco.
  • Calf, known as calf and russia.
  • Sheepskin, known as roan, basil, skiver, &c.
  • Pigskin, known as pigskin.
  • Sealskin, known as seal.

Morocco is probably the best leather for extra binding if properly prepared, but experiment has shown that the expensive Levant moroccos are nearly always ruined in their manufacture. A great many samples of the most expensive Levant morocco were tested, with the result that they were all found to contain free sulphuric acid.

Morocco is likely the best leather for additional binding if it's properly processed, but experiments have shown that the pricey Levant moroccos usually get damaged during production. Many samples of the most costly Levant morocco were tested, and it was found that they all contained free sulfuric acid.

Calf.—Modern vegetable-tanned calf has become a highly unsatisfactory material, and until some radical changes are made in the methods of manufacturing it, it should not be used for bookbinding.

Calf.—Modern vegetable-tanned calf has become a very unsatisfactory material, and until some major changes are made in the manufacturing methods, it shouldn't be used for bookbinding.

Sheepskin.—A properly tanned sheepskin makes a very durable, though rather[278] soft and woolly, leather. Much of the bookbinding leather now made from sheepskin is quite worthless. Bookbinders should refuse to have anything to do with any leather that has been artificially grained, as the process is apt to be highly injurious to the skin.

Sheepskin.—A properly tanned sheepskin makes a very durable, though somewhat soft and woolly, leather. Much of the bookbinding leather currently produced from sheepskin is essentially worthless. Bookbinders should avoid any leather that has been artificially grained, as that process can be very damaging to the skin.

Pigskin.—Pigskin is a thoroughly good leather naturally, and very strong, especially the alumed skins; but many of the dyed pigskins are found to be improperly tanned and dyed, and worthless for bookbinding.

Pigskin.—Pigskin is high-quality leather and really tough, especially the alumed skins; however, many dyed pigskins are poorly tanned and dyed, making them unsuitable for bookbinding.

Sealskin is highly recommended by one eminent librarian, but I have not yet had any experience of its use for bookbinding.

Sealskin comes highly recommended by a well-known librarian, but I haven't had any experience using it for bookbinding yet.

The leather that I have found most useful is the Niger goatskin, brought from Africa by the Royal Niger Company; it is a very beautiful colour and texture, and has stood all the tests tried, without serious deterioration. The difficulty with this leather is that, being a native production, it is somewhat carelessly prepared, and is much spoiled by flaws and stains on the surface, and many skins are quite worthless. It is to be hoped that before long some of the manufacturers[279] interested will produce skins as good in quality and colour as the best Niger morocco, and with fewer flaws.

The leather I’ve found to be the most useful is Niger goatskin, imported from Africa by the Royal Niger Company. It has a gorgeous color and texture, and it has withstood all the tests without serious wear. The downside of this leather is that, since it is locally produced, it’s often prepared carelessly, leading to many flaws and stains on the surface, making a lot of the skins practically worthless. Hopefully, soon some of the manufacturers[279] involved will create skins that are just as good in quality and color as the best Niger morocco, but with fewer flaws.

Much leather is ruined in order to obtain an absolutely even colour. A slight unevenness of colours is very pleasing, and should rather be encouraged than objected to. That the want of interest in absolutely flat colours has been felt, is shown by the frequency with which the binders get rid of flat, even colours by sprinkling and marbling.

A lot of leather gets damaged just to achieve a perfectly uniform color. A little variation in color is actually quite attractive and should be embraced rather than criticized. The lack of interest in perfectly flat colors is evident in how often binders get rid of them by adding textures like sprinkles and marbling.

On this point I may quote from the committee: “The sprinkling of leather, either for the production of ‘sprinkled’ calf or ‘tree’ calf, with ferrous sulphate (green vitriol) must be most strongly condemned, as the iron combines with and destroys the tan in the leather, and free sulphuric acid is liberated, which is still more destructive. Iron acetate or lactate is somewhat less objectionable, but probably the same effects may be obtained with aniline colours without risk to the leather.”

On this point, I can quote from the committee: “The use of leather sprinkling, whether to make ‘sprinkled’ calf or ‘tree’ calf, with ferrous sulfate (green vitriol) must be strongly condemned, as the iron combines with and damages the tanning in the leather, releasing free sulfuric acid which is even more harmful. Iron acetate or lactate is somewhat less problematic, but likely similar results can be achieved with aniline dyes without risking damage to the leather.”

CHAPTER XX[280]

Paper—Pastes—Glue

Paper, Glue, Adhesives

PAPER

Paper may be made by hand or machinery, and either “laid” or “wove.” “Laid” papers are distinguished by wire marks, which are absent in “wove” paper.

Document can be made by hand or machines, and it can be either “laid” or “woven.” “Laid” papers are characterized by wire marks, which are not present in “woven” paper.

A sheet of hand-made paper has all round it a rough uneven edge called the “deckle,” that is a necessary result of its method of manufacture. The early printers looked upon this ragged edge as a defect, and almost invariably trimmed most of it off before putting books into permanent bindings. Book-lovers quite rightly like to find traces of the “deckle” edge, as evidence that a volume has not been unduly reduced by the binder. But it has now become the fashion to admire the “deckle” for its own sake, and to leave books on hand-made paper absolutely untrimmed, with ragged edges that collect the dirt, are unsightly, and troublesome to turn over. So far has this craze gone, that machine-made paper[281] is often put through an extra process to give it a sham deckle edge.

A sheet of handmade paper has a rough, uneven edge called the “deckle,” which is a natural result of how it's made. Early printers saw this ragged edge as a flaw and usually trimmed most of it off before binding the books. Book lovers rightly appreciate finding signs of the “deckle” edge as proof that a book hasn't been excessively trimmed by the binder. However, it's now fashionable to admire the “deckle” for its own sake, leaving books made from handmade paper completely untrimmed, with ragged edges that collect dirt, look unattractive, and are annoying to flip through. This trend has gone so far that machine-made paper[281] is often treated to create a fake deckle edge.

Roughly speaking, paper varies in quality according to the proportion of fibrous material, such as rag, used in the manufacture. To make paper satisfactorily by hand, a large proportion of such fibrous material is necessary, so that the fact that the paper is hand-made is to some extent a guarantee of its quality. There are various qualities of hand-made paper, made from different materials, chiefly linen and cotton rags. The best paper is made from pure linen rag, and poorer hand-made paper from cotton rag, while other qualities contain a mixture of the two or other substances.

Generally, the quality of paper depends on the amount of fibrous material, like rags, used in its production. To create paper by hand effectively, a significant amount of this fibrous material is essential, which means that hand-made paper is somewhat assured to be of higher quality. There are different types of hand-made paper, made from various materials, mainly linen and cotton rags. The finest paper is made from pure linen rags, while lower-quality hand-made paper is made from cotton rags, and other varieties may include a mix of both or other materials.

It is possible to make a thoroughly good paper by machinery if good materials are used. Some excellent papers are made by machinery; but the enormous demand for paper, together with the fact that now almost any fibrous material can be made into paper, has resulted in the production, in recent years, of, perhaps, the worst papers that have ever been seen.

It is possible to produce really good paper using machines if quality materials are used. Some great papers are made this way; however, the huge demand for paper, along with the ability to turn almost any fibrous material into paper, has led to the creation of, in recent years, what might be the worst papers ever made.

This would not matter if the use of the poor papers were restricted to newspapers[282] and other ephemeral literature, but when, as is often the case, paper of very poor quality is used for books of permanent literary interest, the matter is serious enough.

This wouldn’t be an issue if the use of cheap paper were limited to newspapers[282] and other short-lived publications, but when, as is often the case, low-quality paper is used for books that have lasting literary value, it becomes a serious problem.

Among the worst papers made are the heavily loaded “Art” papers that are prepared for the printing of half-toned process blocks. It is to be hoped that before long the paper makers will produce a paper that, while suitable for printing half-toned blocks, will be more serviceable, and will have a less unpleasant surface.

Among the worst papers produced are the excessively thick "Art" papers designed for printing half-toned process blocks. It is hoped that soon paper manufacturers will create a paper that, while appropriate for printing half-toned blocks, will be more practical and have a smoother, more pleasant surface.

Several makers produce coloured handmade papers suitable for end papers. Machine-made papers can be had in endless variety from any number of makers.

Several manufacturers create colored handmade papers that are perfect for end papers. You can find machine-made papers in countless varieties from many different producers.

The paper known as “Japanese Vellum” is a very tough material, and will be found useful for repairing vellum books; the thinnest variety of it is very suitable for mending the backs of broken sections, or for strengthening weak places in paper.

The paper called “Japanese Vellum” is a very durable material and is useful for repairing vellum books; the thinnest type is great for fixing the spines of damaged sections or for reinforcing weak spots in paper.

The following delightful account of paper making by hand is quoted from “Evelyn’s Diary, 1641-1706.”

The following enjoyable description of hand paper making is quoted from “Evelyn’s Diary, 1641-1706.”

“I went to see my Lord of St. Alban’s house at Byflete, an old large building.[283] Thence to the paper mills, where I found them making a coarse white paper. They cull the raggs, which are linnen, for white paper, woollen for brown, then they stamp them in troughs to a papp with pestles or hammers like the powder-mills, then put it into a vessell of water, in which they dip a frame closely wyred with a wyre as small as a haire, and as close as a weaver’s reede; on this they take up the papp, the superfluous water draining thro’ the wyre; this they dextrously turning, shake out like a pancake on a smooth board between two pieces of flannell, then press it between a greate presse, the flannell sucking out the moisture; then taking it out they ply and dry it on strings, as they dry linnen in the laundry; then dip it in alum-water, lastly polish and make it up in quires. They put some gum in the water in which they macerate the raggs. The mark we find on the sheets is formed in the wyre.”

"I visited my Lord of St. Alban's house at Byflete, which is a large, old building.[283] From there, I went to the paper mills, where I saw them making rough white paper. They sort the rags—linen for white paper and wool for brown. Then, they crush them in troughs with pestles or hammers, similar to what’s done at powder mills, and put the mixture into a vessel of water. They dip a frame that’s tightly wired with very fine wire, as close as a weaver's reed, into this. On this frame, they collect the pulp, letting the excess water drain through the wire. They skillfully turn it over and shake it out like a pancake onto a smooth board between two pieces of flannel, then press it in a big press to suck out the moisture. Once they remove it, they stretch and dry it on strings, similar to how linen is dried in a laundry. After that, they dip it in alum water, and finally, they polish it and compile it into quires. They add some gum to the water when they soak the rags. The watermark we see on the sheets is created by the wire."

The following are the more usual sizes of printing papers—

The following are the common sizes of printing papers—

 Inches.
Foolscap17 × 13½
Crown20 × 15
[284]Post19¼ × 15½
Demy22½ × 17½
Medium24 × 19
Royal25 × 20
Double Pott25 × 15
"Foolscap paper27 × 17
Super Royal27 × 21
Double Crown30 × 20
Imperial30 × 22
Double Post31½ × 19½

The corresponding sizes of hand-made papers may differ slightly from the above.

The sizes of handmade papers might vary a bit from what’s listed above.

Although the above are the principal sizes named, almost any size can be made to order.

Although the sizes listed above are the main ones, we can create almost any size on request.

The following is an extract from the report of the Committee of the Society of Arts on the deterioration of paper, published in 1898: “The committee find that the paper-making fibres may be ranged into four classes:—

The following is an extract from the report of the Committee of the Society of Arts on the deterioration of paper, published in 1898: “The committee finds that the paper-making fibers can be grouped into four classes:—

  • A. Cotton, flax, and hemp.
  • B. Wood, celluloses (a) sulphite process, and (b) soda and sulphate process.
  • C. Esparto and straw celluloses.
  • D. Mechanical wood pulp.

In regard, therefore, to papers for[285] books and documents of permanent value, the selection must be taken in this order, and always with due regard to the fulfilment of the conditions of normal treatment above dealt with as common to all papers.”

In relation to papers for[285] books and documents of lasting importance, the selection should be made in this order, always keeping in mind the fulfillment of the normal treatment conditions discussed earlier that are applicable to all papers.

“The committee have been desirous of bringing their investigations to a practical conclusion in specific terms, viz. by the suggestion of standards of quality. It is evident that in the majority of cases, there is little fault to find with the practical adjustments which rule the trade. They are, therefore, satisfied to limit their specific findings to the following, viz., Normal standard of quality for book papers required for publications of permanent value. For such papers they would specify as follows:—

“The committee has been eager to bring their investigations to a practical conclusion in specific terms, specifically by suggesting standards of quality. It's clear that in most cases, there is little to criticize about the practical adjustments that govern the trade. They are, therefore, content to limit their specific findings to the following: Normal standard of quality for book papers required for publications of permanent value. For such papers, they would specify as follows:—

Fibres. Not less than 70 per cent. of fibres of Class A.

Fibers. At least 70 percent of fibers from Class A.

Sizing. Not more than 2 per cent. rosin, and finished with the normal acidity of pure alum.

Sizing. No more than 2 percent rosin, finished with the typical acidity of pure alum.

Loading. Not more than 10 per cent. total mineral matter (ash).

Loading. No more than 10 percent total mineral content (ash).

“With regard to written documents, it must be evident that the proper materials are those of Class A, and that the paper[286] should be pure, and sized with gelatine, and not with rosin. All imitations of high-class writing papers, which are, in fact, merely disguised printing papers, should be carefully avoided.”

“With respect to written documents, it’s clear that the right materials are those of Class A, and the paper[286] should be pure and sized with gelatin, not with rosin. Any imitations of high-quality writing papers, which are essentially just disguised printing papers, should be avoided.”

PASTES

To make paste for covering books, &c., take 2 oz. of flour, and ¼ oz. of powdered alum, and well mix with enough water to form a thin paste, taking care to break up any lumps. Add a pint of cold water, and heat gently in an enamelled saucepan. As it becomes warm, it should be stirred from time to time, and when it begins to boil it should be continually stirred for about five minutes. It should then form a thick paste that can be thinned with warm water. Of course any quantity can be made if the proportions are the same.

To make paste for covering books, etc., take 2 ounces of flour and ¼ ounce of powdered alum, and mix well with enough water to create a thin paste, ensuring to break up any lumps. Add a pint of cold water and heat gently in an enamel saucepan. As it warms up, stir occasionally, and when it starts to boil, keep stirring continuously for about five minutes. It should then turn into a thick paste that can be thinned with warm water. You can make any quantity as long as you keep the proportions the same.

Paste for use is best kept in a wooden trough, called a “paste tub.” The paste tub will need to be cleaned out from time to time, and all fragments of dry paste removed. This can easily be done if it is left, overnight, filled with water.[287] Before using, the paste should be well beaten up with a flat stick.

Paste for use is best stored in a wooden container called a “paste tub.” You’ll need to clean the paste tub regularly and remove any pieces of dry paste. This is easy to do if you fill it with water and leave it overnight.[287] Before using, the paste should be thoroughly mixed up with a flat stick.

For pasting paper, it should have about the consistency and smoothness of cream; for leather, it can be thicker. For very thick leather a little thin glue may be added. Paste made with alum will keep about a fortnight, but can be kept longer by the addition of corrosive sublimate in the proportion of one part of corrosive sublimate to a thousand parts of paste. Corrosive sublimate, being a deadly poison, will prevent the attack of bookworms or other insects, but for the same reason must only be used by responsible people, and paste in which it is used must be kept out of the way of domestic animals.

For paste, it should be about the consistency and smoothness of cream; for leather, it can be thicker. If you're using very thick leather, you can add a little thin glue. Paste made with alum will last about two weeks, but you can keep it longer by adding corrosive sublimate in the ratio of one part corrosive sublimate to a thousand parts of paste. Corrosive sublimate is a deadly poison, which will help prevent bookworms and other insects, but because of this, it should only be used by responsible individuals, and paste containing it must be kept away from pets.

Several makes of excellent prepared paste can be bought in London. These pastes are as cheap as can be made, and keep good a long time.

Several brands of great ready-made paste can be purchased in London. These pastes are as inexpensive as possible and have a long shelf life.

Paste that has become sour should never be used, as there is danger that the products of its acid fermentation may injure the leather.

Paste that has soured should never be used, as there's a risk that the products of its acid fermentation could damage the leather.

Paste tubs as sold often have an iron bar across them to wipe the brush on. This should be removed, and replaced by a piece of twisted cord. Paste brushes[288] should be bound with string or zinc; copper or iron will stain the paste.

Paste tubs usually come with an iron bar for wiping off the brush. This should be taken out and swapped for a piece of twisted cord. Paste brushes[288] should be tied with string or zinc; copper or iron will stain the paste.

WHITE PASTE FOR MENDING

A good paste for mending is made from a teaspoonful of ordinary flour, two teaspoonsful of cornflour, half a teaspoonful of alum, and three ounces of water. These should be carefully mixed, breaking up all lumps, and then should be heated in a clean saucepan, and stirred all the time with a wooden or bone spoon. The paste should boil for about five minutes, but not too fast, or it will burn and turn brown. Rice-flour or starch may be substituted for cornflour, and for very white paper the wheaten flour may be omitted. Ordinary paste is not nearly white enough for mending, and is apt to leave unsightly stains.

A good glue for repairs is made from a teaspoon of regular flour, two teaspoons of cornstarch, half a teaspoon of alum, and three ounces of water. Mix these ingredients carefully, breaking up any lumps, and then heat them in a clean saucepan, stirring constantly with a wooden or bone spoon. The glue should simmer for about five minutes, but not too rapidly, or it will burn and turn brown. You can substitute rice flour or starch for cornstarch, and if you're working with very white paper, you can skip the wheat flour. Regular glue isn't white enough for repairs and often leaves unsightly stains.

Cornflour paste may be used directly after it is made, and will keep good under ordinary circumstances for about a week. Directly it gets hard or goes watery, a new batch must be made.[289]

Cornflour paste can be used right after you make it and will stay good for about a week under normal conditions. As soon as it hardens or becomes watery, you need to make a new batch.[289]

GLUE

It is important for bookbinders that the glue used should be of good quality, and the best hide glue will be found to answer well. To prepare it for use, the glue should be broken up into small pieces and left to soak overnight in water. In the morning it should be soft and greatly swollen, but not melted, and can then be put in the glue-pot and gently simmered until it is fluid. It is then ready for use. Glue loses in quality by being frequently heated, so that it is well not to make a great quantity at a time. The glue-pot should be thoroughly cleaned out before new glue is put into it, and the old glue sticking round the sides taken out.

It’s essential for bookbinders to use high-quality glue, and the best choice is hide glue. To prepare it, break the glue into small pieces and let it soak in water overnight. By morning, it should be soft and significantly swollen but not completely melted, at which point it can be placed in the glue pot and gently simmered until it becomes liquid. It’s then ready to use. Glue does lose quality if it’s heated too often, so it’s best not to make too much at once. Before adding new glue, the glue pot should be thoroughly cleaned, removing any old glue stuck to the sides.

Glue should be used hot and not too thick. If it is stringy and difficult to work, it can be broken up by rapidly twisting the brush in the glue-pot. For paper the glue should be very thin and well worked up with the brush before using.

Glue should be used while it's hot and not too thick. If it’s stringy and hard to work with, you can break it up by quickly twisting the brush in the glue pot. For paper, the glue should be very thin and well mixed with the brush before applying.

The following is quoted from “Chambers’ Encyclopædia” article on Glue:[290]

The following is quoted from “Chambers’ Encyclopaedia” article on Glue:[290]

“While England does not excel in the manufacture, it is a recognised fact that Scottish glue ... ranks in the front of the glues of all countries. A light-coloured glue is not necessarily good, nor a dark-coloured glue necessarily bad. A bright, clear, claret colour is the natural colour of hide glue, which is the best and most economical.

“While England isn’t the best at manufacturing, it’s widely acknowledged that Scottish glue ranks among the best in the world. A light-colored glue isn’t always good, nor is a dark-colored glue necessarily bad. A bright, clear claret color is the natural color of hide glue, which is the best and most cost-effective.”

“Light-coloured glues (as distinguished from gelatine) are made either from bones or sheepskins. The glue yielded by these materials cannot compare with the strength of that yielded by hides.

“Light-colored glues (as opposed to gelatin) are made either from bones or sheepskins. The glue produced from these materials cannot match the strength of that made from hides.

“A great quantity is now made in France and Germany from bones. It is got as a by-product in the manufacture of animal charcoal. Although beautiful to look at, it is found when used to be far inferior to Scottish hide glue.”

“A large amount is now produced in France and Germany from bones. It comes as a by-product in the production of animal charcoal. While it looks nice, when used, it is considered far inferior to Scottish hide glue.”

PART II
CARE OF BOOKS WHEN BOUND

CHAPTER XXI[291]

Injurious Influences to which Books are Subjected

Injurious Influences to which Books are Subjected

Gas Fumes.—The investigation of the Society of Arts Committee shows that—

Gas Fumes.—The investigation by the Society of Arts Committee shows that—

“Of all the influences to which books are exposed in libraries, gas fumes—no doubt because of the sulphuric and sulphurous acid which they contain—are shown to be the most injurious.”

“Of all the influences that affect books in libraries, gas fumes—probably due to the sulfuric and sulfurous acid they contain—are proven to be the most harmful.”

The injurious effects of gas fumes on leather have been recognised for a long time, and gas is being, very generally, given up in libraries in consequence. If books must be kept where gas is used, they should not be put high up in the[292] room, and great attention should be paid to ventilation. It is far better, where possible, to avoid the use of gas at all in libraries.

The harmful effects of gas fumes on leather have been known for a long time, and many libraries are abandoning gas as a result. If books must be stored in areas where gas is used, they shouldn't be placed high up in the[292] room, and proper ventilation should be prioritized. It's much better, if possible, to completely avoid using gas in libraries.

Light.—The committee also report that “light, and especially direct sunlight and hot air, are shown to possess deleterious influences which had scarcely been suspected previously, and the importance of moderate temperature and thorough ventilation of libraries cannot be too much insisted on.”

Light.—The committee also reports that “light, especially direct sunlight and hot air, has harmful effects that were barely suspected before, and the importance of moderate temperature and proper ventilation in libraries cannot be overstated.”

The action of light on leather has a disintegrating effect, very plainly seen when books have stood for long periods on shelves placed at right angles to windows. At Oxford and Cambridge and at the British Museum Library the same thing was noticed. The leather on that side, of the backs of books, next to the light, was absolutely rotten, crumbling to dust at the slightest friction, while at the side away from the light it was comparatively sound. Vellum bindings were even more affected than those of leather.

The impact of light on leather has a damaging effect, which is especially clear when books have been on shelves positioned at right angles to windows for long periods. This has been observed at Oxford, Cambridge, and the British Museum Library. The leather on the side of the book spines facing the light was completely deteriorated, crumbling to dust with the slightest touch, while the side away from the light remained relatively intact. Vellum bindings were even more affected than leather ones.

The committee advise that library windows exposed to the direct sunlight should be glazed with tinted glass.[293]

The committee recommends that library windows facing direct sunlight should be fitted with tinted glass.[293]

“Some attempts have been made to determine the effect of light transmitted through glasses of different colours, and they point to the fact that blue and violet glass pass light of nearly as deleterious quality as white glass; while leathers under red, green, and yellow glasses were almost completely protected. There can be no doubt that the use of pale yellow or olive-green glass in library windows exposed to direct sunlight is desirable. A large number of experiments have been made on the tinted ‘cathedral’ glasses of Messrs. Pilkington Bros., Limited, with the result that Nos. 812 and 712 afforded almost complete protection during two months’ exposure to sunlight, while Nos. 704 and 804 may be recommended where only very pale shades are permissible. The glasses employed were subjected to careful spectroscopic examination, and to colour-measurement by the tintometer, but neither were found to give precise indications as to the protective power of the glasses, which is no doubt due to the absorption of the violet, and especially of the invisible ultra-violet rays. An easy method of comparing glasses is to expose under them to sunlight the ordinary sensitised[294] albumenised photographic paper. Those glasses under which this is least darkened are also most protective to leather.”

“Some attempts have been made to determine the effect of light passing through glasses of different colors, and they indicate that blue and violet glass transmit light that is nearly as harmful as white glass; while leathers under red, green, and yellow glasses were almost completely protected. There’s no doubt that using pale yellow or olive-green glass in library windows that are exposed to direct sunlight is a good idea. A large number of experiments have been conducted on the tinted ‘cathedral’ glasses from Messrs. Pilkington Bros., Limited, with the result that Nos. 812 and 712 provided nearly complete protection during two months of exposure to sunlight, while Nos. 704 and 804 can be recommended where only very pale shades are allowed. The glasses used underwent careful spectroscopic examination and color measurement with a tintometer, but neither method provided precise indications about the glasses' protective ability, likely due to the absorption of violet light, and especially the invisible ultraviolet rays. A simple way to compare glasses is to expose ordinary sensitized albumen photographic paper to sunlight underneath them. The glasses that darken this paper the least are also the most protective for leather.”

Tobacco.—Smoking was found to be injurious, and it is certainly a mistake to allow it in libraries.

Tobacco.—Smoking has been shown to be harmful, and it's definitely a mistake to allow it in libraries.

“The effect of ammonia vapour, and tobacco fumes, of which ammonia is one of the active ingredients, was also examined. The effect of ammonia fumes was very marked, darkening every description of leather, and it is known that in extreme cases it causes a rapid form of decay. Tobacco smoke had a very similar darkening and deleterious effect (least marked in the case of sumach tanned leathers), and there can be no doubt that the deterioration of bindings in a library where smoking was permitted and the rooms much used, must have been partly due to this cause.”

“The impact of ammonia vapor and tobacco smoke, which contains ammonia as one of its active ingredients, was also studied. The effect of ammonia fumes was very strong, darkening all types of leather, and it is known that in severe cases, it leads to rapid decay. Tobacco smoke had a similar darkening and harmful effect (least noticeable in the case of sumach-tanned leathers), and there is no doubt that the damage to bindings in libraries where smoking was allowed and the rooms were heavily used must have been partly due to this.”

Damp.—Books kept in damp places will develop mildew, and both leather and paper will be ruined.

Damp.—Books stored in damp areas will get mildew, and both leather and paper will be damaged.

Where possible, naturally dry rooms should be used for libraries, and if not naturally dry, every means possible should be taken to render them so. It will some[295]times be found that the only way to keep the walls of an old house dry is to put in a proper dampcourse. There are various other methods employed, such as lining the walls with thin lead, or painting them inside and out with some waterproofing preparation: but as long as a wall remains in itself damp, it is doubtful if any of these things will permanently keep the damp from penetrating.

Whenever possible, naturally dry rooms should be used for libraries, and if they aren't naturally dry, every effort should be made to make them so. It may sometimes be discovered that the only way to keep the walls of an old house dry is to install a proper damp course. There are various other methods used, such as lining the walls with thin lead or painting them inside and out with a waterproofing solution; however, as long as a wall remains damp in itself, it's uncertain whether any of these methods will effectively prevent moisture from coming through.

Bookshelves should never be put against the wall, nor the books on the floor. There should always be space for air to circulate on all sides of the bookshelves. Damp is specially injurious if books are kept behind closely-fitting doors. The doors of bookcases should be left open from time to time on warm days.

Bookshelves should never be pushed against the wall, and books shouldn’t be on the floor. There should always be space for air to circulate around all sides of the bookshelves. Humidity is especially harmful if books are stored behind tightly fitting doors. The doors of bookcases should be kept open periodically on warm days.

Should mildew make its appearance, the books should be taken out, dried and aired, and the bookshelves thoroughly cleaned. The cause of the damp should be sought for, and measures taken to remedy it. Library windows should not be left open at night, nor during damp weather, but in warm fine weather the more ventilation there is, the better.

If mildew appears, the books should be removed, dried, and aired out, and the bookshelves should be cleaned thoroughly. The source of the dampness should be identified, and actions should be taken to fix it. Library windows should not be left open at night or during damp weather, but in warm, dry weather, the more ventilation there is, the better.

Heat.—While damp is very injurious to books on account of the development[296] of mildew, unduly hot dry air is almost as bad, causing leather to dry up and lose its flexibility. On this point the Chairman of the Society of Arts Committee says:—

Heat.—While moisture is very harmful to books because it promotes the growth[296] of mildew, excessively hot dry air is nearly as damaging, making leather dry out and lose its flexibility. Regarding this, the Chairman of the Society of Arts Committee states:—

“Rooms in which books are kept should not be subject to extremes, whether of heat or cold, of moisture or dryness. It may be said that the better adapted a room is for human occupation, the better for the books it contains. Damp is, of course, most mischievous, but over-dryness induced by heated air, especially when the pipes are in close proximity to the bookcases, is also very injurious.”

“Rooms where books are stored shouldn't experience extreme temperatures, whether hot or cold, or high levels of moisture or dryness. It's safe to say that a room that is comfortable for people to be in is also better for the books it holds. While dampness is certainly harmful, excessive dryness caused by heated air, especially when the heating pipes are near the bookcases, can also be very damaging.”

Dust.—Books should be taken from the shelves at least once a year, dusted and aired, and the bindings rubbed with a preservative.

Dust.—Books should be taken off the shelves at least once a year, dusted, aired out, and the bindings treated with a preservative.

To dust a book, it should be removed from the shelf, and without being opened, turned upside down and flicked with a feather duster. If a book with the dust on the top is held loosely in the hand, and dusted right way up, dust may fall between the leaves. Dusting should be done in warm, dry weather; and afterwards, the books may be stood on the table slightly open, to air, with their leaves[297] loose. Before being returned to the shelves, the bindings should be lightly rubbed with some preservative preparation (see chap. XXII). Any bindings that are broken, or any leaves that are loose should be noted, and the books put on one side to be sent to the binder. It would be best when the library is large enough to warrant it, to employ a working bookbinder to do this work; such a man would be useful in many ways. He could stick on labels, repair bindings, and do many other odd jobs to keep the books in good repair.

To dust a book, take it off the shelf and, without opening it, turn it upside down and flick it with a feather duster. If you hold a book with dust on the top loosely in your hand and dust it right side up, dust might fall between the pages. Dusting should be done in warm, dry weather, and afterwards, the books can be placed on the table slightly open to air out, with their pages loose. Before putting them back on the shelves, lightly rub the bindings with some preservative (see chap. XXII). Any broken bindings or loose pages should be noted, and the books should be set aside to be sent to the binder. Ideally, if the library is large enough, you should hire a working bookbinder to handle these tasks; such a person would be helpful in many ways. They could attach labels, repair bindings, and take care of many other small jobs to keep the books in good condition.

A bookbinder could be kept fully employed, binding and repairing the books of a comparatively small library under the direction of the librarian.

A bookbinder could be kept busy, binding and fixing the books of a relatively small library under the guidance of the librarian.

BOOKWORMS

The insects known as bookworms are the larvæ of several sorts of beetles, most commonly perhaps of Antobium domesticum and Niptus hololencus. They are not in any way peculiar to books and will infest the wood of bookshelves, walls, or floors. A good deal can be done to keep “worms” away by using such substances[298] as camphor or naphthaline in the bookcase. Bookworms do not attack modern books very much; probably they dislike the alum put in the paste and the mill-boards made of old tarred rope.

The insects we call bookworms are the larvae of various beetles, most commonly Antobium domesticum and Niptus hololencus. They're not just found in books and can infest the wood of bookshelves, walls, or floors. You can significantly reduce the presence of "worms" by using substances like camphor or naphthalene in the bookcase. Bookworms don't typically target modern books; they probably dislike the alum used in the glue and the millboards made from old tarred rope.

In old books, especially such as come from Italy, it is often found that the ravages of the bookworms are almost entirely confined to the glue on the backs of the books, and it generally seems that the glue and paste attract them. Probably if corrosive sublimate were put in the glue and paste used it would stop their attacks. Alum is said to be a preventive, but I have known bookworms to eat their way through leather pasted on with paste containing alum, when, in recovering, the old wooden boards containing bookworms have been utilised in error.

In older books, especially those from Italy, it's often seen that the damage from bookworms is mostly limited to the glue on the spines. It generally appears that the glue and paste attract them. If corrosive sublimate were mixed into the glue and paste, it would likely deter their attacks. Alum is said to help prevent this, but I've seen bookworms chew through leather glued with paste that contains alum when, during recovery, old wooden boards with bookworms were mistakenly reused.

When on shaking the boards of an old book dust flies out, or when little heaps of dust are found on the shelf on which an old book has been standing, it may be considered likely that there are bookworms present. It is easy to kill any that may be hatched, by putting the book in an air-tight box surrounded with cotton wool soaked in ether; but that will not kill the eggs, and the treatment must be repeated from[299] time to time at intervals of a few weeks.

When you shake the boards of an old book, dust flies out, or when you find little piles of dust on the shelf where an old book has been sitting, it's likely that there are bookworms present. It's simple to eliminate any that may have hatched by placing the book in an air-tight box lined with cotton wool soaked in ether; however, that won't kill the eggs, and the treatment needs to be repeated from[299] time to time at intervals of a few weeks.

Any book that is found to contain bookworms should be isolated and at once treated. Tins may be put inside the boards to prevent the “worms” eating into the leaves.

Any book that has bookworms should be isolated and treated immediately. Tins can be placed inside the covers to stop the "worms" from eating into the pages.

Speaking of bookworms, Jules Cousin says:—

Speaking of bookworms, Jules Cousin says:—

“One of the simplest means to be employed (to get rid of bookworms) is to place behind the books, especially in the place where the insects show their presence most, pieces of linen soaked with essence of turpentine, camphor, or an infusion of tobacco, and to renew them when the smell goes off. A little fine pepper might also be scattered on the shelf, the penetrating smell of which would produce the same effect.”

“One of the easiest ways to get rid of bookworms is to place pieces of linen soaked in turpentine, camphor, or a tobacco infusion behind the books, especially in areas where the insects are most noticeable, and to replace them when the smell fades. You could also sprinkle some fine pepper on the shelf, as its strong smell would have the same effect.”

Possibly Keating’s Insect Powder would answer as well or better than pepper.

Possibly Keating’s Insect Powder would work just as well, if not better, than pepper.

RATS AND MICE

Rats and mice will gnaw the backs of books to get at the glue, so, means should be taken to get rid of these vermin if they should appear. Mice especially will[300] nibble vellum binding or the edges of vellum books that have become greasy with much handling.

Rats and mice will chew on the backs of books to get to the glue, so steps should be taken to eliminate these pests if they show up. Mice in particular will nibble on vellum bindings or the edges of vellum books that have gotten greasy from being handled a lot.

COCKROACHES

Cockroaches are very troublesome in libraries, eating the bindings. Keating’s Insect Powder will keep them away from books, but only so long as it is renewed at short intervals.

Cockroaches are a big hassle in libraries, damaging the bindings. Keating’s Insect Powder will keep them away from books, but only if it's reapplied frequently.

PLACING THE BOOKS IN THE SHELVES

The Chairman of the Society of Arts Special Committee says on this point:—

The Chair of the Society of Arts Special Committee says on this matter:—

“It is important that a just medium should be observed between the close and loose disposition of books in the shelves. Tight packing causes the pulling off of the tops of book-backs, injurious friction between their sides, and undue pressure, which tends to force off their backs. But books should not stand loosely on the shelves. They require support and moderate lateral pressure, otherwise the leaves are apt to open and admit dust, damp, and mildew. The weight of the leaves also in[301] good-sized volumes loosely placed will often be found to be resting on the shelf, making the backs concave, and spoiling the shape and cohesion of the books.

“It’s important to find the right balance between keeping books tightly packed and too loosely arranged on the shelves. If books are crammed together, it can cause the tops of their spines to get damaged, create harmful friction along their sides, and lead to too much pressure, which might cause the spines to come off. On the other hand, books shouldn’t be left too loose on the shelves either. They need support and a bit of pressure from the sides; otherwise, the pages can open up and let in dust, moisture, and mildew. When good-sized volumes are placed loosely, the weight of the pages can rest on the shelf, causing the spines to bend inward and ruining the shape and integrity of the books.”

“In libraries where classification is attempted there must be a certain number of partially filled shelves. The books in these should be kept in place by some such device as that in use in the British Museum, namely, a simple flat angle piece of galvanised iron, on the lower flange of which the end books rest, keeping it down, the upright flange keeping the books close and preventing them from spreading.”

“In libraries where classification is attempted, there will be a certain number of partially filled shelves. The books on these shelves should be secured using a device like the one used in the British Museum, which is a simple flat angle piece of galvanized iron. The lower flange of this piece supports the end books, holding it down, while the upright flange keeps the books snug and stops them from spreading out.”

He also speaks of the danger to bindings of rough or badly-painted bookshelves:—

He also talks about the risk that rough or poorly painted bookshelves pose to bindings:—

“Great care should be exercised when bookcases are painted or varnished that the surface should be left hard, smooth, and dry. Bindings, especially those of delicate texture, may be irreparably rubbed if brought in contact with rough or coarsely-painted surfaces, while the paint itself, years after its original application, is liable to come off upon the books, leaving indelible marks. In such cases pasteboard guards against the ends of the shelves are the only remedy.”

“Great care should be taken when painting or varnishing bookcases to ensure that the surface is hard, smooth, and dry. Bindings, especially those made of delicate materials, can be irreparably damaged if they come into contact with rough or poorly painted surfaces. Additionally, paint can come off the bookcase years after it was applied, leaving permanent marks on the books. In these cases, using pasteboard guards on the ends of the shelves is the only solution.”

CHAPTER XXII[302]

To Preserve Old Bindings—Re-backing

Repair Old Bindings—Rebacking

TO PRESERVE OLD BINDINGS

It is a well-known fact that the leather of bindings that are much handled lasts very much better than that on books which remain untouched on the shelves. There is little doubt that the reason for this is that the slight amount of grease the leather receives from the hands nourishes it and keeps it flexible. A coating of glair or varnish is found to some extent to protect leather from adverse outside influences, but, unfortunately, both glair and varnish tend rather to harden leather than to keep it flexible, and they fail just where failure is most serious, that is at the joints. In opening and shutting, any coat of glair or varnish that has become hard will crack, and expose the leather of the joint and back. Flexibility is an essential quality in bookbinding leather, for as soon as the leather at the joint of a binding becomes stiff it breaks away when the boards are opened.[303]

It's a well-known fact that leather bindings that are frequently handled last much longer than those on books that sit untouched on shelves. There's little doubt that this is because the small amount of grease the leather picks up from our hands helps nourish it and keeps it flexible. A layer of glair or varnish can somewhat protect leather from harmful outside influences, but unfortunately, both glair and varnish tend to harden the leather instead of keeping it flexible, and they fail exactly where it's most critical—at the joints. When opening and closing, any layer of glair or varnish that has hardened will crack, exposing the leather at the joint and back. Flexibility is a crucial quality in bookbinding leather; as soon as the leather at the joint of a binding becomes stiff, it breaks away when the boards are opened.[303]

It would add immensely to the life of old leather bindings if librarians would have them treated, say once a year, with some preservative. The consequent expense would be saved many times over by the reduction of the cost of rebinding. Such a preservative must not stain, must not evaporate, must not become hard, and must not be sticky. Vaseline has been recommended, and answers fairly well, but will evaporate, although slowly. I have found that a solution of paraffin wax in castor oil answers well. It is cheap and very simple to prepare. To prepare it, some castor oil is put into an earthenware jar, and about half its weight of paraffin wax shredded into it. On warming, the wax will melt, and the preparation is ready for use.

It would really enhance the lifespan of old leather bindings if librarians would treat them, say once a year, with some kind of preservative. The cost would be more than made up for by the savings on rebinding. Such a preservative shouldn't stain, evaporate, harden, or be sticky. Vaseline has been suggested and works pretty well, but it does evaporate, although slowly. I’ve found that a solution of paraffin wax in castor oil works well. It's inexpensive and very easy to make. To prepare it, put some castor oil in an earthenware jar and add about half its weight in shredded paraffin wax. When you warm it up, the wax will melt, and the preparation will be ready to use.

A little of the preparation is well worked into a piece of flannel, and the books rubbed with it, special attention being paid to the back and joints. They may be further rubbed with the hand, and finally gone over with a clean, soft cloth. Very little of the preparation need be used on each book.

A bit of the preparation is well applied to a piece of flannel, and the books are rubbed with it, giving special attention to the spine and joints. They can be further rubbed with the hand, and then finished with a clean, soft cloth. Only a small amount of the preparation is needed for each book.

If bindings have projecting metal corners or clasps that are likely to scratch the[304] neighbouring books, pieces of mill-board, which may be lined with leather or good paper, should be placed next them, or they may have a cover made of a piece of mill-board bent round as shown at fig. 120, and strengthened at the folds with linen. This may be slipped into the shelf with the book with the open end outwards, and will then hardly be seen.

If bindings have metal corners or clasps that might scratch the neighboring books, pieces of millboard—possibly lined with leather or quality paper—should be placed next to them, or you could use a cover made from a piece of millboard bent around as shown at fig. 120, and reinforced at the folds with linen. This can be slipped onto the shelf with the book with the open end facing outward, making it barely noticeable.

Fig. 120.

Fig. 120.

Fig. 120.

Bindings which have previously had metal clasps, &c., often have projecting fragments of the old nails. These should be sought for and carefully removed or driven in, as they may seriously damage any bindings with which they come in contact.

Bindings that used to have metal clasps, etc., often have bits of the old nails sticking out. These should be looked for and carefully removed or pushed in, as they can seriously damage any bindings they touch.

To protect valuable old bindings, cases may be made and lettered on the back with the title of the book.

To protect valuable old bindings, you can create cases and add the book title on the back.

Loose covers that necessitate the bending back of the boards for their removal are not recommended.[305]

Loose covers that require bending the boards to remove them are not recommended.[305]

RE-BACKING

Bindings that have broken joints may be re-backed. Any of the leather of the back that remains should be carefully removed and preserved. It is impossible to get some leathers off tight backs without destroying them, but with care and by the use of a thin folder, many backs can be saved. The leather on the boards is cut a little back from the joint with a slanting cut, that will leave a thin edge, and is then lifted up with a folder. New leather, of the same colour is pasted on the back, and tucked in under the old leather on the board. The leather from the old back should have its edges pared and any lumps of glue or paper removed and be pasted on to the new leather and bound tightly with tape to make sure that it sticks.

Bindings with broken joints can be re-backed. Any remaining leather on the back should be carefully removed and preserved. It can be very difficult to take off some leathers from tight backs without damaging them, but with care and a thin folder, many backs can be saved. The leather on the boards is cut back a bit from the joint with a slanted cut, leaving a thin edge, and then lifted up with a folder. New leather of the same color is pasted on the back and tucked under the old leather on the board. The leather from the old back should have its edges trimmed, any lumps of glue or paper removed, and be pasted onto the new leather, then tightly bound with tape to ensure it sticks.

When the leather at the corners of the board needs repairing, the corner is glued and tapped with a hammer to make it hard and square, and when it is dry a little piece of new leather is slipped under the old and the corner covered.

When the leather at the corners of the board needs fixing, the corner is glued and tapped with a hammer to make it firm and square. Once it's dry, a small piece of new leather is slipped under the old leather, covering the corner.

When the sewing cords or thread of a[306] book have perished it should be rebound, but if there are any remains of the original binding they should be preserved and utilised. If the old boards have quite perished, new boards of the same nature and thickness should be got out and the old cover pasted over them. Such places as the old leather will not cover, must first be covered with new of the same colour. Generally speaking, it is desirable that the characteristics of an old book should be preserved, and that the new work should be as little in evidence as possible. It is far more pleasant to see an old book in a patched contemporary binding, than smug and tidy in the most immaculate modern cover.

When the sewing cords or threads of a[306] book have worn out, it should be rebound. However, any remnants of the original binding should be kept and reused. If the old boards are completely damaged, new boards of the same type and thickness should be made, and the old cover should be pasted over them. Areas where the old leather doesn’t cover should first be covered with new leather of the same color. Generally, it's best to maintain the features of an old book, so that the new work is as unobtrusive as possible. It's much nicer to see an old book in a patched contemporary binding than looking neat and tidy in a pristine modern cover.

Part of the interest of any old book is its individual history, which can be gathered from the binding, book-plates, marginal notes, names of former owners, &c., and anything that tends to obliterate these signs is to be deplored.

Part of what makes any old book interesting is its unique history, which can be seen in the binding, bookplates, margin notes, names of previous owners, etc., and anything that erases these signs is unfortunate.

SPECIFICATIONS[307]

SPECIFICATIONS FOR BOOKBINDING

These specifications will require modification in special cases, and are only intended to be a general guide.

These specifications may need changes in specific situations and are intended to serve only as a general guideline.

  I. For Extra Binding suitable for Valuable Books. Whole Leather.[308] II. For Good Binding for Books of Reference, Catalogues, &c., and other heavy Books that may have a great deal of use. Whole or Half Leather. III. For Binding for Libraries, for Books in current use. Half Leather. IV. For Library Bindings of Books of little Interest or Value, Cloth or Half Linen.
SHEETS. To be carefully folded, or, if an old book, all damaged leaves to be carefully mended, the backs where damaged to be made sound. Single leaves to be guarded round the sections next them. All plates to be guarded. Guards to be sewn through. No pasting on or overcasting to be allowed. As No. I., excepting that any mending may be done rather with a view to strength than extreme neatness. Same as No. II. Any leaves damaged at the back or plates to be overcast into sections.[309]
END PAPERS. To be sewn on. To be of good paper made with zigzag, with board papers of self-coloured paper of good quality, or vellum. Or to be made with leather joint. To be of good paper made with zigzag, with board papers of self-coloured paper of good quality. Large or heavy books to have a cloth joint. To be sewn on. To be of good paper, sewn on, made with zigzag. Same as No. III.
PRESSING. Books on handmade paper not to be pressed unduly.[310] Same as No. I. Same as No. I. 
EDGES. To be trimmed and gilt before sewing. To be uncut. To be cut and gilt in boards or coloured, or to be uncut. To be uncut, or to be cut in guillotine and gilt or coloured, or to have top edge only gilt. May be cut smooth in guillotine.
SEWING. To be with ligature silk, flexible, round five bands of best sewing cord. To be with unbleached thread, flexible, round five bands of best sewing cord. To be with unbleached thread across not less than four unbleached linen tapes. With unbleached thread over three unbleached linen tapes.
BACK. To be kept as flat as it can be without forcing it and without danger of its becoming concave in use. Same as for No. I. Same as for Nos. I. and II. Back to be left square after glueing up.[311]
BOARDS. To be of the best black mill-board. Two boards to be made together for large books, and all five bands laced in through two holes. Same as No. I., or may be of good grey board. To be split grey boards, or straw-board with black board liner, with ends of tapes attached to portion of waste sheet, inserted between them. Boards to be left a short distance from the joint to form a French joint. To be split boards, two straw-boards made together and ends of slips inserted. French joint to be left.
HEADBANDS. To be worked with silk on strips of vellum or catgut or cord, with frequent tie-downs. The headbands to be “set” by pieces of good paper or leather glued at head and tail. The back to be lined up with leather all over if the book is large. Same as No. I. To be worked with thread or vellum or cord, or to be omitted and a piece of cord inserted into the turn in of the leather at head and tail in their place. No headbands.
COVERS. Goatskin (morocco), pigskin or seal-skin manufactured according to the recommendations of the Society of Arts’ Committee on Leather for Bookbinding. Whole binding; leather to be attached directly to the back. Same as No. I., excepting that properly prepared sheepskin may be added. Half-binding, leather only at back. Corners to be strengthened with tips of vellum. Sides covered with good paper or linen. Same as Nos. I. and II., but skins may be used where there are surface flaws that do not affect the strength. Leather to be used thicker than is usual, there being French joints. Leather at back only; paper sides; vellum tips. Whole buckram or half linen and paper sides.
LETTERING. To be legible and to identify the volume.[312] Same as No. I. Same as Nos. I. and II. Same as Nos. I. II. and III.
DECORATION. To be as much or as little as the nature of the book warrants. To be omitted, or only to consist of a few lines or dots or other quite simple ornament. To be omitted. To be omitted.
  All work to be done in the best manner. Work may be a little rougher, but not careless or dirty. Same as No. II. Same as No. II.

GLOSSARY[313]

Arming press, a small blocking press used for striking arms-blocks on the sides of books.

Arming press, a small printing press used for pressing arms-blocks on the sides of books.

Backing boards, wedge-shaped bevelled boards used in backing (see Fig. 40).

Backing boards, wedge-shaped beveled boards used in backing (see Fig. 40).

Backing machine, used for backing cheap work in large quantities; it often crushes and damages the backs of the sections.

Backing machine, used for confirming inexpensive work in bulk; it frequently crushes and harms the backs of the sections.

Bands, (1) the cords on which a book is sewn. (2) The ridges on the back caused by the bands showing through the leather.

Bands, (1) the strings that hold a book together. (2) The bumps on the spine caused by the bands being visible through the leather.

Band nippers, pincers with flat jaws, used for straightening the bands (see Fig. 61). For nipping up the leather after covering, they should be nickelled to prevent the iron staining the leather.

Band nippers, pincers with flat jaws, used for straightening the bands (see Fig. 61). To nip up the leather after covering, they should be nickel-plated to prevent the iron from staining the leather.

Beating stone, the “stone” on which books were formerly beaten; now generally superseded by the rolling machine and standing press.

Beating stone, the “stone” used for beating books in the past; now mostly replaced by rolling machines and standing presses.

Blind tooling, the impression of finishing tools without gold.

Blind tooling, the impression of finishing tools without any gold.

Blocking press, a press used for impressing blocks such as those used in decorating cloth cases.

Blocking press, a press used for stamping blocks like those used in decorating fabric cases.

Board papers, the part of the end papers pasted on to the boards.

Board papers, the section of the end papers attached to the boards.

Bodkin, an awl used for making the holes in the boards for the slips.

Bodkin, a tool used for making holes in the boards for the slips.

Bolt, folded edge of the sheets in an unopened book.

Bolt, folded edge of the pages in a sealed book.

Cancels, leaves containing errors, which have to be[314] discarded and replaced by corrected sheets. Such leaves are marked by the printer with a star.

Cancels, pages with mistakes that need to be [314] thrown out and replaced with corrected sheets. The printer marks these pages with a star.

Catch-word, a word printed at the foot of one page indicating the first word of the page following, as a guide in collating.

Catch-word, a word printed at the bottom of one page indicating the first word of the following page, used as a guide in collating.

Cutting boards, wedge-shaped boards somewhat like backing boards, but with the top edge square; used in cutting the edge of a book and in edge-gilding.

Cutting boards are wedge-shaped boards similar to backing boards, but with a square top edge; they are used for cutting the edge of a book and for edge-gilding.

Cutting in boards, cutting the edges of a book after the boards are laced on.

Cutting in boards, trimming the edges of a book after the covers are attached.

Cutting press, when the lying press is turned, so that the side with the runners is uppermost, it is called a cutting press (see Fig. 46).

Cutting press, when the lying press is turned so that the side with the runners is facing up, it's called a cutting press (see Fig. 46).

Diaper, a term applied to a small repeating all-over pattern. From woven material decorated in this way.

Diaper refers to a small, repeating pattern that covers a surface completely. It's made from woven material designed in this style.

Doublure, the inside face of the boards, especially applied to them when lined with leather and decorated.

Doublure refers to the inner side of the boards, particularly when they are covered with leather and embellished.

End papers, papers added at the beginning and end of a book by the binder.

End papers, the sheets included at the start and finish of a book by the binder.

Extra binding, a trade term for the best work.

Extra binding, a trade term for the highest quality work.

Finishing, comprises lettering, tooling, and polishing, &c.

Finishing includes lettering, tooling, polishing, etc.

Finishing press, a small press used for holding books when they are being tooled (see Fig. 84).

Finishing press, a small press used to hold books while they are being finished (see Fig. 84).

Finishing stove, used for heating finishing tools.

Finishing stove, used for heating finishing tools.

Folder, a flat piece of ivory or bone, like a paper knife, used in folding sheets and in various other operations.

Folder, a flat piece of ivory or bone, similar to a paper knife, used for folding sheets and in various other tasks.

Foredge (fore edge), the front edge of the leaves. Pronounced “forrege.”

Foredge (fore edge), the front edge of the pages. Pronounced “for-rej.”

Forwarding, comprises all the operations between sewing and finishing, excepting headbanding.

Forwarding includes all the tasks between sewing and finishing, except for headbanding.

Gathering, collecting one sheet from each pile in a printer’s warehouse to make up a volume.[315]

Gathering, taking one sheet from each stack in a printer's warehouse to create a volume.[315]

Glaire, white of eggs beaten up, and used in finishing and edge gilding.

Glaire, whipped egg whites, used for finishing and edge gilding.

Half binding, when the leather covers the back and only part of the sides, a book is said to be half bound.

Half binding is when the leather covers the spine and only part of the sides; a book is described as half bound.

Head band, a fillet of silk or thread, worked at the head and tail of the back.

Head band, a strip of silk or thread, attached at the front and back of the head.

Head cap, the fold of leather over the head band (see Fig. 67).

Head cap, the leather fold over the headband (see Fig. 67).

Head and tail, the top and bottom of a book.

Head and tail, the beginning and end of a book.

Imperfections, sheets rejected by the binder and returned to the printer to be replaced.

Imperfections, pages that the binder rejected and sent back to the printer for replacement.

India proofs, strictly first proofs only of an illustration pulled on “India paper,” but used indiscriminately for all illustrations printed on India paper.

India proofs, strictly the first proofs only of an illustration printed on "India paper," but used interchangeably for all illustrations printed on India paper.

Inset, the portion of a sheet cut off and inserted in folding certain sizes, such as duodecimo, &c. (see Fig. 4).

Inset, the part of a sheet that is cut off and added in when folding to specific sizes, like duodecimo, etc. (see Fig. 4).

Inside margins, the border made by the turn in of the leather on the inside face of the boards (see Fig. 116).

Inside margins, the edge created by the inward fold of the leather on the inner side of the boards (see Fig. 116).

Joints, (1) the groove formed in backing to receive the ends of the mill-boards. (2) The part of the binding that bends when the boards are opened. (3) Strips of leather or cloth used to strengthen the end papers.

Joints, (1) the groove created in the backing to hold the ends of the mill-boards. (2) The section of the binding that flexes when the boards are opened. (3) Strips of leather or fabric used to reinforce the end papers.

Kettle stitch,” catch stitch formed in sewing at the head and tail.

Kettle stitch,” a catch stitch made in sewing at the beginning and end.

Lacing in, lacing the slips through holes in the boards to attach them.

Lacing in, threading the slips through holes in the boards to secure them.

Lying press, the term applied to the under side of the cutting press used for backing, usually ungrammatically called “laying press.”

Lying press, the term used for the underside of the cutting press used for backing, commonly but incorrectly referred to as the “laying press.”

Marbling, colouring the edges and end papers in various patterns, obtained by floating colours on a gum solution.

Marbling is the process of coloring the edges and endpapers with different patterns by floating colors on a gum solution.

Millboard machine, machine used for squaring boards;[316] should only be used for cheap work, as an edge cut by it will not be as square as if cut by the plough.

Millboard machine, a machine for squaring boards;[316] should only be used for low-cost projects, as an edge cut by it won't be as square as one cut by the plow.

Mitring, (1) lines meeting at a right angle without overrunning are said to be mitred. (2) A join at 45° as in the leather on the inside of the boards.

Mitring, (1) lines that meet at a right angle without overlapping are called mitred. (2) A joint at 45° like the leather on the inside of the boards.

Overcasting, over-sewing the back edges of single leaves or weak sections.

Overcasting, sewing over the back edges of individual leaves or fragile sections.

Peel, a thin board on a handle used for hanging up sheets for drying.

Peel, a slim board attached to a handle for hanging sheets to dry.

Plate, an illustration printed from a plate. Term often incorrectly applied to illustrations printed from woodcuts. Any full-page illustration printed on different paper to the book is usually called a “plate.”

Plate, an illustration printed from a plate. This term is often mistakenly used for illustrations printed from woodcuts. Any full-page illustration printed on different paper than the book is typically referred to as a “plate.”

Pressing plates, plates of metal japanned or nickelled, used for giving finish to the leather on a book.

Pressing plates, metal plates that are coated or nickel-plated, used to add a finish to the leather on a book.

Press pin, an iron bar used for turning the screws of presses.

Press pin, a metal rod used for adjusting the screws of presses.

Proof, edges left uncut as “proof” that the book has not been unduly cut down.

Proof, edges left untrimmed as “proof” that the book has not been excessively trimmed.

Register, (i.) when the print on one side of a leaf falls exactly over that on the other it is said to register. (ii.) Ribbon placed in a book as a marker.

Register, (i.) when the print on one side of a page aligns perfectly with that on the other, it is said to register. (ii.) A ribbon used in a book as a bookmark.

Rolling machine, a machine in which the sheets of a book are subject to heavy pressure by being passed between rollers.

Rolling machine, a machine that applies heavy pressure to the sheets of a book by passing them between rollers.

Sawing in, when grooves are made in the back with a saw to receive the bands.

Sawing in is when grooves are cut into the back with a saw to hold the bands.

Section, the folded sheet.

Section, the folded page.

Semée or Semis, an heraldic term signifying sprinkled.

Semée or Semis, a heraldic term meaning sprinkled.

Set off, print is said to “set off” when part of the ink from a page comes off on an opposite page. This will happen if a book is pressed too soon after printing.[317]

Set off: print is referred to as “set off” when some of the ink from one page transfers to the opposite page. This occurs if a book is pressed too soon after printing.[317]

Sheet, the full size of the paper as printed, forming a section when folded.

Sheet, the complete size of the paper as printed, creating a section when folded.

Signature, the letter or figure placed on the first page of each sheet.

Signature, the letter or symbol placed on the first page of each sheet.

Slips, the ends of the sewing cord or tape that are attached to the boards.

Slips, the ends of the sewing cord or tape that are attached to the boards.

Squares, the portion of the boards projecting beyond the edges of the book.

Squares, the part of the boards that sticks out beyond the edges of the book.

Start, when, after cutting, one or more sections of the book come forward, making the fore edge irregular, they are said to have started.

Start, when, after cutting, one or more sections of the book protrude, making the fore edge uneven, they are said to have started.

Straight edge, a flat ruler.

Straight edge, a straight ruler.

Tacky, sticky.

Tacky and sticky.

T. E. G., top-edge gilt.

T. E. G., gold-tipped edges.

Trimmed. The edges of a book are said to be trimmed when the edges of the larger (or projecting) leaves only have been cut.

Trimmed. The edges of a book are called trimmed when only the edges of the larger (or sticking out) pages have been cut.

Tub, the stand which supports the lying press. Originally an actual tub to catch the shavings.

Tub, the stand that holds the lying press. It was originally a real tub used to collect the shavings.

Uncut, a book is said to be uncut when the edges of the paper have not been cut with the plough or guillotine.

Uncut, a book is referred to as uncut when the edges of the paper haven’t been trimmed with a plough or guillotine.

Unopened, the book is said to be unopened if the bolts of the sheets have not been cut.

Unopened, the book is considered unopened if the binding hasn’t been cut.

Waterproof sheets, sheets of celluloid, such as are used by photographers.

Waterproof sheets, sheets made of celluloid, like those used by photographers.

Whole binding, when the leather covers the back and sides of a volume.

Whole binding, where the leather wraps around the back and sides of a book.

Wire staples are used by certain machines in the place of thread for securing the sections.

Wire staples are used by some machines instead of thread to secure the sections.

Groove, that part of the sections which is turned over in backing to receive the board.[318]

Groove, the area of the sections that is folded back to hold the board. [318]

REPRODUCTIONS OF BINDINGS[319]

I., II., AND III.
Fifteenth Century Blind-Tooled Bindings

I., II., AND III.
15th Century Blind-Tooled Bindings

IV.
Sixteenth Century Binding with Simple Gold-Tooling[320]

IV.
Sixteenth-Century Binding with Simple Gold Gilding[320]

V., VI., VII., AND VIII.
Modern Bindings Designed by the Author[321]

V., VI., VII., AND VIII.
Modern Bindings Created by the Author[321]

I.—German Fifteenth Century. Pigskin. Actual size, 8¾″ × 6¼″.[323]

I.—German Fifteenth Century. Pigskin. Actual size, 8¾″ × 6¼″.[323]

II.—German Fifteenth Century. Calf. Actual size 12½″ × 8½″.[325]

II.—German Fifteenth Century. Calf. Actual size 12½″ × 8½″.[325]

III.—Italian Fifteenth Century. Sheepskin, with coloured roundels. Actual size, 11½″ × 8¼″.[327]

III.—Italian Fifteenth Century. Sheepskin, with colored roundels. Actual size, 11½″ × 8¼″.[327]

IV.—Italian Sixteenth Century. Actual size, 12½″ × 8½″. Goatskin.[330]

IV.—Italian Sixteenth Century. Actual size, 12½″ × 8½″. Goatskin.[330]

V.—Half Niger morocco, with sides of English oak. Actual size, 17″ × 11½″.[332]

V.—Half Niger morocco, with sides of English oak. Actual size, 17″ × 11½″.[332]

VI.—Niger morocco, inlaid green leaves. Actual size, 8¼″ × 5½″.[334]

VI.—Niger morocco, with green leaves inlaid. Actual size, 8¼″ × 5½″.[334]

VII.—Green levant, inlaid with lighter green panel and red dots. Actual size, 6¾″ × 4½″.[336]

VII.—Green leather, inlaid with a lighter green panel and red dots. Actual size, 6¾″ × 4½″.[336]

Niger morocco, executed by a student of the Central School of Arts and Crafts.

Niger morocco, executed by a student of the Central School of Arts and Crafts.

VIII.—Niger morocco, executed by a student of the Central School of Arts and Crafts. Actual size, 11¾″ × 9¼″.

VIII.—Niger morocco, created by a student from the Central School of Arts and Crafts. Actual size, 11¾″ × 9¼″.

INDEX[337]

  • Press briefing, 229, 313
  • Arms blocks, 228
  • Art paper, 48, 282
  • Autograph letters, 179[338]
  •  
  • Support, 117
  • Backing hammer, 123
  • Back, lining up, 152
  • Band nippers, 160, 163
  • Bands, 313
  • Bandstick, 160
  • Beating, 90
  • Beating stone, 90, 313
  • Benzine, 207, 209
  • Binding, decoration of, 21, 30, 188, 233
  • Binding, collotype reproductions of, 321-336
  • Binding, embroidered, 186
  • Binding early printed books, 31, 46, 113
  • Binding, extra, 308
  • Binding, jewelled, 263
  • Binding, library, 27, 173, 308
  • Binding, manuscripts, 31, 108, 113, 125, 135, 223
  • Binding, metal-covered, 263
  • Binding, vellum, 180
  • Binding very thin books, 177
  • Blind tooling, 188, 222
  • Blocking press, 229, 313
  • Blocks, striking, 229
  • Boards, 124
  • Boards, attaching, 132
  • Boards, cutting, 125
  • Boards, filling in, 170
  • Boards, lining, 129
  • Boards, pressing, 193, 210
  • Boards, split, 28, 175, 311
  • Bodkin, 114
  • Bookbinding as a profession, 32
  • Books in sheets, 34
  • Bookworms, 297
  • Borders, designing, 240
  • Borders, inside, 253
  •  
  • Calf, 27, 277
  • Cancelled sheets, 43
  • Cased books, 19, 49
  • Castor oil, 303
  • Catch stitch, 99
  • Catch words, 314
  • Celluloid, sheets of, 161
  • Centres, designing, 241
  • Chrome leather, 276
  • Clasps and ties, 183, 259
  • Cleaning off back, 137
  • Cloth casing, 19, 49
  • Cloth joints, 86, 257
  • Cobden-Sanderson, T. J., xii., 22
  • Cockroaches, 300
  • Cocoanut oil, 200
  • [339]Collating, 43
  • Colouring edges, 144
  • Combining tools to form patterns, 232
  • Compasses, 131
  • Cord sewing, 111
  • Corners, mitring, 165, 168
  • Cousin, Jules, 74, 299
  • Covering, 23, 159, 176, 310
  • Crushing the grain of leather, 192
  • Cutting in boards, 139
  • Cutting mill-boards, 124
  • Cutting press, 128
  •  
  • Wet, effect of, on bindings, 294
  • Decoration of bindings, 21, 30, 188, 233
  • Designing tools, 230
  • Diaper patterns, 236
  • Dividers, 51
  • Dots, striking, 205
  • Doubluves, 253, 314
  • Dressing for old bindings, 302
  • Dust and dusting, 296
  •  
  • Early printed books, binding, 31, 46, 113
  • Edge colouring, 144
  • Edge gauffering, 144
  • Edge gilding, 95, 144
  • Edge sizing, 95, 146
  • Edges, painted, 146
  • Embroidered bindings, 186
  • End papers, 80, 254
  • End, painted, 83
  • End, vellum, 84
  • Ends, silk, 84
  • Entering, 33
  • Evelyn’s Diary (quotation), 282
  • “Extra” binding, 308, 314
  •  
  • False bands, 26
  • Fillet, 190, 206
  • Fillet, small, 206, 246
  • Filling in boards, 170
  • Finishing, 191
  • Finishing press, 194
  • Finishing tools, 188
  • Finishing stove, 195
  • Flattening vellum, 65
  • Folder, 164
  • Folding, 36
  • Fraying out slips, 114
  • French joint, 176
  • French paring knife, 156
  • French standing press, 91
  •  
  • Gasoline fumes, effect of, 291
  • Gathering, 35
  • Gauffering edges, 144
  • Gelatine, 70
  • Gilding edges, 95, 144
  • Gilt top, 92
  • Glaire, 97, 198
  • Glass, tinted, for libraries, 292
  • Glossary, 313
  • Glue, 289
  • Glueing up, 115
  • Goatskin, 277
  • Gold cushion, 200
  • Gold leaf, 199
  • Gold knife, 200
  • Gold, net for, 96
  • Gold, pad for, 201
  • Gold tooling, 188, 191
  • Gouges, 189, 205, 247
  • Groove (see Joint)
  • Guarding, 42, 53
  • Guarding plates, 50, 56, 316
  •  
  • Tool, backing, 123
  • Hand-made paper, 280
  • Headbanding, 108, 147, 176
  • Headcaps, 156, 166
  • Heat, effect of, on bindings, 295
  • [340]Heraldry on bindings, 227
  • Hinging plates, 57
  • Hollow backs, 25, 185
  •  
  • Flaws, 35
  • India proofs, soaking off, 62
  • India proofs, mounting, 63
  • Indiarubber for gold, 207
  • Inlaying leather, 213, 232, 243
  • Inlaying leaves or plates, 64
  • Inset, 40, 315
  • Inside margins, 253
  •  
  • Jaconet, 60, 64
  • Japanese paper, 282
  • Japanese vellum, 282
  • Jewelled bindings, 263
  • Joint, 165, 169
  • Joint, cloth, 86, 257
  • Joint, French, 176
  • Joint, knocking out, 53
  • Joint, leather, 86, 171
  •  
  • Teapot stitch, 49, 99, 105
  • Keys, sewing, 101
  • Knife, mountcutters’, 54
  • Knife, French paring, 156
  • Knife, gold, 200
  • Knife, plough, 129, 139
  • Knocking down iron, 53, 134
  • Knocking out joints, 53
  • Knot, 100, 106
  •  
  • Tying shoes in slips, 132
  • Lay cords, 100
  • Laying press (see Lying press)
  • Leather, 27, 263
  • Leather, chrome, 276
  • Leather, crushing grain of, 192
  • Leather, inlaying, 213, 232, 243
  • Leather joints, 86, 171
  • Leather, paring, 154
  • Leather, polishing, 191
  • Leather, sprinkling and marbling, 27, 279
  • Leather, stretching, 23, 161
  • Leather, testing, 274
  • Leather work, 226
  • Leaves, inlaying, 64
  • Lettering, 28, 215, 246
  • Letters, autograph, 179
  • Library binding, 27, 173, 308
  • Light, effect of, on leather, 292
  • Lining up back, 152
  • Lithographic stone, 157, 160
  • Loose covers, 304
  • Lying press, 128
  •  
  • Documents, binding of, 31, 108, 113, 125, 135, 223
  • Manuscripts, collating, 46
  • Maps, throwing out, 60
  • Marbled paper, 83
  • Margins, inside, 253
  • Marking up, 98
  • Materials for sewing, 111
  • Mending, 76
  • Mending tooling, 208
  • Mending vellum, 79
  • Metal on bindings, 262
  • Millboards, 124
  • Millboard machine, 127, 315
  • Millboard shears, 126
  • Mitring corners, 165, 168
  • Morocco, 277
  • Morocco, “Persian,” 271
  • Mount-cutters’ knife, 54
  • Mounting India-proofs, 63
  • Mounting very thin paper, 63
  •  
  • Net for gilding edges, 96
  • Niger morocco, 278
  • Nipping press, 211
  • Nippers, band, 160, 163
  •  
  • [341]Oil, cocoanut, 200
  • Opening newly-bound books, 257
  • Overcasting, 51
  • “Overs,” 35
  • Oxalic acid, use of, 173
  •  
  • Pad for gold, 201
  • Paging, 44
  • Painted edges, 146
  • Painted end papers, 83
  • Pallets, 189
  • Paper, 280
  • Paper, art, 48, 283
  • Paper, hand-made, 280
  • Paper, Japanese, 282
  • Paper, marbled, 83
  • Paper, sizes of, 36, 283
  • Paper, sizing, 67
  • Paper, splitting, 63
  • Paper, washing, 71
  • Paraffin wax, 303
  • Paring leather, 154
  • Paring paper, 61
  • Paring stone, 157, 160
  • Pastes, 286
  • Paste water, 198
  • Pasting down end papers, 254
  • Patterns, 232
  • “Peel,” 316
  • Permanent binding, 19
  • “Persian” morocco, 271
  • Pigskin, 278
  • Plates, detaching, 48
  • Plates, guarding, 56
  • Plates, hinging, 57
  • Plates, inlaying, 64
  • Plates, trimming, 40
  • Plough, 128
  • Plough knife, 129, 139
  • Polishing, 191
  • Preserving old bindings, 302
  • Press, arming, 229, 313
  • Press, blocking, 229, 313
  • Press, cutting, 128
  • Press, finishing, 194
  • Press, lying, 128
  • Press, nipping, 211
  • Press pin, 316
  • Press, sewing (see Sewing frame)
  • Press, standing, 88
  • Pressing boards, 193, 210
  • Pressing in boards, 138
  • Pressing plates, 192, 316
  • Pressing sections, 87
  • “Proof,” 316
  • Publishers’ binding, 20
  • Pulling to pieces, 46
  •  
  • Quarterly sections, 42
  • Quires, books in, 34
  •  
  • Rats and mice, 299
  • Re-backing, 305
  • Re-binding, 18, 306
  • Refolding, 51
  • Register of printing, 52, 316
  • Representations of bindings, 321-336
  • Roll, 190
  • Rounding, 117
  •  
  • Cutting in, 20, 25, 100, 108
  • Scrap books, 178
  • Sealskin, 278
  • Sections, pressing, 87
  • Sewing, 100
  • Sewing cord, 111
  • Sewing frame, 100
  • Sewing keys, 101
  • Sewing on tapes, 26, 111, 174
  • Sewing on vellum slips, 111, 181
  • Sewing silk, 112
  • Sewing, tape for, 112
  • Sewing thread, 112
  • Sheepskin, 277-308
  • [342]Sheets, books in, 34
  • Sheets, waterproof, 161
  • Signatures, 34, 43
  • Silk ends, 84
  • Silk sewing, 112
  • Sizes of paper, 36, 283
  • Sizing, 67
  • Sizing edges, 95-146
  • Sizing leather, 198
  • Sizing paper, 67
  • Slips, 317
  • Slips, fraying out, 114
  • Slips, lacing in, 132
  • Soaking off India proofs, 62
  • Society of Arts, Report of Committee on Leather for Bookbinding, 22, 264
  • Society of Arts, Report of Committee on Paper, 284
  • Specifications, 308
  • Split boards, 28, 175, 311
  • Splitting paper, 63
  • Sprinkling leather, 27, 279
  • Squares, 131, 153, 317
  • Standing press, 88
  • Standing press, French, 89, 91
  • Staples, wire, 49
  • “Starred” sheets, 43
  • Stove, finishing, 195
  • Stone, lithographic, 157, 160
  • Striking dots, 205
  • Striking tools, 204
  •  
  • Tape, sewing on, 26, 112, 174
  • Temporary binding, 20
  • Testing leather, 274
  • Thin books, binding, 177
  • Thin paper, mounting, 63
  • Thread, sewing, 112
  • Throwing out maps, 60
  • Ties and clasps, 183, 259
  • Tobacco smoke, effect of, on binding, 294
  • Tooling, blind, 188, 222
  • Tooling, gold, 24, 188, 191
  • Tooling on vellum, 212
  • Tools, designing, 188, 230
  • Tools, finishing, 188, 230
  • Training for bookbinding, 32
  • Trimming before sewing, 93
  • Trimming machine, 94
  • Trimming plates, 40
  • Tub, 317
  • Tying up, 167
  •  
  • Wood finish, 209
  • Vellum binders, 26
  • Vellum bindings, 180
  • Vellum ends, 84
  • Vellum, flattening, 65
  • Vellum, Japanese, 282
  • Vellum, mending, 79
  • Vellum slips, sewing on, 111, 183
  • Vellum tooling on, 212
  •  
  • Walker, Emery, 216
  • Washing, 71
  • Waterproof sheets, 161
  • Weaver’s knot, 106
  • Wooden boards, 32, 135, 223, 330
  • Worm holes, 78, 297

THE ARTISTIC CRAFTS SERIES OF TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS.[343]

Edited by W. R. Lethaby.

Edited by W. R. Lethaby.

The series will appeal to handicraftsmen in the industrial and mechanic arts. It consists of authoritative statements by experts in every field for the exercise of ingenuity, taste, imagination—the whole sphere of the so-called “dependent arts.”

The series will attract craftsmen in the industrial and mechanical fields. It includes authoritative insights from experts in each area, encouraging creativity, style, and imagination—the entire realm of the so-called “dependent arts.”


BOOKBINDING AND THE CARE OF BOOKS. A Handbook for Amateurs, Bookbinders, and Librarians. By Douglas Cockerell. With 120 Illustrations and Diagrams by Noel Rooke, and 8 collotype reproductions of binding. 12mo. $1.25 net.

BOOKBINDING AND THE CARE OF BOOKS. A Handbook for Amateurs, Bookbinders, and Librarians. By Douglas Cockerell. With 120 Illustrations and Diagrams by Noel Rooke, and 8 collotype reproductions of binding. 12mo. $1.25 net.

SILVERWORK AND JEWELRY. A Text-Book for Students and Workers in Metal. By H. Wilson. With 160 Diagrams and 16 full-page Illustrations, 12mo. $1.40 net.

SILVERWORK AND JEWELRY. A Textbook for Students and Workers in Metal. By H. Wilson. With 160 Diagrams and 16 full-page Illustrations, 12mo. $1.40 net.

WOOD CARVING: DESIGN AND WORKMANSHIP. By George Jack. With Drawings by the Author and other Illustrations. $1.40 net.

WOOD CARVING: DESIGN AND WORKMANSHIP. By George Jack. With Drawings by the Author and other Illustrations. $1.40 net.

STAINED-GLASS WORK. A Text-Book for Students and Workers in Glass. By C. W. Whall. With Diagrams by two of his Apprentices, and other Illustrations. $1.50 net; postage, 14 cents additional.

STAINED-GLASS WORK. A Textbook for Students and Workers in Glass. By C.W. Whall. With Diagrams by two of his Apprentices, and other Illustrations. $1.50 net; postage, 14 cents extra.


D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.

D. APPLETON AND COMPANY, NEW YORK.

Transcriber's Note

Obvious typographical errors have been corrected. Spelling has been normalized. For the detailed list please see the list below. If your cursor turns into a hand while you hover it over an illustration, the click on that illustration will open its larger version.

Obvious typos have been fixed. Spelling has been standardized. For the detailed list, please see below. If your cursor changes to a hand while hovering over an illustration, clicking on that illustration will open its larger version.

  • page 014—typo fixed: changed 'Making' to 'Marking'
  • page 138—spelling normalized: changed 'head-banding' to 'headbanding'
  • page 159—typo fixed: changed 'wook' to 'wood'
  • page 173—typo fixed: changed 'CHAPTER VIII' to 'CHAPTER XIII'
  • page 198—typo fixed: changed 'isinglas' to 'isinglass'
  • page 249—spelling normalized: changed 'tie downs' to 'tie-downs'
  • page 253—spelling normalized: changed 'headcap' to 'head-cap'
  • page 298—spelling normalized: changed 'millboard' to 'mill-board'
  • page 303—spelling normalized: changed 're-binding' to 'rebinding'
  • page 304—spelling normalized: changed 'millboard' to 'mill-board'
  • page 310—spelling normalized: changed 'Goat-skin' to 'Goatskin'
  • page 314—spelling normalized: changed 'head-banding' to 'headbanding'
  • page 315—spelling normalized: changed 'millboards' to 'mill-boards'
  • page 339—spelling normalized: changed 'millboards' to 'mill-boards'
  • page 341—spelling normalized: changed 'Re-folding' to 'Refolding'



        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!